AutoCAD 2D and 3D Masterclass

1. Introduction: Welcome to autocad 2D and 3D masterclass. What is autocorrect? What is a computer aided design and drafting software is developed by Autodesk and it is used for handle and manage and draw a radius to the plants as well as 3D models quickly through AutoCad. Now, auto-grader is also used in other professions such as mechanical engineers, graphic designers, interior designers, including urban designers. So in this course, we'll be going through in depth to a generic command and its tools used in autocratic will be also understanding radius methods to approach it and how to use it. For the more that causes order in such a way that it will be easy to understand through practical approach. Additionally, there are examples or test in this course will reach you will be good learning step-by-step procedure to create plans and 3D models. Also, we will be learning to render 3D models into realistic visuals. Thank you for enrolling. See you in class. 2. User Interface: Welcome back. In this part, we will go through the basic interface of what, okay? Once you open the autopilot, you will have this layout on your screen. On the left-hand side, we'll get started options. On the middle part, we already recent documents that which will show the recently opened documents. On the right-hand side, we are notifications that so some usual notifications about updates and stuff from Autodesk. And then below that we have connect option through which you can login with your Autodesk ID, which will let you sync your files and plants and sheets, etc, through your various devices. Now, I will start by default, start growing option here. Okay? So on the bottom we have all these tools are panels and everything. This whole area containing all the two sets, panels and tabs is called the ribbon. Okay, So there are various steps. Home tab, eNodeB, managed Deb, you Output tab, Insert tab and so on. Each step contains all its own panels. These are called Draw panel, modify bell annotation panel, Layers, panel, et cetera. Now, this OLED panels contains each on its own two sets. For example, if I want to draw a circle, I can go to the ribbon part. Again, go to the Home tab. I can go to the circle tool and I can draw the circle. This is called taps, and these are called panels, which contains all the tool sets here in dimension, we have options for all the dimension 2s. Okay, Moving onto the next thing. This is called drawing area with all these grades and Blake and Gregory, it's on the big screen. This is called growing area. You can scroll around with this middle mouse button or you can pan around with this middle mouse-click button. So you can zoom in and zoom out his crew wheel up and down. Okay, So coming to the next thing, this is called viewports. From this option you can switch between or you can toggle between different views. That will be helpful in 3D portion too. And the next year we have 2D Wireframe conceptual hidden. These are all the visual status of a model, which we'll go through in 3D portion again. Now, on the right-hand side we have this view cube. You can again switch between different views like SVD to hear through this view cube. So I can click on this bottom arrow and this will take us to the front view. I didn't move back to the top view. I can also rotate our drawing area through these arrows. Now, the next thing is Quick Access Toolbar. On the top hand side via this tiny options are tiny icons. This is called Quick Access Toolbar. You can also in India told this options or whatever on your quick access toolbar through this quick extent toggle. Okay, also I can switch between different workstations in the Quick Access Toolbar. Suppose this is, this workstation currently we are working on is for drafting annotation that is mostly based on Tuesday. Now we can go to 3D basis and we can also go to the 3D modelling workstation, which will enable all these different tools sets in our ribbon area for the same discipline. Coming to the next thing, this below we have is command line. This whole line it is called command line. You can close this through by tracing this close button, and you can also enable it back by pressing control and I on your keyboard. Okay, so what is command-line used for? Okay, Before that, I would like to let you know that total grade is a tool-based as well as command best software mode. Does that mean? It means that each each 2s that has, that has a specific command in AutoCad, for example, if I want to draw a circle, I can easily draw a circle through this to set. When I click on this circle, you can see you're dead the circle specify centre point for cervical or three PEA or droopy or 1010 radius, which shows that the circle command is activated on command line even when I click on this circle too. So I can draw a circle like this first and the second. We have also occur on the screen. I can also do the same width command. So shortcut key for the circle command is CIR. Now to activate command, I can press Enter or Spacebar. Also, it shows me that the circle command is available at the CIR, are all the commands data starting with the CIR. So I will press Enter, this will also activate this circle. I can draw the circle again. Okay, So we went through a basic interface of obeyed by working on our target. If you have any doubts, you can always get help from this top night wishing mark icon. Okay. When you click on that, this will open this Autodesk online help. If I have no doubts or problems with line tool, I can type line here and press Enter. This will show me all the documentations they have or all the help I need or I can get for the line command and alliterative to line 2. I also, I would like to mention one more thing. You can see this older grades on the screen. That's great. I will read the circles for now. Okay. Oh, this grid lines can be enabled and disabled through this status bar to breed your display. Greg Vaughan and is green grid off. I can enable and disable that. Also. I can do that with the shortcut key seven, C function, then F7 again. And this will enable the 3D lines. 3. Navigation and Zoom Tool: Welcome back guys. In previous lecture, we rented the basic interface of WaterGuard. In this video lecture, I will take you through navigation and various Zoom tools for the starter. As we studied in earlier lecture, we know that we can move around the drawing screen with the pen tool. You can just hold your mouse, middle, middle mouse button and drag around to move around deterring screen. You can also do this by the band command, that is N, and I will post activate the command. This will activate the pen combined in this graph similar to the medium malls but didn't ban. You can also activate this command to this sidebar. The sidebar contains various navigation tools for, for the time being, we're just going to go through the pan and zoom tools. Again, activity depend command from here again. And I wouldn't can also activities that are various Zoom tools from this Zoom icon. Okay, so let's go with this first one that is zoom extents, okay, currently you can see that I am in no zoomed in part of the string, okay? Suppose, say here, and now I will activate this zoom extents. What does this do is it's like the Zoom Fritz third drawing Inner Join screen. To better understand this, I will just draw a line over here like this. Okay? I will just creates more walks over here. Okay? It's not perfect. Okay, so now it is so many in any part of this drawing. And when I activity zoom extents again, it will again zoom food to hold growing area in our drawing screen. So now part of our drawing will be out of our drawing screen for the time being. I already had this for now. Let me do the next option that is Zoom window. Now what does this Zoom window Min. Okay, as you can see, my activity, this command, it shows me there specify the first quarter moon. So 3 through this Zoom window, I have to create a window, or you can say rectangle. And all of that part of the rectangle will be zoomed in. Suppose I say I need to work on this long and it create the first here and second here. This is a zoom-in to the lawn area or the window area that I have created. Coming to the next point, that is zoom previous. Now, we before we created the Zoom window and zoomed into the loan, what at the point where we were to zoom previous tool will take us back to that. When I click on Zoom TVs. And it will zoom out with the point before that, the zoomed in. Now, next one is zoom real time. Okay, So if I want to zoom in again, hold and drag the mouse of flood, it will zoom out, zoom in. And when I drag and hold tunnels outward to zoom out. As you can see, like this. And like that. While moving upward, it zooms in and we're moving down into tau. Okay, So next point is Zoom oil. So for example, if I zoom into this area, inactivate the comma, zoom all the way to zoom out the drawing is as it did in the zoom extent. But the change here is that it would also consider the x and y-axis point on this as a drawing. So if I move this, I will click on this. Now the more of this to say take this far and I will zoom into this plan again. Now when I edit screen again, activity Zoom or Zoom out to the drawing. And it will also bring back the x and y axes point and back to the drawing. The next tool is zoom dynamic. Okay, We will get to some dynamic introduce portion of the course. Next one is zoom scale. Now through this, I can, I can just to do them or describe this scale factor for the zooming. So if I say one do zoom way to scale factor of 150 feet, I'll type 153 and I'll press Enter the zoomed into drawing it the factor of 150. You didn't see this. Next vector. Next tool is Zoom Santa. When activate Zoom center, we have to specify our center point for our drawing. So says the lawn Elaine, and specify the height for the drawing or site or magnification factor. So I will just type in 115 feet and press Enter. This will zoom into the drawing at the point from the center point with the periphery coding of 15 feet around. So many equal weight when we do our first from our central want you to waste 15 feet and below or bottom of that will be 15 feet. Next tool is Zoom octet. Okay, This is very good. If I, if I'm working in this area and I want to edit this bloke or work on this pool table. I will just select that object with this option and press Enter. This will zoom in between his feet, the total portion of the block in our drawing area. Next one is zoom in and zoom out of it. This is really simple as we did layer with the mouse wheel. So on bracing, zoom in, zoom in as step, and then pressing zoom out, zoom out to step eight, okay, the last or last used Zoom tool or Zoom I can very visibly or so if currently we are zoomed out. So when I place a lien on this without going into the fourth row options from this small arrow, it will zoom out. So you can use this as a shortcut key for you. Mostly use zoom tool, which will be, which can be convenient to your workflow. Okay, so that's it for this lecture. 4. Opening and Saving files: In previous class, we learned how to open a new drawing on how to start getting with drawing. Similarly pivot straight here. Okay, so now our node new drawing has been opened. Then add other various similar ways to open a new drawing. To do that, you can go to the AutoCad and click this Autolite low on. You can start by clicking on this new sweet also open a new drawing. For example, you hear when you will have default templates here. If you want to draw on the 2D, you can just go with this aid kit template and we can click on this open button. We'll get back to the templates and everything on coming portions. Now, there is another way to starting your drink. You can go to this query Access toolbar and click on this new way. You can also open a new drawing. Exactly. Now, these are called file types. You can see that you can switch between your different attitude ranks through the steps. To edit the visibility of this file types, you can go to the View tab and you will have this file types option here. And 10 is also a layout tabs option to tentacles from mortal layout, Layout 1 and 2 that is below here. We'll also get to them on the sheet tendon sheet management portion. Okay. So this file types, suppose a disability fired apps. So I cannot switch between 10 to within taught together, I will have to go to this autograder option, and this will show my older drawings active, indifferent or tickets. To again enable the file types. I can switch back to switch, done this on antisocial switch me back to the biotypes option. Okay? So this is how we can enable and disable file types now, okay, so now to open an existing AutoCad file, I can do that by clicking this open Nikon on this Quick Access Toolbar. Or I can go to this auto can't icon and open the file menu and click on this open. Okay. Then you have to locate your files that you have saved on the phylum and so forth that I will go to Documents and I will locate my fire. So I will as hotels, I can open this existing AutoCad file. See prorate. This will open the old existing or direct fire. That's it for this lecture. If you have any doubts, you can contact me. Thank you. 5. Unit Setup: Welcome back. In this video tutorial, we will learn how you can set up the growing units. So you can open the drain Unit Setup tab by pressing the shortcut key, that is u and an Enter or Spacebar. This will open up the drawing Units Setup. You can also open this from this auto grid icon. You can go to the Drawing Utilities and activity units from the year. Okay, So there is a datatype, so few minutes inland portion. So you can see that it's architecturally decimal engineering freshmen and scientific option. If you wish to work with MBO units, you can go with architectural engineering. And if you wish to work with the metric units, you can set it as their symbol. Next is intuition scale. So we will get to the precision at time 0. What does intuition scale? So when you insert a block or a component from other data file or an open any drafted locks. This will bring it into what scale you want to choose for that option. So in teas fruit, or this is totally depends on layout you're working on. If you're working in real units, I'd better. So there's tech, you switch to the embryo units first before you start growing your new drawing. Or you can also add a desert you're going to minions via drone. Next thing is angle. So you can switch between negative median seconds. Grads, gradients are sort of use units through this. This totally depends on the type of use or dipole grain you are drawing. You can also say that the position for the scene, okay, Now coming back to the precision, okay, let me put it this way. Phi three zeros after the decimal points. It will let me draw line with accuracy of three decimal points after the main unit. So I will set it to 34 points. And every silky, for example, I will draw a line of say, 4. Okay, and in the decimal units, and now we have wood H6, 12 and press Enter. This will draw a line of 4.8612 units, so to say meter. Now, when a tenth or unit vector the unit setup, okay, and then a tentative decision to two, to say, Okay, two points, okay? And I press Okay. Now when I measure this lane with distance command, that is BIS D, remember saying to specify this force coin renaming do measure and we'll specify the second that we need to measure. What does this Shores is that that is 4.86. Now what did overdue? We're when agendas the precision level from 40 points to the two decimal points, it rounded off the length of this line. So now you, I hope you have an idea of what does Parisian blue in this auto-grade. Similarly, you can toggle between this precision options in angle command. As lastly, we are this detection tool. Now in AutoCad, the detection or in altogether impractical, the detection works anticlockwise. So for this detection here, that is starts from 0 degree or say x exist. And for ongoing x2, why it is anticlockwise, so it doesn't not directionally 0, 90 degrees. Similarly, VSV go on. This is 180 degree and this is 270, and this is back to 360 degree or zeros. You know. You can also change between this is clockwise. This food don't all directions to starting from E to as 90, SWS 180 and W2 NS to 70 vowel letters. I will let this be a default. Okay, and at the bed last, we have this lightening units. You can switch between lightning units international omega1, we address. Okay. So that was it for the unit setup. Thank you. 6. Drawing Limit setup: Welcome back. In this tutorial, ever teach you how to set to drain limits? What is storing the image? And you are working on a precise plumber drawing. You need to setup a drawing limit within beyond which the area will be restricted in AutoCad is V naught. The drawing board here to view port we see here is in finite, so limitless. We do not have any limits as much as we can zoom out and we want to zoom in, we can, it is in finite. So we said about the drawing limits. Drawing limits can be actuated by the command limits. So I will type limits here and I will press Enter. On doing so, it will ask me to enter the coordinates for the limits. So by default is set to lower left corner. So there it is 000. I will open a limit from here around say here. So I will type Enter. Now it is asking for, asking me for next units. So next coordinate will be same, 12 and nine by default. So I will let it be and press Enter. Now, the limit is setup at 0, could win to nine units, but it is not visible. To see Dan limit is inactivated. We have two type of grid. And once you type the period, you will Option a year of limits. I would click on limits and I click on see display grid beyond limit. So I will click on No. So this will restrict the view of the grids beyond this limit. So me and cetera, drawing to be limited in this area. So when I tried to draw C, I can draw perennially at anywhere in the port. It is in finite digit this. But if I want to restrict joining me on this area, how do I do? I will go to limits. And I will turn on the limits by plugin on, on. Now, my drawing area will be restricted to only this window. So if I drive through line outside this, I can note, I can either go outside from this drawing, but I Ethan drew it under this area. So this was all about during the midst and how to set up during limits in auto. Yet, again, go back to the normal iTunes library type limits. Press Enter, sorry. Press Enter. And I will turn off their limits. Now, I will go to Grade Center and I would go to limits again and turn on. Yes. Now, our target is back to normal and I can also draw it anywhere I want. So this was all about drawing limits. Thank you. 7. Creating Templates: Welcome back. In previous lectures, we went through various basic interface to starting a new drawing and setting up units for the drawing. So we can create a template for our startup. So each time if you are working in architectural format or you say you have to work in inches or feet. Any, all your drawings, you do not have to start a new drawing. Set up units again for each and every time you start a new drawing. To do that, we can go, go to the Start drink option or you can also open the basic template straightaway. You have to open the 3D dot DWT and do work in 2D. You can open a decade dot DWT. Now you can see that the extension for the template file is leader. Will you be for the normal AutoCad file, Oregon SSIP plan or drawing, it is set to DWG. Now, you can also open this virtuous or the templates as per your needs. But for the moment, we will just open with a kid per DWT. Will equity or at the unit circle. Now, by default, the petition is so 2.4. Similarly units and the type is set to the decimal. I was tends to this to architectural, said to vision to say half, half-inch. And I will also change or the example change the angle to radians. And I will click painters and scale to fit except off inches. Now when I click Okay, this will ask me to, if I need to update the current unit setup to the new one and I will press Okay. Okay, so new Nimitz, new units are activated. Now when I start a new drawing, this will again has the basic or say it all the unit said to it's deployed. Now, when I click on UN anecdote, the drawing unit, it will have the same thing. So when we start a new drawing, we do not have to repeat all this procedure. We can save our current setup work sacrum because stoma is set up as a template. So to save this as template, you have to click on this Quick Access Toolbar as a service, I can meet small pencil on to sail mark and click on that. When you click on that, will take you to your Documents section. And for saving it as a template, all you have to do is simply click on this phase of type and hold over to drawing template autopilot, drawing tablet, that is DWT. This will also take me to the default folder of the auto add grain templates. I would've been name is and my custom to em wet okay. As a sale this order and this will again ask me for 10 description. I can say it's set to inches as units, as descriptions on extending five, fail-safe, so many templates in there, I need to go through ages of them to check what units IO setup for them or limit sales hit up for them. I can easily read the description and get diarrhea without opening them. And I'll click. Okay. So this is saved as my new custom template. I'll close that and I will also close this string for. Now. You can also open the new template from this small icon here, which when you click on this new icon, it will take you to the template layout options. So I will open my custom template from here. Okay? So when I open this new template, it is set to architects and arguments by default. And I do not have to loop through a unit setup and change the units for is Bernice for each dam and I open this template. So this is how template can help you for your work fast and also help you defining or customizing all new drugs as per your needs. So that is it for this drawing template lecture. Thank you and see you in next section. 8. Selection Methods: So in AutoCad, we have two types of selection methods. When I drag a Mach, when I click and drag the mouse on the right-hand side to be our blue highlight shown on the screen as you can see. And when I do the same, we'll green highlight shown in the screen. So what does this mean? When angle from right or you can say left to right. If you have a blue, when I go from right to left, we have a green. So to understand this better, I have our example here. So when I try to select this from left to right and see that this whole row, moreover, area, older parcel of this will be highlighted or selected. But when I do from right to left, it will be the same. Let me show you the difference. So when I select this lines, put a bow lines from left to right, it will only select this column part. But when a due from this right to left with green one, it would also let T Hall lines. So the blue would selection works as it will only select the entities that are fully covered within the selection area. What happens in the green selection? It will also call all the entities that touches the selection area. So if I'm doing like this from left to right, right to left. So you can see the whole column has been covered, but it only covers the half of this land, yet it will also select the lines until it NDT ends like I did here. So how does this help us? Let's see an example here. So if I wasn't all, you want to skip this chair. You can see all parts of this Jira separate. So while doing so, if I tried to select this chair like this, you can also select the reception part. So if I want to move this, you can see it will also bring the reception part. So if I only want to save this specific Chen I can do there is blue, this blue selection. So when a drink and hold and select this blue, and then covered the whole area of chair under this blue selection. Like undo the reception is not covered like this. So it would only cover the area that is fully, or you can say only covered entity that is fully under the selection area like this. Now I can move this chair easily without any hassle. So these are two types of selection methods in AutoCad. Thank you. 9. Drawing Lines: Welcome back. In previous lectures we learned about user interface, drink limits, templates, and so on. From starting from this portion, you will be getting more practical to the drawing approach. So in this point or this video, we will go to the basic tool that is line. So to draw a line, you can also select this from the ribbon and Home tab from the drop panel and line 2. And the command offline will be activated, as you can see here. So you can also draw the line from mouse. I will specify the force point as this point and the second at this point. Now, it will go on and on until you exit, the command, line command will be activated. So I again drew right, this length is like this. And then finally I can press Escape key and exit the line command. Now, I will again activate the line command. So second method, method for drawing a line is to specify the coordinates points. So I will specify it the first coordinate point as it ten comma ten. So it will take as x, xs with on ten coordinates and y exists on ten coordinates and press Enter. That will be my first. Now, the second I will specify, specify it as a 10 comma 15. So that is a 10-year coordinate on x-axis and 15 Korean from y-axis. Press Enter. Now again onto, to move the right-hand side, I can again type it as a, say like 15 coma ten, that is, it will move on 15 coordinate on the x-axis detection. And 10 again, it will means it will stay in the same line. Or you can say it will go down on the white legs is now as this. And I can connect this now to another way of activating the line command is by pressing the L. L is a shortcut key for line command. I will replace l and press Enter or Space bar. This will again activate the man command. Now, there is another shortcut key, or you can say our deep four-line. When I press line command, when I'm drawing, say enter. Okay, So when I'm drawing, you can see that there is not going the same direction. Or you can say if I want to draw a straight vertical line in the straight plane, 90-degree ECMO. I cannot do that. You just have to hold Shift. And this will move in the same direction, or you can say as a right triangle detection only. When I press shift, this goes into shape direction. Also, when I wouldn't want to move further. So 90 degree angle, it would have been mown to 1900 on pressing Shift to lock itself in clock directions, only bone pressing the Shift button. Now, you can also enable this option from this status is called Ortho Mode. The shortcut key for or somebody's F8. Or you can also enable from this here. Okay, So when I try to draw in Ortho mode, it will only work in either vertical or horizontal straight angle you can not draw and middle part as C, or that I need to turn off the word somewhat NI can again move into that detections or another angles. So this is all about the line tool. Now, to make you familiar with the coordinate system followed in AutoCad, I would like to let you know that there are two types of main coordinate system. That is absolute coordinate system and relative coordinate system. Okay? There are, so there are two soap software to coordinate system. One is related to rectangular coordinate system and another one is there to pull our coordinate system. So what is a coordinate system? We all know that there are four x's or say x, y, and y on the bottom part, and the x on the left-hand part of the suit. There are four parts in excess, and mainly we work in only one in auto-grade. But you can also work with the commands of two followed by absolute or relative system. So when there is a dynamic and put option here, when Dynamic Input option is on, the relative method will be followed by 10 drawings with the commands. And when Dynamic Input option is off, the absolute method will be followed by drawing through commands. To better understand this, I will try to demonstrate through this small graph here. You can see it. This is x-axis and y-axis 0. So this is for the absolute coordinate system. When I type four dash three, it will draw a line from four points from the x-axis and three points from the y-axis. But you in relative coordinate system, when I type the first is 0, 0 Enter. So it will take the first of the line as 0000, but after the second, it will be for 31 third, it will not take the 00 as a reference point to 43 will be changed to 0000 for the relative system. So let's try to pitch an example. Okay? Currently the Dynamic Input is of, so I will turn on the dynamic input as we are now at two Modi relative coordinate system. Okay? You can also notify through this. Another difference is that while you are in Dynamic Input, when you enter a command, it will show you next to the course. You can see there is an edge or a command also activated here as well as here. So I will again get back and I return all the dynamic input when the Dynamic Input is off and I press any command or prints any keys, it will show all this available options on the left-hand side and below the command line. So to understand that we are to coordinate system, Let's say turn on the Dynamic Input now predicted with the line command. And I will press 0 dash. So 0 comma 0. This will activate the point at 0, 0. Now, to move on to the right-hand side, or you say I will again, just press F4 comma three, Enter. Now this Jew or point at four comma three. And now, as we discussed earlier, now the next reference point for the current line, or you can say current way we want to go will be 000 as at this point, it won't take any reference from this point. So I will press ten comma ten. This will move to another election on the ten. And you can see if I put praise comeback here, this will measure at the 10 points. So this is relative method. In further coming lectures, we will see each and every example specific for this, both to coordinate systems. Thank you. 10. Absolute Coordinate system: Welcome back. In an earlier lecture, we saw that there are two types of coordinates, histamine or target, absolute and relative. So in this lecture, we will go through the absolute coordinate system. Again, remember that whenever the Dynamic Input is on, it will be delayed to coordinate system. And whenever you turn off the dynamic input, it will take it as absolute coordinate system. So to understand the absolute coordinate system better, we will go through an example in this lecture. And again mentioning that in absolute coordinate system, that reference point of origin will be taken as 0, x is 0 of coordinate means that wherever the x and y axis meet here in all the reference points. But in the relative coordinate system, it would only take the reference point as last point that is used to order line. So you would understand it better after this example. So we will try to draw this figure with a command line. Okay? In this figure, our reference point, or you can say orange point of origin will be x, y axis over here. So we will first go on the 20 units on the x axis. That will be 20 units for the x and 0 units for the y, y 0 in it for the y because it is saying in the same line or same orientation in y-axis. So slowly swirling, we will draw this whole fever with the command line. Okay, so in command line, when you enter the oral coordinates, it is same as we do interpret tickle first x, then y. So first we will enter the value for the x axis and coma, and then we enter the value for the y axis. So let's start by activating the line command first. Or it's used the shortcut key L and press Spacebar quick to it. So you can see in the command line, the, we need to specify that, specify this first for the point of origin of our line. So I will type 0 comma 0, that is x and y both are 0, 0, the origin point. I press Enter. So you can see that our line is drawn now, or you can say of coastline was point of the line is activated. To. Now we have two more, the 20 units on the x axis. So that will be 20 coma 0. As we discussed or as I explained you earlier. It will again go on the 20 units on the x axis, staying on the 0 units for the y-axis. Now, we have to move 20 units upwards, like this. Ted will be 20 units for the y-axis, but as 0 units further x-axis. But in absolute coordinate method, the point of origin would always be taken from the 0. So when you do more, 20 x is 20 units on the y-axis and 20 units on the x-axis as well from this point to this point. So I had to next command will be 20 comma 20. As you can see. Now, we need to move 30 units on the right-hand side of the 20. But it is not a relative coordinate system. So we have to take tote and point of origin from 0. So that will be 20 and this 30, so 20 plus 30 is close to 50. So we need to go 50 units in total from 0 x's or 0 coordinate on the right hand side. So we will type 50 comma 20 by 20 because we need to stay on the 20 units on the y-axis, as we already got up here, like this. So from here to here, that will be 20 units on the Y and X, you 50 units for the acts. So I will type 15 comma 20. Exactly. Now, we're to tenures upside again on, as you can see, that if debt will be on the y-axis. So our command will be seen 50 units for the x and 20 units for the y, sorry, 30 units further away, 50 coma, 30. Okay, to understand this better, I suggest you do practice this. Shade. It, it will be available in resource section. So next point is 10. Again, we have to move ten units peck on the x. So we are moving back x. So that will be 40, 20 plus 30 was 50, but we have to move back on the x-axis, that will be 44 x. And we're to stay on the same line for the y. So there will be 40, 30. Right? Exactly. Now, again, we're to move on to 10 years for the air y-axis. Where are we still in the same point on the x-axis. So that will be 40 coma, 40 exactly. Next point is moving 10 units on the x-axis while staying at the same line on the y-axis. As you can see, for y, it will be same. But for the XP Maunder. We make a move on the right side. So our next command will be 50 comma 40. Again, we moved on the 15th point set to 30 and 20. So that is 50 at here. Now here to be more tenure, it's upside. So that will be 50 comma 54.3 x's, right? So now you can see that we are suddenly coming back on the 0, 0 or 0 coronet on the y-axis that meets on the x. So we are moving on the horizontal direction. Now a point to remember, whenever we are moving in the horizontal direction, it will be x. And whenever we have to move on though, particularly addiction, it will reconsider it for the y. So we are moving horizontal direction on the x axis, on the y, or ten minutes here. And take MIT is here and that will be 0. So what will be the command line that will be 0 for the x and 54 the Y again. And suddenly it's the same. Now we're moving back down to the 20 units. So we do not have to type the 20. We are already 50 units above this point. So we will type 0, Homer 30, Because we were to come into vertically come down on the y-axis, 220 points, but we have to specify the coordinate point on the y axis. It starts from the origin. That is, if you go from here, it will be 30, not 20. So we have to neglect that. From the 50 spin I press enter, it will activate the command, right? So now we have to move 20 units on the negative side. Whenever we are moving outside this y axis and below this x axis, it will reconsider as negative as we do in the practical. So there will be minus 20 units and coma 30 units SVM staying on the same line on the x or say why. And I would press Enter. Okay, that's it. So our next point is 60 units to the y axis. But you can see that it goes below the our zeros and teacher or 0 coordinate. So this will take it in the minus direction. So if we come down at here, it will be 30 units on the 0 coordinate line, and it will reopen in minus 30 below that 0 coordinate. So minutes, minute to type minus 22 stay on vertically same direction and y axis. And minus 30 to go below the x-axis. And I would press Enter. This will make this line as a 16th and hold. Now we have to move on the right-hand side on the x axis and y staring at the same point on the y-axis. So the command for that will be 0 minus 300 for the x. So this will move in this direction, 0 and minus 32, stay it. This point is minus 30. And press Enter. Now, our diagram is ready. I can either click and join over here or you can type 0 comma 0 to reign, get back to them origin point. Or you can also close this diagram. You feel when you can close the diagram, whenever two points collide in same line, like this, you can enclose the command. You can also do this by clicking on this close button. Also to shortcut for that will be c, and this will close our diagram. So our diagram is ready. I hope you understood this absolute coordinate system and I suggest you practice through this worksheet. Thank you. 11. Relative and Polar Coordinate system: Welcome back. In earlier lecture we saw about absolute coordinate system. In this, I will take you through there to coordinate system as well as put our coordinate system example. So let's start with the delay to coordinate system. I've drawn an example here or here. I mentioned all the coordinates x. Suppose 000 At this 0, 30-fold is 0.3234. This point, these are all absolute coordinates for this diagram, but could draw it with the 3D to coordinate system is as I mentioned earlier, in order to coordinate system, that reference point is always the last point drone. So suppose I activate the line command and throw the 00. But once I drew this line and reach this point, for, for doing this point, my reference point will be 0, 30, or this point. So let's try like my Dynamic Input is on for that air to coordinate system. Okay, I will activate the line command. Enter. Now, I will mention the first coordinate points that is 00, and our line command is active. Now, I would like to tell you that in red to coordinate system you always type at 31st. So before writing any coordinates, you have to write mentioned the actor it that is as UNC near the person it is appeared. Now, I will type to host distance that is 30 or x axis and 0 for y, x is to 30 comma 0. Enter, okay? Okay, so next, for next point going upwards, at this point, that is 30, 30, that is because YouTube absolute coordinate system from this reference point. But now our reference point is 0 comma 13. This will change into 000 for us. So this currently these coin from, from where the line is originating is 000 for us to go up first, I need to type the command in relation with this point, depending on this point as it is 000 for us now. So if I want to move words, I need to see it 0 units on my y-axis, but I need to move on. Xx is like this. So I'm not moving on x axis, I will be moving on white and y axes. So that will be 0 for x and 30-fold. Why at this point? So I will type red threat. As we discussed earlier, we're always mention a thread before the commands in relative as well as polar system. Now I type 30 coma. So 0 comma 30, press Enter. So this drew a line from this reference point at 0, 230. Now, next point will be, I have to go 10 units like this. On the left-hand side on ex existing at the same 0 by exist. But this is because of absolute coordinate system. Now, as we look here, we are going to move on. Xx is again, but we will stay on the y-axis at the same point. So it will be coming on the left side, means we are going the left-hand side or bottom side. It will be always negative. So if I want to move on the left-hand side, I need to mention it in minus integers, so I will type it correct. And next command will be minus 10, coma 0 for the y axis. As you can see. Now again, I have to go down a lean. I have to mention it in the minus sin teachers and one negative and teachers. So next command will be, is it is 2020 year from this reference point. But our reference point again changed this last point. So if I want to go down, I have to type something for the y-axis while x-ray will remain 0. So the next command will be 0 for x is we do not need to move into x, xs. Okay, sorry, I forgot to mention that threat or a direct threat. Host command will be 0 coma, and next will be minus 10. So we move in this direction. Now, when any two on the x axis only, you can see that. So again, I will type X command will be again negative format because we have to go on the left side. So that will be so nice to me. Minus 10 comma 0 Enter. Again. We did the second step 2. Now, coming again below this line, we have to mention that same command that we used here. So I will do that right here. Okay, next command will be incorrect, 0, coma minus 10 enter. Okay? So now again, you can see that we have to perform the same step were to draw this all lines here. So in order to own the ravine Lipset, I have to view the negative command. And on the x-axis it will be minus 10, and for the y it will be 0. So next command will be a 100 minus 10 comma 0 Enter. So we do this line. Now we again have a close option here. We get grows from this or we can even enter the last command that will be 0 for the x, as we do not need to move and x axis, but minus 10 for the y, because we need to go vote on. But so I will close this with this close command. It will close it. The last point we started from press control Z, control Y, sorry, I will erase this. I will draw the line here to close it. Now in iterative method. Suppose I started from this point and to cooperate at this point when I close, it will also, it will do it like this, not from the last point. So be careful when you VM begin with your line. Okay? So this was about relative coordinate system. Now next is polar coordinate system. So let's move on to the polar coordinate system. We delete this with a moment. Okay? So the next is polar coordinate system. So let me tell you about polar coordinate system. It is very similar to the dynamic. We also have to input the egg iterate every command. Also in polar coordinate system, it works with the direction wise or angle wise. Suppose if I want to draw, if I drew this line like this, like this. So when I mentioned the command for this, and you do also mentioned the angle for the line. So I will type a threat first. Now, I need to mention the length I want to move. So I need to move 20 units at an angle of 45. So I will type this, right, this, I have to make this sign comas line from the keyboard or it will take it as angle. Currently it is showing 350 Telerik County, but I will type 45. So we moved on the 45 angle, 20 units like this. Again, in polar coordinate system, the reference point will be same as the previous one. We didn't relate to coordinate system. So let's start by drawing the same diagram in polar method or the type line. Or I will start the line command. Again, I will specify the force points at 000, 000 comma 0 Enter. Now, let's start by drawing an angle. So if I want to move from this point to this 30 units. So I have to mention the thirty-years length. And what will be the angle from this point will be, it will be 0 degrees. If I need to add this, it will be 0 degrees. So from this point on the right side, it's 0 degrees, 30 units inland. So I will type a threat. Mentioned the length, I want to move for the next point, that will be 30. Now I knew the angle theta 0 type Enter, okay? It is this simple. Now the next point will be 30. Again, I need to 30 units upwards, but this angle is 90 degrees from this point. Remember the reference point is this, not this. This reference point is common in absolute coordinate system, but in polar and relative polar, they both had changed to the previous points or lattice point a to draw. So again, my reference point is this and in 230 units upward angle of 90 degrees. So I will type at threat 30 units. And in the movie 90, press Enter. Okay. It is this simple as you can see. Now, I need to, on the left-hand side, like this, I reference point is this. This is 3000 degree. As we turn this head, this will be 90 degree and this is 180 degree. So I need to 180 degree on this left side. And what will be the units of length four? This will be 10 units from 30 to 20. So let's type the command that it ten units and angle will be 180. Enter it like this. So now let's try a rain and we have to go the bottom side. Now is I mentioned earlier to more bottom side or on the left-hand side in angles. In polar method, we need to type in negative integers. So my command will go like this. I need to move it first. I will type in that it. Now I need to move 10 units, but we mentioned angle and now what I need to move it downward, so I need to mention minus 90, or you can also mention 270, but I will go with minus 90 and press Enter. This will take me 10 units below the point at minus 90 or so writing or direct. Now, next command will be 10 units on left hand side. So there will be, at that again, 10 units and angle will be same as the previous one. We did 180 degree to move on the left and say, Sorry, press Enter, okay, like this. Now, to mourn the below part, and it could type the same command we did for the this line. So in this relative and polar relate to method and put our method. The losing points are always the lattice points. So most of the commands in this type of symmetrical diagrams are repeated. Again, I have retyped it. The red mentioned the length that is 10 units, type the angle that is minus 90 and press Enter. Again. We import it into the below part at the 10 units. Now again, we have to go into left-hand side. Again, the command with a VSAT at threat ten angle will be 180 degrees. And now last command to close this diagram. So that will be again either click here and close. And I can close from this too. But earlier we saw in the two polar method, relate to, sorry, relate to coordinate system. What was the issue there? Do it by take mine from any lattice point available from me. So I will just apply the command that was 10 units. So the forward third threat aesthetic, 10 units and angle will be minus 90. Press Enter. So now I can click on this close button. So I'll figure is ready. So we prepared this figure with creative as well as the data to polar coordinate system. So I hope you've rectus this. Thank you. 12. Polylines and Splines: Welcome back. In this video, we will learn about polylines and splines. So we know that we can draw the line from this line to suppose I'm drawing these lines here. Okay? Now, when a draw with the polyline, the polyline tool can be activated from this printer draw panel here. B line and the shortcut for that will be B. Okay. When I drove from the polyline. Okay, great. So what is the difference between normal line and polyline? When I select the line, only one part of the entities elected, or suppose you consider the only single language we selected. I have to select each and every line separately polar. But in the case of polyline, when I select the same the lane, the whole entity will be selected. What does this mean is that all the lines form a single entity, but in single line. The older lines, former, different idea Android intents and entities for them. This is the difference between polylines and splines. I can also work with the full length thickness. So when I click here and I will add to it the first. And we'll press Shift and create a blog located on the axes and cleared the second vertex here. Okay? Now, if I want to increase the width of this line, I can select the resorption from this bottom option. So label and I'll enter the width as a default for the set 0.200. While I would enter the week up to save file and press Enter. And I will have in press and hold the Shift button, arrow crib, renter, CTs food enter the way down sweet. So I'd like this, I can create arrows To this is all about the polyline. Now, lest move on to the next thing that is splines. What is playing? Okay? There are two types of spline tools available, spline CV and spline fit. Here as you can see, there can be opened from this director Tom drag down button in Draw panel. Now we'll do a spline. Spline. For example. I will just draw a spline and explaining this is playing feet. I will excite, activate blank free option. And you can also add to it to the command that is SPL Enter. Now, from below this command line, I can choose the method 2. I will go to method and I will create a Fritz blind first, like this. Okay, Eric, press Enter to correct. What is plan CV. I will go to this an aerial activities playing too. Okay. I will press Enter to exit the command. So you can see the er, you can see the difference between what the tools, but in this tool, all the points are in within the entity. As you can see, you if I tried to enter this blind fried points, I can edit them. There isn't the entity. Now in case of spline CV to all the points are outside the entity lines so I can edit them like this. This is all about spline CV and specific tools. Thank you. 13. Rectangle: Welcome back. In this lecture, we will see how good your rectangle and invidious methods and ordinate sport acting. So the rectangular dual is available on the draw panel as the small icon on the right-hand side. We're going to also have a drop-down menu, but we have option to draw a polygon. We will get to this polygon on later. First, let's activity rectangle command. Now, also the shortcut key for the rectangle command is R, E, C, type RAC, and press Enter. So we have a whitish option on the command line for the rectangle tool, but we will go on to them later. So first let's draw a rectangle. The command line say specifies a post-print for rectangle. Once I specify the first, you can see on the command line view various three options for the rectangle. So basic way to draw a rectangle is made taking first, and this is a second corner point. Now we have our rectangle ready on the screen. Let's draw a rectangle with area. So I will click Close pointed here. And I will, as a critic, on the first for the rectangle, we either have three options. So I could have gone the area option or type a and press Enter. So we have to specify area, say length into breadth for the rectangle, let's say 150, and press Enter. So once we did that, we have to specify a length and width for the rectangle. So I will specify a length of grassland, and I will specify a length of 15 for the rectangle and press Enter. We have a rectangle with length of 15 and say, Let's test it. We have a rectangle with length of 15 and read off ten as lend integrate equals to 150, except me than 15 and 10. Now, let's try the next one is, that is, when I specify first we are going to have three options. The third one is remained. Second one is dimensions and oblique one-dimension. And we have to specify length for the rectangle. I will specify ten as a length Enter. And now I use to specify a width for the rectangle. I will get 20 as a width for the rectangle. So once you do that, we have option on the screen, pull in which quadrant we want to draw a rectangle. I can go in any quadrant that I want. Let's hit this one, okay? So our rectangle is ready. The next method for the rectangle is the rotation. I will specify the first, and now we have a rotation here. So we can do rotation and I will specify angle for the rectangle. You can create a rectangle in any angle you want. But rotation direction you want. I will specify 45 as a detection or rotation. And now whenever I draw a rectangle, it will only be able to, only be able to throw it in 45 degree angle or rotation. Okay? So when I again try to draw a rectangle, it will, by default set to a 45 degree rotation. To turn that off, you can again go to the rotation, set. That value is 0. Now, I can draw a rectangle in perfect directions. Okay, so let's move on to the other points for the rectangle. I would've inactivated T rectangle. Okay, so as you can see, one's green, we are various options. Chamfer, elevation, feel it, thickness and width. You might understand width and thickness and elevation. But what is chamfer and polit for the rectangle? So wanted to understand this better, I will demonstrate your diagram. So as you can screen on the screen, this is a normal rectangle looks like with edges. This is what a chamfer looks like. There is a slant, slant straight line on the corners of the rectangle. And this is what will it look like? So this is just a demonstration. When we draw a rectangle in autocad will have on the order of foresight. So let's try that. We'll come back to the AutoCad and I will draw, I will set a value of chamfer. So as we saw in that demonstration image, the chamfer head line. So we have to specify the line for the both of the corners. So I will specify the first value or first distance for the point that will be five. And I was basically another one for the three and spread. Okay. Now, when I draw a rectangle, and I will zoom in to show you. Okay, so now when I draw a rectangle, this will draw a chamfer on all the four H's. You see this is not equal on the all the forest is. From a point the distance is 4, 3, and from this point the distance is phi, as we said, both did differently. Now again, I will change that and set both of them as a phi. I was said to first or first distance is 5, second distance as 52. And when I draw a rectangle, this all will be equal. You can see the difference on both the rectangles. Now, let's try to fill it. But before trying to fill it, I will change this value as 00 back. Again. Once you set the values for this options, it will by, it'll be set by default for all the next rectangles you drove. So make sure once you change the value, you set them as deport for the next time. Okay? I will go to fill it and select a radius for the affiliate. So as we saw in that image, to fill it was a code area on the corner of a rectangle. So let's say I will set a radius of 10 and press Enter. So when I draw a rectangle will have a radius of 10 code on each direction or its corner of the rectangle. I will again intuitive rectangle command and said to Philip value as 0. So now let's understand all the three values of this rectangle. So firstly, I will select elevation in liver elevation of 10 for the rectangle. Now, next is thickness. I will do thickness as 54 the rectangle, and wait for the rectangle to be, say three and press Enter. Now, when I draw a rectangle, you can see it has a width of three. But there are most of the things that you are not able to see. So if you want to rotate the exits are routed takes is in 3D way. You have to press shift and middle mouse scroll button to rotate and press Shift and middle mouse button so you can wrote it. Now, our rectangle has a thickness of five. And when I click on this front to understand this better, we you elevation of rectangle for 10. So what was this? When we plotted the units for elevation it drew, it will trace the rectangle from the bottom line. So a rectangle is drawn. Bayes exist that was for the elevation. But make sure you turn all this value back to 0 when you don't need them, I return elevation back to 0 from 10. Thickness will be back to 0 from file and read throwaway, make 200 from 3. Now when I draw a rectangle, it will be around normal rectangle. Also, we can turn, change the visual styles for this rectangle. From this, when I switch back to 2D Wireframe, we have to divide by M for the rectangle and also switch to various other options that will be go through into 3D portion. So this was all about the rectangle tool and various methods for the rectangle. Thank you. 14. Circle: Welcome back. In this lecture, we will see various method for creating circle in AutoCad. You can access the circle tool from the draw panel over this Home tab. When I click on this drop-down arrow and circle, there are various methods that we can draw a circle on AutoCad and they will appear here. There are six methods in total, two throws her calling AutoCad. Also, the shortcut key for the circle command is CIR. You can type CIR and you can press Enter or Spacebar to activate the command as we discussed earlier. So I will press Spacebar and activate tick Command. This will ask us to, or you can say specify centre 0.4 circle or three p to p and then tendon radius. So what is this? These are nothing but the circle method. You can also activate all these commands or you can also do it the stools from circle toolbar, or you can do this from the command line. So let's get to all the methods one by one. So the first one is center radius circle. So I will start from here. Okay? So Command lenses that specify the center point for the circle. I will click anywhere. Okay, So this will be our center point for the circle. And now the command line says that specific radius of the circle. So you can see as I move away from the central point there, circle enlarges. So we are asked me here and the radius for this circle. So I will enter six as the radius, or you can type anything and I press enter. So we have a circle with a radius of six here. Now, next one is center diameter. Okay? I will again say here will be our center point for the circle. And now we are asked the diameter for the circle. So previously we drew a circle with those six as a radius. Now let's say we draw a circle with a lesser diameter, 12 and enter. Now we both have a circle with same sizes. This with a six meter or six units of radius and this width six plus 612 unit of diameter. Next one is 2 circle. So to understand this better, I will draw a line here. Okay? So let's activity 2 circle. So we go to specify the first of the circle. So let's say those postponed for the circle would be this fun. And as command line which specifies the second one for the circle. So I can specify a second when debt anywhere. So I will click the next part of this line as an endpoint for the circle. I'll click. Okay. I'll certainly we created two passes along both the points that we specified off this lines. And next one is three-point circle. So I will draw a triangle you so this, like this and this. Okay? We have a triangle here. So let's draw a three-point circle. In this part. I will specify this as point. Now command line says specify the second for the circle. I will specify these as a second. And now command line says, let's specify the 3.47th and I will specify these as a third. So similar to two points or three points are good, is drawn, said passes through all the three points that we specified. The next tool is tangent, tangent radius. So what does this tool, Luis? We have to specify two lines that will act as a tangent for our circle. And the third one is radius. And later we have to specify a radius that hold our circle which visitors to both the tangent. So let's do that. I will use the same triangle to demonstrate that. I would go equals sorry, I will click on circle, tangent, tangent, radius method. I will select this line as attention. Then select this line is a tangent. You can see that we are so on, um, bring markup and that is different than the previous ones. I will specify this as a second engine. And now we have to specify the radius for circle. So let's say I will keep a radius of six and press Enter. See this true or circle that has both of these lines as a tangent and width has, which has a radius of six. This circle has a radius of six. The next point is tangent, tangent and tangent. So I will delete or erase this board circle for the moment. Now, the next one says is tangent, tangent and tangent in this video to specify three tangents that our circle we touched through. Or you can say it's tangent to the circle. So I'll use these three lines as a tangents. So as center point for a circle or specify first on surgical attention to. So we say if we want tangent to this line is a tangent to a circle. First, second, and here goes third. So a circle is drawn that has all these three lines as tensioned. These are all the methods that you can draw a circle with. So I hope this was clear to you. Thank you. 15. Arc: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will go through various methods for creating art in AutoCad. So as, as we did in circle, there is also a shortcut key for creating art with command line, that is ARC and Enter. This will activate the arc command. So let's go to the various methods that we can create our Chrome. I can again open this with the dropdown menu. Svd didn't circle. The first one is 3 arc. So we can create an arc using three points. It is quite similar to the circle. I will draw a line here to understand this better. I was lower line of 10 urines enter. Okay. So the three-point arc. So as stated in the command line, we will specify the start point for the app. Let's set this will be our start point. Now specify the 2.40th. How to specify this as second? And now I can specify any is a third. So let's cells with faith this as a third. So we have an arc that passes through our first, second, third CFOs, second, third, all the three points that we stated are covered by the arc. Let's delete this. Okay, so next one is Start, Center and end. As the name suggest, we forced her to specify a start point or center point and the endpoint. So let's say my start point will be this. My center point for the arc will be this. And my endpoint for the error will be this. So this two are paid passes through our start point, center point, and that will be the end point. Now, why didn't it go into mortem detection? So in order to pay, when we draw arc, it always works in the anticlockwise direction. Suppose if my start point and end point was this, the adequate going anticlockwise direction only is like this. So let's go to the next one that is start centered and angle. So first is the name. So this we again have to specify a start point for distributing my start point. Now I have to provide a S and enter point. And now I can provide angle for the r. So let's say I wanted to 145 degrees. So the angle of this art is 145 degree from the center point. Like this. To say this angle, that art forms, or you can say this angle is 145. Well, they are giving this as a center point, start point, and end point. Or delete this boat. Now, let's see. Next one is start center, end length. Okay? We all know about accord in a circle. So the length is deployed in this method will be a code for the circle. So I'll start point will be this fun and send to the point where with this one. And now we can specify a quota for the circle. This is a perfect code over here. Let's see the next one. Statista and an angle. So as the name suggest, again, we have to specify a start point. That will be this. Let's say I have to specify an endpoint for circle. And I can now specify angle for the Soyuz, specify the angle of say 45 and press enter. You drew a circle with this x is at angle of 45. So this angle is 45, 40, OK. I did it. This. Next one is start and end direction. So I specify this as a start point, specify this as endpoint. And now I will give you a direction for the arc. So if I move upwards, this will draw arc in the upper direction. If I go in this bottom mutation, it will draw arc in a boat of mutation, I can also toggle between the length of the arc. You can see it can go up to infinity. And now I will say draw like this right here. Then I will delete this. Let's move on to the next one, that is start and end radius. So let's ploy to start 14 arc, provide endpoint for our arc. And let's Florida radius, Sarah, Florida radius of around five minutes. And press enter. We have arc of radius 500. So why again, this drew in the bottom direction, as we discussed earlier. I blurted at this as a start point in this method and provided this as endpoint. So arc move in the anticlockwise direction from the start point towards the end point. If I would have given this as a start point, you on this endpoint embroidered file as a radius. This would have drawn a are in the upper direction, but starting from this point, when we go anticlockwise, this will be our upper direction. I would need it both the arcs. Okay? Next one is centre, start and end. So first i o to give a center point for the arc. Okay? Now have to give us dart point, that will be this. And now I have to View Endpoint. This is quite similar to the previous method we went through. Let's say this will be my endpoint. So we are with the start Center and endpoint. Next one is centre start angle. So let's say this will be my first for the start point. This will be my center Start. And I have to specify your end 0.40 arc as well. So let's say this will be my end point for the next method is Centre start and length. I will specify this as a center point. Says if this has a start point and now I have to give a length, or you can say core, as we discussed in first method previously. So let's say this will be my length for the R. Here it is. Now, the next method is continue method. So suppose if I draw an arc like this over here, like this, okay? So when I continue on the Continue this option, continue Method option, this will draw arc from the previously drawn our collect. It will continue an arc from previously drawn out of Eigen, create a zigzag. Zigzag designs from this method. So once I use this tool, it automatically turns off or exits the command. If I wanted to use this continuously, I can press space bar to activate this command. And I will go to here and click Continue. Okay, so this was all about the arc command. Thank you. 16. Polygon: Welcome back. We previously learned how to draw rectangles, circles, and arcs in AutoCad. Now, we will learn how to draw a polygon in AutoCad. So to activity polygon command, you can also type with B, O, L. And this will activate the polygon command. Or you can also do set icon that is below the rectangle to be as we discussed previously. It is a available in dropout in Home tab. I will click on polygon. So this will activate the polygon. Now, as you can see in the command line, it is asking us to enter the number of sides for the polygon. So as a pore sites, we may call it a rectangle. When it has five sides, we call it Pentagon. And when it has six sides, we call it hexagon. So let's draw a hexagon or the starting. I will type 6 has six sides for the exam and press Enter. Now, it is asking to us to specify your center 0.40 polygon. I will click here for the center point of the polyline. Now, it is asking us to newer two options that is inscribed in the circle versus comes circumscribing circle. So we want to draw a polygon inscribed in circle to understand this where we state in the next example. So for the moment I will choose inscribing circle. Now, it is asking us for the ideas or the circle. I will give it 20 as the radius and press Enter. So we just drove what even the radius of 20 and has a six guide Smith hexagon. So let's check the polygon. It is as is inscribed in a circle or not. I would choose the circle command. I will draw a polygon, or say circle from the center point of this polygon with a radius of 2020 and press Enter. So I polygon is inscribed inside the circle. And hope you understand what list the inscribing circle means. We again draw a polygon. I will choose pulling in. And as we want to draw the same polygon will lead to dosage B6. And to make an excellent, I will give you to center point here and press enter first. Sorry. Now I will give it a center point over here. And now I will choose circumscribed about this circle. And I will give it a 20 units, or say 20 minutes for the TDS, 200. Enter. Now we again draw a polygon or X7 with DDS off 20 units to take the, again, it is if it is circumscribed around the circle, are inscribed around the circle. I will draw a circle around the polygon again with the radius, with the center point ended with a radius of 20 and I will press enter. So as you can see, the difference between inscribed in circumscribed around the circle. Now, that is a third option. And again choose polygon. I will let the sides P6 again press Enter and there is option for the edge. What is the option for the edge? So post I will click on Add. Now specify the first endpoint of edge. So this all edges by XLR is made from six, as you can say that 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. So I will click on this end, 0.48. And now I agree on the second endpoint for the years. Or we can also specify a length for the first, for this one. So let's say I want a polygon will have this as a second. So these are the three methods you can draw a polygon with. I hope this was clear to you. Thank you. 17. 5: Welcome back. In previous lectures we shall, to draw shapes. In this lecture, we will learn Hubbard ellipse in autocrine. Okay? So as we all know that ellipse is a geometrically shaped containing to measure Xs, one is minor axes and one is measure Xist. I would run at this figure here on screen that you can see. This one is a mayor axis of the ellipse, and this one is a major expense of the ellipse. So you can activate the ellipse command by typing that is shortcut for that is E LLI PS II collagen type ellipse as a whole and press enter this, we will say activity ellipse command. Now, you can also draw an ellipse from this tool. Say there is a drop enter in Home tab. This icon is for ellipse. When you click on this drop-down button, there are various methods through row ellipse, center exists and end an elliptical arc. So let's see this sentiment and polyposis is described in command line. It is asking us to specify the center point of the ellipse that is specified this point as a center point for the ellipse. Now specify the endpoint for the x's. So let's say I will specify this other endpoint called the x's. Okay? So we specified this as endpoint of the answers. What was this endpoint? So this was the center point of the x's and this one is the endpoint of the x's. Now, it is asking us to specify the distance to the other Xs that is minor axes. So it's centered point. We are to describe this distance. But the other x's, I would describe this as that Xist point. So we have an ellipse with minor axis and major axis. Now let's throw the other one. I will delete this one. Okay, the next one, it exists an end. So we are asked to describe the first exist or end point of the ellipse. I would click here as endpoint. I'll always specify another end point. So what is this? This is asking us this as endpoint. And this is another end point. So I will turn on doors so as we do not draw the ellipse, it agarose in detection. And I will click here as prototypes. So we described the first and we scraped the second. Now we are to describe the distance for the my annexes that is similar to what we did previously. I will describe this land as a My not exist distance. So we'll draw an ellipse with Xist and method. Now the last one is elliptical arc. So this is quite similar to this, but in this will only draw half of the ellipse or say angle defined ellipse. I'll click on the ellipse. I can inactivate the elliptical arc. So is prompt in the command line, we are asked to specify the exits endpoint of the elliptical arc. So I will select this as an endpoint, and I will say that end point of the ellipse. So we have again specified both the end points, this one and this one for the ellipse. Now, we are again asked to specify the distance to the other x's third is from center point, the distance from the distance for the other x's. So it's basically a test. Now, we have to specify the starting or parameter for the ellipse. You can not see these properly because they'll turn on the auto, I'll turn off the ortho. So let's say I want my lips to start from this, or say 90 degree, and I press enter. Now my ellipse does from the 93, is it the most in anticlockwise direction? And this will move in this direction. So my ellipse will start from this 90 degree. And if they don't want to see 180, press Enter. So my lips does from the main contiguity and 18 to DVD. So this has all the methods to draw an ellipse in auto gain. Thank you. 18. Construction lines, Rays, Points and Revision cloud: Welcome back. In this lecture, we will go through various construction line raise points and multiple points. So what are this all this owner used for? More like reference and justifications in plants when you are drawing a plan and you want to draw elevation in AutoCad, you might need to use a construction line as a reference. So when we go to a practical example, we will use this as a practical preferences. For now, let's understand them. So we'll start by using construction line. Okay? You can include the construction line from this Draw panel with the drop-down arrow. And you can see the line with arrows on devotes site is construction line. This one is array, and this one is a point or multiple points. So I will activate the construction line and I can specify it in the command line, specify a point, or you can see there are a variety of other options. We'll go to. Go to them turn-by-turn. So I will just click anywhere and say, this is my line. This will go broke on search online. And it is say, specify through point. So replica ortho and I will draw vertical and a horizontal construction line. You can also draw a construction line at any angle you desire. So let's see the other options that were available in common line. Or you can shortcut for cancers and 90s x LIN me and I would activate deconstruction link command. So you can see here we already draw horizontal, vertical and angular construction line. You can also draw angular with a specified angle. So I would say 75 degree or say 35 degree angle. And this will draw a construction line. Always edit 35 degree like this. To exit the command spreads press Escape key on the new electricity construction line. And next option is my sector. So what does the basic do is it will draw a construction line from between two anchors at exit the same center. So I will give this as a midpoint over text point as specified in the command line. This will be our vertex point. Now specify the start point. I will view this as a start point, and I will give you this as an endpoint. So this, this will draw a construction line between the two angles. So when a mole this, you will probe answer some line between this and this as exact center, like this, to exit the command press Escape key. So when you measure the angle between this line and this line, and angle between this line and slang, it will be the same. Also when you measure the angle between this line and this line, and this line and this line, it will be again the same. This is what the basic builders in construction line. So next tool is offset. So I will again activate the construction length and we click on the offset. It will ask us to specify the value for the offset. So I will say five minutes for the offset and press Enter. Now, when I click on this construction lines in this one, we have to specify the side or the offset. If I want to draw consistently at the outset of five minutes until ball. At the bottom of this line, I'll click on the bottom part of this line like this. This will draw a construction line with offset of phi at the site, which I clicked on. If I want to draw about this conceptually, a press ago, Pat and I will click and here this router Open Source link above this reference line. So this goes all about the construction line. Also, construction lines are in finite. You can see they never end. And we erase this and we'll move on to the arrays. So the shortcut key for rays are a rising and as we all know, razor line that starts from a point and ends at infinity. So to draw a ray, you can measure loop with the commands or you can also activate today from this Draw panel with this array to click Andre and specify a point. This will draw a ray at the any angle or any detection I point to. This, old rail lines were weak in finite. Okay, So next tool is 0.2.2 eigen type point and press Enter. This will specify a point is describing command line. When I click on here, it will draw a point here. I hope it is visible to you. So get the point 2. You can only draw point at a time. To again draw point, I have to again type point to and press enter directly with the tool. And I can draw a point like this with the multiple 0.2. It is given into drop enter eigenvector. I can draw multiple points at a time. See like this In keep drawing the points whenever I want and wherever I want. So I hope these points are visible to you. You can also change the visibility of this points from utilities step, and you can click on point style. Once I click on this, I will have a point style options. Here. I can choose the visibility of the points and angry Enter. Again, also tends to size of this points. I will click on circles and I will say size of, let's say 10, and I press Enter. This will be centered tries of this multiple points. Now, next option is revision Cloud Division cloud is available. This part, suppose I want to highlight said there is a bland year. So this is my house. Okay. This for say for example, this is a room. If I want to highlight this part of the room into plan, how would I? So I will use this division Cloud for say rectangular. There are three types, so let's say rectangular revision cloud. And I will draw a rectangle around this area. This will draw a rectangular division cloud around the area. Like this. The next one is polygon revision Cloud. So this is quite simple. If I want to draw a division Cloud in a shape like this, I would create clear. First, second, third, you can keep adding on the polygons or you can decide or edges as we saw in the polygon tool. And this will keep drawing them in various directions. The next one is 3 hand. It is quite seem, but I just had to start. And it will start automatically a triangle when you're going around or sake loud revision clouds around the tool and it will automatically end when you come to the start point. So this was all about the revision Cloud. Okay? Do know that if you are using previous version of AutoCad, third revision Cloud option is available in an octet at this slides. Or you can say it this Benares, but in newer version or say later versions of our later of 2020 or 2021, the revision cloud is moved to draw panel over here. So that's it about this assertion, Landry points and revision clouds. Thank you. 19. Hatch: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about hedges in AutoCad. So what is a hat? A hatches a kind of a pattern, or you can self feeling when we are to define a component in a plan. In practical, we see that the concrete have a dot-dot-dot type of patterns and structures, Hill single linings or you can see in walls no single linings. So these buttons are defined in Hajj in AutoCad. So I will draw a triangle or a rectangle here to, for an example, I will draw a few rectangles. Here are a few different shapes for the example. Okay? So I will draw a few shapes here for the example. Okay, So we use, use shapes on our screen. So do activity hedge command called shortcut put the Edge command will be at Enter or Spacebar. To hedge command is activated, especially hedge creation tab will be activated here, activated year menu activity Hatch command. H command is very simple to use and manage. You can also act to activate command by pressing on this button. I will press this, and this will activity hedge command. So we have options for different types of Bretton here. You can click on this toggle icon and you can have many, many pattern here is you don't see. And we also have a gradient. So we will get to the gradients in later. For the starter, I will choose this angle pattern. And now to apply the pet answers, you have to click on any clothes brown tree sees the circle is a closed boundary. So what is a closed boundary? A shape that has all the lines and points in a closed shape. Or you can say no part of the shape is open, is called closed boundary. So I will apply this here. Now you can see that it is very much a small more. You can see that it is not. And will we be able to zoom in to get the proper pattern glutes ends the scale of this pattern. You can send the scale of this pattern from this Properties Bar. On this right-hand side, we can also adjust the eye to edge transparency. You can see that like this. And you can also enter the menu or value Fourier transparency. So first let's change the scale for this. I will say five, and I will apply this skill. Now you can see the pattern has gotten bigger in this scale. Also, you can change tangle of the button like this. Or you can also access, or you can manually apply the pattern, say like 45 Enter. This will change this gave worthy pattern is being back to that do default. Okay? So the next thing is managing patterns. So once you are done with the applying patterns, you can just click here on the edge creation. Now to edit this pattern, I will again click on this button and it will open, open the head editor tab. I will apply on another edge on this other shapes. And I'll choose this button this time. Click on here. Okay, So now I wanted to show you something else. And we did it this both and I'll create a new rectangle. So this like this. Okay? So we have our rectangles on what the sides. Now, I will click on hedge mentor. I will apply this edge over here. Now. I will apply this hedge warrior again, but I will change the angle for the edge. So this has, I would apply it here in tangle of up to 90, like this. So now you can see that this has, does not meet, meet each other at any point. So to make this similar on both the side, we can do one thing is we can edit the edge overreaching. So how to do that? And you click on heads after applying edge. When you click on it, it will open the hatch editor. You'll be able to see that there is an option here, Set Origin option. On this step, I will click on this set origin point and I will define a point for the head. So let's say this coordinate and this will define a point or a starting point for this hatch pattern. Similarly, we will do with this head. I click on this ad, I was saved origin point. To this point. Now I will touch Britain's Hoover, same origin point and take collide. Now let's talk about gradient and solid. So when activity heads come on, we have an option here to apply it by solid gradient or user-defined. In user-defined, you can choose many-body from these buttons. When you click on solid, it will apply a solid color to the head like this. Currently it is white. You can also change this color. So okay, so let's say bi-layer. And you can also apply this color like green, white, red. Okay, I will delete this edge. Now let's talk about gradient. I'll click edge, enter hedge, and now I will choose the gradient. It is quite similar to the solid. You just have to choose two colors to create a gradient with every creator gradient of light blue and dark blue. And I will click on heads. This will create the pattern inside this circle as a hedge, but we took gradient. So you can also toggle between different types of gradient patterns. From this, you can scroll down below to say more patents. We have a few buttons available in our docket for the gradient. You can choose any of this. So this one, this one. And once you are done, you can just click on edge creation, close edge creation. Now, if I have applied this pattern 01 in this circle, if I want to apply the same button in this C shap, I do not have to go to a heads again, read Jews both the colors and apply the gradient again to exhibit. To do there it is. I will click on Edge command and you will match properties option on this right side. And you click on this mass properties. It will ask us to choose a current heads. I will see select this edge has a current edge. Now let's select this as a new shape. Once I click on the shape, it will allow me to copy the same edge to them, another shape. So this will save your time, okay? And you can play the same edge to the various shapes. Once you are done, always close as with creation option here. So this was all about hedge in October. Thank you. 20. Move and Copy: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will do some modifying tools, data, move and copy. Group that I will rows to some objects here who are showing you the examples. I will draw a small circle, grows so rectangle. And I will also draw another rectangle here. Okay? So first MOOC course more, we will go through more too. Module is available on the modify panel in Home tab. This icon is for mode two. I will click on the Moodle. And now there's this clambering command line. It says select the object that you want to move. So I will click on this circle to move this. Once I click on this circle, I have to press Enter or Spacebar directly with her. Press Enter. Now out to specify the point from where those circles will be mood. So if I wanted to move the circle from its center point, I will click here. And now you can see the circle is attached with the cursor. Now, I can move the circle at any desired point. So say I want to move the circle at this point of the rectangle, or say here. So bleak here and our silicon, we move to this point or it can you consider it and displace from the exit position to the point where I want it to be. So the next two lists copy tool. Now, if I want this circle to be cooperated on this point, what can I do is click on Copy. And now we have DO MOD specify base 0 circle. So we get to this more in later. I will specify the first of the circle to mu or against the base point as we did with the more two. Now, you can see a copy of our circle is cleared and is attached with this circle. So I believe here at this point in our so-called will be corporate at this point. Now, YuJa or so-called here. Again, I will click, click, click on Copy. Now remove this circle over here from this point. So you saw that in meters, we do not require to always select the center point of this alcohol to move it from many entities. You can always move the circuit at any entity we desire. Now, I will again create another shape here. Okay, so as we discussed earlier, VO2 Morsi coping. So activated the COPI tool and now I will select this object. Now press Enter. On doing this, I have option here. See more. So when I click on the mod wheel, two options, single and multiple earlier, then we incorporate the circle. We were able to copy as many copies of the circle we wanted. So the facial single and copy this circle from here, we'll say here, over here. So many corporate this rectangle at this point, P exit the command after first copy an earlier. What happened in the circular case was that we were able to copy as many as copies. Very quiet. So that I don't want you can keep as per your convenience or as per your requirements. So this was all about coping end module. Thank you. 21. Mirror and Rotate: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will explore another to modifying tools in AutoCad. The first one is rotate to another one is mirror tool. So I will draw a line here, say a 100 units. Okay? So we'll align on a screen. If I want to rotate this line, I will use to rotate to the shortcut key for the rotate tool, it will be 0 enter or space is described in command line. Now it is asking us to select the object that we would like to rotate. I will select this line. Ok, Enter. Now, be able to select the base point from where we want to rotate this line. I'll give this as a base point. And now I can rotate this line in any direction as ortho mode is on, it will only lock it into horizontal or vertical line. So I will turn off the ortho. Okay? So you can see that it is asking us to rotate this line in any direction or angle we wish. So let's say we'll give it 60 legally. So now i line is rotated from this base point at Bangalore 60. But what if I want to draw this line below the x's are you can see in the bottom part, It's been discussed earlier. Autograder runs anticlockwise. So when I gave it a tangle of 60, it will move this like this side. Okay, I'll press Control Z to undo. Okay? But login, script or rotate to rotate tool is also available in Modify panel in home dip over here. And click on Select the object. Now is select this base point and except of giving into 60, I will give it minus 60. And this will rotate the lining bottom part. So this was all about rotate to also also, I would like to mention one more thing about the Rotate tool. When I select this and I click on rotate tool, it will be activated. I was selected as the best point. And now I want to move it on to this direction. Make 200. So to rotate from this base point to this, I will give it a 60-degree, but I do not want to move this. I wanted to create a copy of this rotation line. So I really can't this reference or Copy option and I will choose Copy as he would to 60 Enter. So this created a copy with the rotation. Okay, So let's move on to the middle. To do that, I will draw a simple objective. Ok. And one more thing like this. What? Now? If I want to, you can see this. The square root I drew here is not perfect or not. It is not at the center point or anyway, symmetrical with this rectangle coordinate. So if I want to draw a similar square on this side, if I move like this, urgency for Pete, like this, I can not do it at the same points without measuring it. Or you can say at the same level or height. So to do that, we can use a mirror to the mirror tool is situated and right below the rotate tool in Modify panel in Home tab. And it's electron mirror tool. And also the shortcut for the Mirror tool will be MI, Enter or Spacebar. Now, we'll deselect object we would like to meter. So oblique on this object and then click Enter. Now, we're to specify the first we would like to meter it from. So if I want to reflect it from this side to this side, of course, I have reduced the midpoint of this rectangle. So I will choose the midpoint of this rectangle, say it is over here. And now you can see that is a goal or you can see it is reflecting from this point onwards. So when I choose the midpoint at the same age on this, and it will be reflected on this right side. So select again and you click. As you can see, it is actually mirrored on the right side. So let's do that again. In my under oblique on this object, I want to meter, select the midpoint and select the midpoint over here. So after, when I select this midpoint or here, it will ask us two options. It is the source object, which means it will remove the object from here and move it to year under deflation side. But if I wanted to copy this on this side, arrogantly call no, and this will create a copy, or you can say emitter at the object on the right hand side. Now again, glue that on this boat site and you click on this spread. And we've got this square. Again, okay? So two-meter it. I will again click on the meter tool, select the center point of this site, and select the center point of this side. So and we've got no, so it will be mirrored onto four sides. So that's it, the mode this lecture. Thank you. 22. Scale, Strech and Offset: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will go through three new commands that is stretched, scale, and offset. So I would own a few objects on the screen already to get started. So first command is stretched. Okay, So this is a square here. We will try to stretch it in new directions. So when I click on square, we already have options to stretch it. You can see here like this, like this. And I can also stretch it from a point like this. This all can be done when a square is connected or even say it isn't polyline. If I draw a line like this, and if I type dry to stretch from it this corner, we can. But when it will be a polyline, I can stretch along the connecting them both the entities. So you can also activate the stretch command with a command that is SD E. And when I click on that and I can press Enter or Spacebar for the same. And it will ask us to specify the object that we would like to stretch. I'll click on the square and press Enter. Now, I will click on the base point for the, I would work on this as a base point for the stretching. Now I can stretch in any direction like this. Also, you can activate the stretch command or its trace tool from the modify panel in Home tab. Now, the next tool is scale tool. So if I want to increase the size of this square by two, or you sue BYU benzene, double it. So I can do it with scale command. So scale command shortcut is SC space or Enter. This gives command is activated. Now we'll do select the object that we would like to scale. I'll click on this square. Was Kelly. And I will press enter or space. Now how to describe the base point from which the square will be enlarged. So click on this base point. Now I can do it like this 2, or I can also specify the vector that I want to scale it with. So I want to double the size of this square. So click two and press Enter. So this enlarged scale size of the square by two. Q can send our data. Now, if I want to reduce the same square to half, I can again do that. Same command will select the square. Also. The scale tool is available in Modify panel in Home tab here next to stretch to click on this scale again. And I will specify this as a base point. And rather than typing to either type 0.5, that is half of fun. So it will reduce the size of this square to 0.55 and enter. Now as various make to its original shape or size. We also have a reference command or against France option in scaling tool. What does he do is if I want to scale this square or you can say side of this edge too with the reference of this line without measuring it or without stretching it, I can do it with scale command. So let's see that I would like to get the scale command by keyboard or shortcut Enter. Now we have to select the object we want to skin. I will select this square space. Okay? So earlier what we did was by scaling the squared, we chose to miss points within the square. But when you want to take a reference or you can save through increased the size from a reference point. What we can do is we have to split the reference point, or you can say base point of the reference at the reference entity. So I want to square it. I want this square to increase in size with the reference of these lines. So I will select the base point at the line. Now, what we're to do is you can see there is a reference option in command line and click on this reference. And it is asking us to specify the reference land. So I want this land to be referred from this land and increase in size to first, I will select first 000 a year. And second over here. Now, I will specify this as a third. This will increase our squares blend with reference to that point. I will move it to next to each other. To show you the exact difference. You can see that it is exactly same width, the length of this line. So this was all about the reference to. The next tool is offset. So let's see what is offset. We already earlier strategic in the rectangle tool. But you can also leave absurd to any other objects within the auto-grade. So when I click on this offset to 30s or whatever in the modify panel in Home tab, you can always go to a golf settled with threshold content is 0 and press Enter or Space to activate. So once we do that, we can create click on this object or you're going to specify the object distance. So let's say I want to increase the size of this rectangle or a square by five units, I will click file and enter. I already gave you the distance length for the offset. Now I will select the object to it. I want to use the offset to. I select this object and press Enter. Now, you can see I can choose either outside or inside where I want the opposite to B. We also have another option that is multiple for sled, see that? And we will give you go to multiple option. So pause a moment. I will let it be inside the square and I will set is ready. And I then click on this tool and activate the offset command. But what if I wanted to do it continuously? So to do that again, we will select this squared, outer side squared, and we call this offset tool. Once activated, our length will be set to default. We merge we did earlier, so it is already five. I will click on this point. And when we increase the distance for this, I will again bleak file folder reference. Again, we are activated to find the distance of offset. Now everybody can this multiple tool. And when I do that, okay, So let's say I will use offset outside the square of this time when I click once, it is activated and it will be continuously happening until I learned clique. So you can say that I keep clicking and it will keep giving it so upset. So like this, you can draw upset in auto ahead. So we studied about stretch, scale and upset in this tutorial. Thank you. 23. Trim and Extend: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will explore dream command and extend command. So what is trim command? As the name suggests, through which you can dream the objects are objects, data ONE over each other, or you can say all living each other. So I would run a example figure here. I would run a hexagon year and I have drawn many entities is circular objects here. So what if I want to trim this overlapping parts of each and every object here? So I would like to add the trim command by a shortcut that is TR and Enter. Or also you can intuit the trim command by raising the scissors icon. In the modify panel. I'll click on the scissor to need to. It will also activate the trim command. Now, you can see it. We can through which I can just click and delete these lines that overlap each other. Like this. I'll leave it as lines or all the entities. If you are using earlier origin of motivated by clicking the dream icon, you can not directly Gensler or you can erase the lines. First we activate the trim command, then you select the whole object, and then we can do the procedure we just did by deleting. So do make sure that you notice that now the extend command. So when I activate the trim command, and trim command is active and it's select this whole no, sorry. When the trim command is active and I press Shift, it will change into extension. So when I press the shift after trim command and I click OK, it will extend the line to the next entity like this and can do it everything here to adhere to. So this was about extension. Now, an example of trim command. Now another exam folder trim command. Suppose I have so many objects that are all living or so close to each other, and we always have another object, it overwrites it like this. I will draw another line here for the example. Now, if I want to delete all the parts that are between these two lines, these two lines, all these entities that overlap each other between from this lines. So how to do the third? Before doing that, I will select this line and this line. And then I would take to it the trim command. So like this, autocorrect knows that I want to delete everything that is between this line and this line. So I will just click here and I will select this older lines in between them. Now, what I'm going to erase all the objects that are between these two entities to exit the command U and press Enter again. So now let's work on the extend tool again. I will click can select the extend tool. You can also evaluate the extent to it by the shortcut that is EX, and press Enter. So I can click and extend older lines and data made to Anglican, extend the lines to the next entities like this. If I click again, it will again extend the line to the upcoming year entity. Like this. It does not work on cows. So this was all about extend and trimming. Thank you. 24. Fillet: Welcome to this lecture. In this tutorial, we will learn about field that we already have learned something about folate in rectangular to. In this case, I have drawn example here. So what is a few lead? Then two corners are meeting at point C around here. Or like this at a point, we can draw a smooth on the corner with filler tool. I will remove this. And what is this? This is the radius point, or you can say we can enter a specific radius for the Villette. This is the radius that I've entered for this pellet. So let's try making a fill it. If we take example, I will make an rectangle here. Okay? So we have our rectangle here. So let's activate the Fill it command. The Fill it command is available or affiliate tool is available in Modify panel in Home tab over here. Like to. You can also activate the affiliate to, with the shortcut is F. So after you open the affiliate, you have option of polyline. And as we already are studied or near what is polyline and what is line. So you can toggle between polyline and normal line. With this, you can set radius. So let's set radius for this off six and I'll press Enter. So when I choose first line and second line, it will create radius of six here with the fill it. So let's do that. I will select the first line and second object line. This created a fill at 06 year. The radius of the Villette from this to this corner will be six. Now, we executed the command after using it once. So in order to do it multiple times without exiting the command, we also have options in this tool. So I will, again activity relate to this time. I will say radius to say three because this seems too large. And when you choose this multiple option on, you can see there is an M written here. So this means that we can do it multiple times. So again, I will choose this as a cost object line. Second, first, second, the first second. Okay? You can see why we are not able to do this because we already entered the Sikhs at over here. So this exit range of another related here. So we are not able to make the affiliate in this coordinate. Okay, so let's learn about the Trim option invalid command. So I will draw another rectangle, for example. Okay, so what is a dreaming? Fill it. I would like to eat tofu let command. And you can see there is option here. Same dream. I will go to train and I will select note or dream. If I select Nord Stream, current status dream, you can read the current state in this coma. So I will set it took Nord Stream. And when I, I will again turn on the multiple. And when I do this, first 1, second 1, this one trim the area that is left behind. I will again do it here. And here. You can see the difference. And when I turn the trim command on it would it as the corners like this. Like this. So this was all about the Fill it command. Thank you. 25. Chamfer: Welcome back. Previously, we learned about Philip. Now in this tutorial, I will take you through the same for, we'll also already studied about the chamfer in rectangular methods. So you can see there are two types of chamfer, 0, c2. First one in this, there is a, suppose this will be a gardener. So when we apply a chamfer, it will create another edge between the two co coordinators. Now, the first distance is 97 distances file. So let's draw a rectangle here and see that. Okay? Okay. So to do that, I will apply the Chamfer command, that is CHA to command or shortcut key for the gym for is CHA and Enter or Spacebar. Now, you can also activate the jumper tool from the modify panel in Home tab over here. I will choose temper. Now, there are two methods to grow chamfer. One is with distance and another one is angle. So let's see the distance 1 first. After applying the chamfer or 10 Chamfer command or turning on the chamfer tool, I will click on distance. Now, the command line specifies that specify first Chamfer distance. So we have to give the distance for the first chimpanzee that is here file. So if you click on this lane is a force. It will be the first. And if you click on this, it will be second. So suppose I type the first to say nine and enter now, specify second chamfer distance. That will be nine or five. Any can, it can be any? I will try 15 and press Enter. Now if, suppose if I click on this one, this will be the first-line. Their debt. We applied the distance four, and if I click on this, it will be the first line. So I will click on this first second. So what did you do this? It took the 15 from this distance and 94 this distance. Now we are going to exit the command like we didn't fill it. So we can also keep it active by turning on the multiple sweats type of ing temper. And I would click on Multiple. Now we won't exit command until we press the escape key. I will change the distance that cities temp file and under second one will be nine center. So this one will be profile and this one will be nine. So we do the same one in another direction. Now, let's understand the angular temper. I will again draw the rectangle for the example. So when I type chamfer and press Enter video, another option that is angle. So when I click on angle, the command line says that specify gym for length on the first line. So first we'll specify this lend from this to this from where the anger will be cut out. So I will enter the length head, say six and press Enter. Now we have to specify the angle for the chamfer. So this angle here is 70. So this time I will use a Anglo, say 60 and press Enter. Now I will view the first lane and then I will second the second line. So this metal chamber like this. So from this angle between these two will be 60 to grow there. I will show you on this and I will give an angle to this. You can see in through the same quarter tangle of 60 from the post point. You can also turn on the multiple edges between India and another one thing, another main thing. I can also activate the dream and no dream as we did in FY20 lead. So if I click on Motrin and say distance, Enter, Enter, I will do this. And this one, trim the line, it will leave it behind. So this was all about the chamfer too. Thank you. 26. Blend Curves: Welcome back. I'll year we went to feel it. And Jennifer, now to turn to in the toggle button is blend calls. So print copy is available in Modify panel in Home tab. You can also activate the blend tool with the shortcut key that is me. And then once you do that, it will be activated. So I will again get direct them blend tool. And what does blend to do is it will join any glucose data not in the same coordinate. Or you can say any codes can be joined with the Blend Tool. So click on this one, and I will click on this one, see it really joined the blend. Go like this. I can also change the next C Min. I click on this and choose Control Vertices, eigenvector, all the vertices for this code like this and adjectives. But when I click on this audience, this toggle and I click on it, it will not, it will not. Let me change any vertices for this. Let's do it once again. And we're going to click here. And here. You'll see they'll gain allowed me to change the vertices as the control vertices option is on. So this is all about Blaine co-option. Thank you. 27. Earse and Align: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will go through the EDC tool and align tool. So let's start with the Eaters to the erase tool is available and modify panel in Home tab, it is, it is, it is an icon. You can click and accurate data is too small. You can also do it with the command that is shortcut key for that is ER. And a ERA is a shortcut key for the IRS to now. What is it is it is nothing but a simple two liquid lead to erase any source of object or any lines you want on your plan. So suppose, say, I want to delete all these chairs. I can either select them and press Delete or I can also use it is to. When I click on it to do last commit to select the optics I want to erase. So click on this. It will be highlighted in the grade, as you can see. And once I click Enter or Spacebar, it will be deleted. Similarly, if I want to erase this board chair, I will select them both and I activate, it has to. When I click on this tool, it will automatically delete. Put the chairs. Now, if I want to erase this whole plan of it, if I want to erase this whole plan, I was select the IRS to one silicon datas to type all on the command line and press Enter. This will violate that. All the plan, all the entities in gray means it is all selected for the erasing. And when I press Enter, this will get older. I'll say you did all the entities available on your drawing board. I will undo that. Now. Whenever I'm drawing. If I draw a sort of clear and one more sort of, uh, here. Okay. So meaning again, accurate data as to if I just want to erase the last, I will play type l and press enter. And other in a ganglion. Enter. As you can see, this millage rate then lastly drawn circles. Now this was all about it as two. Let's come to the align tool. So Elaine tool is very similar to scale to innovate, but it's aligned tool. I can align some entities with each other, whether they are in same direction, same orientation or not. If I want to align this object, this line to this part, I can do that with the align tool, the shortcut for land or lease a L. And the align tool will appear in your command line. And you can also activate the align tool or use the line tool from the modify panel in Home tab. When I click on this Modify panel, you can see there is option here, a line drawn over here, option of a line tool over here. Now I would like to ITER line tool. It is asking us to select objects that I want to. The line. I will select the first object and press Enter, select the source point of the octave. So from which point to, I wanted to connect these two points like this to be added here, I will click on this point. Now, billion Gleick quarter destination points. So at this point, sure go enters to this point. I will equally in here. Now, I have created a path for this point to more than it does to this point. Now I will select this second source point, click this, and I would leak this. So after reviewing this, it is still asking we do chloride dot third source point, but we do not heavier. So I can just press Enter, then move ahead. One pressing Enter. When you realize that this trying blend of this line and this length of this line is not similar. So it is asking us that if we, if we want to scale this object to the source object or not, to, for the moment I retype no. Then we will move to there. You can see it align itself to this object at this source point. Now I will undo that. Now. Let's try re-skilling it. We saw that it was not ever do or it was smaller. We saw that it was smaller than the source object. Now, I will again select this. I would like to it align tool. And I will select the force source point. And here, second source point and here. Okay? So I will press enter and I will click years that I want to scale this object to the length of this line, I guess. And this will align as well as scale the object with the perfect level with the source obtain. So this was what about a ln 2? And it is too. Thank you. 28. Joint and Explode: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about joint unexplored to, to join tool and exploit to database similar and opposite to each other. So let's start with the joint tool. Suppose if I draw a line here like this, and another line here from here. So if I select this line, this line is selected, mince this Botha and different entities. I can join them both. We tell both joined too. So join tool is available in Modify panel in Home tab. When you click on this arrow, you will have this icon that is joined to. So you can make to it that's going to click Command J. It will join the entities. So productivity command. Now source object when multiple of this to join at once. So it's command line, say we can choose, select this both the lines and I will press again Enter. So now this is converted into single polyline. Oh, it joined this, both the lines. I can again change this or stretched this with this vertex C. So this both lines are showing the, another practical example I would like to give you is for that, I will draw glucose here. Okay? So I will join them with the Blend tool. Okay, so we have three different entities here, right? First, second, third, now, if I want to measure this length of this entities, I can do that with a list command. In AutoCad mirror command, it is called list. It will give us all the information about coordinates of this all entities and the total length of this, all engineers. So I will select this whole line and I will click in. That is a shortcut for the list command. This will display a list of everything on a screen. So here the two length of this line is 16, 0, 8. Now I'll close that. Again. Let's measure the length of this line. As I press enter, it will say it's the same c 16 zeros. So how can this line and combine, combination of all three lines can be the same. So we can identify the length, total length of this call miter join to. So for that, I will need to join his older lines and you select all of them. I will type CCI and Enter. Now, this whole curve is converted into single entity. So when I click on this part, it will select the whole row. And I can also change the like square root this whole vertexes. So let's measure this line. I would leak on l and press enter. Now the length of this lane is changed to 6176. You can see now we have total measurement of this code from this point to this point. So this goes, What about the join tool? Now let's learn about the explored two port that example, I will draw a rectangle here. Now, suppose if I want to select only this length from this rectangle, I can not. When I select or select this, it selects the whole rectangle. So if I want to break all these ages into separate entities, I can do that with the exploit to the Explore tool isn't available in Modify panel in Home tab over here, Miller than it is to also Eigen activate the extra two with the shortcut key, that is EX P. Exp L is the shortcut key for the Explorer to. Also, if I select this line and I will click on this, explore two. This is automatically export the whole component or object into different edges. So now I can click on this line and move this as per my need. Again. Let's see, this is a rectangle. Okay? I will again a activity explorer tool. Now is command and specify select objects. I will select this object and I regret enter. Now again, we have broken this whole rectangle into different edges. It works with all the shapes and objects. So we learned about showing two and exploit to. So this was all about it. Thank you. 29. Break and Break at point: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about brick and bracket 0.2. So what is break and break at point 2? To open the leg can record it Point tool. You can go to the Modify tab, click on this arrow and you can have two why consider and 30s, break and cricket point. So let's go through predict tool first. You can also use this from the command line. The shortcut for brick tool is me add a key. You can type the break tool and you can press Enter. So what does break into? Say Select Object. I will first select this object that I want to break. As soon as I do that, you can see at the point where I clicked, it started breaking the rectangle. So if I click here, it will chop off the part of this age from this rectangle. So you can see now, we do not have, this line will undo that. Now, if I want to be specific from this point to this point, I do not want this part of this line do in this circle. So to erase that or you can sit to break that. I will always intuitive pick two. Now, I will select this object and specify 1.1st should be this. Now, I will specify that breakpoint. So I will say break point here will be this. Okay? So we deleted this line from this circle. Now, as we discussed earlier, autograder runs into clockwise anticlockwise direction. But when you do it, this breakpoint tools, it will work in the clockwise direction. When I clicked here, rather than going in this side, it colvin to this side. Now let's learn about 8.2. So disordered tingle is an entity and this two lines are nothing but two lines, and it is not a polyline. So they both intersect the rectangle it here and here. If I want to relate this part of the rectangle, I can do that with the decade point to. So I will go to Modify tab and open the bracket point. Click on this. It will ask me to select the object. Now, I will specify the first breaking point, that will be this. Now I'll specify the breaking point for this. So now you can see that in deliberate or you can see the edge of this rectangle from this point. So I will again do that. I will select this. I will go to the Reagan point tool and I will specify the base point, or civic health is. Now this both lines have been broken off from this rectangle. So I will delete this. Now I can join this whole rectangle are all new shape by the join tool as we learned earlier. Now you can see that we have this holy land is converted into pull it in as a single entity. This is all about breakpoint and break at point 2. Thank you. 30. Measure Divide and Wipeout: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will see measure to divide to ANY power 2. So let's start with the measure to. For that, I will draw a line here. See 20, press Enter. Okay. So I would earn line here with it off 20 units, correct? With the measure tool, you can go to the draw panel and you can click on the drop-down arrow. And you can see there is a Monday right to measure 2 and wipe out to, sorry, wipeout tool. So I will start with the Measure 2. Now, what does measure tools does is it will create a points at the specific measurement as we described on an NDT online. So I will click on this line as specified in the command line. Select objects to measure, recon this line, and press Enter. Now specify the length of the segment. So what is the length of the segment? It means if I want this line to help three points on them, and what will be the length between each point? So I will say around like this line is of 20 units, so let's say 1.5 minutes each. So we'll have four points. So I enter the lens segment is five and press Enter. Now, it is not visible, I guess, because of the points are small. We will go to the utilities. New tends to point style will increase the point size by 15 percent. Press enter. They are still not visible because of the points tears I was available to the points tens and tens. The points tell from N2 circuit. It is. Press Enter. Now, you can see that indicated the line into four parts, each of five minutes. Now, you can also do the same with the circle. When I click on this circle, I will draw a circle. I will again go to the measure tool. And I will select this circle as an object. I'll press Enter. Now, I will draw a segment of, say, 15 units on this circle. So it will draw a circle. And this points, I will resend the visibility of points, the small circles. It will draw the circle, it 15 units each. Now you can see there is a huge distance between these two points. Why? Because it can fit the 15 and so between this two points, between these two points. But if it will, create a 15-year-old circle over this area, the distance between these two circles on week 15 units, it will make it to the maximum available size. Now let's see about the divide two. I will again draw a circle here. Now, I want this circle to help point segments will need each divided into, or you can say that we have to provide this tender total number of segments we want. If I want this circle 12, ten segments between each other, it will decide the automatic segment length between them, and it will give it the 10 points. So let's use the tool. I will go to the draw panel and I will select the right tool. Now I will select this object as specified in the command line. Now, we are asked to do the number of blocks or segments we want. Say, we'll say eight and press Enter. Now, this will equally divide this points on the circle between each and every angle there will be same distance. You can see this is all about the divide 2. Now let's study about the wipeout tool. Before that, I will try to draw diagram for the wipeout to see this. So I drew a diagram here for the wipeout tool. To activate each command with the shortcut you can use measure, measured issue. For the measuring tool. You can use divide DIV, further divide tool. And you can also activate the wipeout tool by tapping wipeout on the command line. Now, you can select whichever bottle from this groping and I will click on this wipeout tool. Now, it will ask us to specify the first or frames on the real object or diagram. So what does wipeout tool we will do is it will temporarily isolate the area that is under the window, well selected window for us to work out. So suppose there is a, some other object I want to try and place and this point, so I don't need to print audiences or you can separate this area for that. I can do that with the wipeout tool. So I will give this as a first, say around here. I will select this as a second per view this as a third, and I view this as a fourth. Now you can see it is also asking for the point. Very select this as a fifth. Now, once you are done with your creating your window, you can press the C button or you can look, click the close icon from here, and you click on Close. Now what does this blue is? It created an entity in which the no visibility of the objects that are below it. So if I click on this line, you can see this rectangle is a complex entity. It exist in, not delete the it will only hide the object behind it. So when I click on this rectangle, I can still edit it like this. But once a de-selected or clip press the escape key, it will remove it from the visible eat pork. I can also change the points between like this. Again, once I needed this, you wipe out the window. It will all be back to the visible. So this is all about the divide measure and wipe-out too. Thank you. 31. Array: Welcome back again to be learned about many modifying tools. Now here we learn what is 18 AutoCad? So what is a, it is a tool that will help you to create multiple copies of singular objects in different detection angles and different curvatures. So there are three types of arrays. In autumn, a polarity and rectangular area. We will go through them one by one. So the area is editable can be available at the modify panel. You can see this rectangular icons that are arrayed Tools. Menu on the stroke down I can, there are two arrays, rectangular, polar. And when you click on this drop-down button, you will see three options, rectangular to polar, and battery. So we will see them one-by-one. So let's start with the rectangular area. But before that, I will create a small circle of say, 50 units radius of February 28th. Click and okay, we have a circle of 50 radius. So now let's click on, I will click on rectangular. I would actually acting could get it. Once you add to it the rectangular data, the commandments say select objects, I will click on circle. Now, as soon as I click Enter, the airways will be activated. So let me see. You can see that we have a few options here. Totally a recreation new toolbar tab that is temporary. Once we are done with this set here, you can see, you can see that we have four columns and three rows. All of this can be existed with this options here. Now, if I want to have, say, nine columns, second week 9 audience and press Enter, this will create another entities of the circle in total. Now, if I want to adjust the distance between this oil, the path, I can do that. Either I can control the distance between from this center point to this center point, or control the complete distance between them. And this will create the divided, this will automatically divide circles in, within the range of it and it will automatically adjust the number of it. So let's adjust the distance between them to 15 to 20 every 10th them. And this will change the distance between each of these to be 20. Similarly, we can do with the rows. If I want to say land rose to nine and enter, sorry, nine and enter. Now we have nine rows and n columns for this circles. It looks too much, so I will reduce it to five. Now we reduce columns for a while. Now. So let's work for the owner. You can see the associative option is turned off. So what does that mean? Once you turn on the associative option for now, later in next step is I will keep that off and see the difference. So we have another option that is levels. So what is level? But it gave me, say, two levels. And then you can see nothing is visible in this view port. So we need to go to the 3D view and will become this more home icon which will move on. Mediation do the 3D view isn't as electronic. You can see there is another layer off or level of theater is created. I can also adjust the level number of levels. That is, have fun. We will have five levels of array. This which made to do. And it is not just the levels number of peak inventory, but we can also control the distance and height of this each levels. I'll click here and write to a file. The distance between this MOOC levels will be phi. Can see from the front view, the distance between this MOOC era layers or levels is 50 now. So we do not need them into 2D as we are working currently in 2D formats. So we're back to default one and Enter. Now. The next one is May's point option. So what is misprint option? Once I click on this, I will do ci ei contains the basement for this whole arrays. I will select this center as a base point. Now, I can also adjust them with this. Nice, but we cannot, as we have already specified slopes, they are locked. But I encouraged 66 on each column. So this was all about rectangular, eric, and will close at it. And remember this, this time we have associative option on. And I will close the a again. When, when you want to or wish to edit this array, you can just click on this area and you will see a complete dialogue on this area. Now, we can integrate list items means if you want to change this circle former to something else you can do with this option. You can edit source item is once you tend to make tens is to this circle, this will appear in all the other circles you going to do with this and reset. It means it will be switched back to the default partitions. And per word is, we're already seen this base point option. So I will close this area. Now let's create another day. So I will go back to their options and this time we have a pathway. So what does path here? Let's see that. Okay, we'll draw a spline year of random spline year at this, okay. So I will create a circle on a starting point of this plan, say 50, five radius. Okay? So I agreed it a circle and a curvature spline. So once I activate the pathway, C wordless command line says select objects. I will select this circle edge, the tip. I press enter. Now the command line select particle. So this will be the path for the arrow of this circle. To understand this better, I will change this circle or a rectangle so we can get a better idea of this. You will really see the difference as v one further on this. And we'll do a rectangle here. Let's take two it took, but so I will select this object, press Enter, and now I will select the path for this pathway. So this will be the bath for this rectangle. You can see all these rectangles add over this nine. Now. You can see I'm not able to adjust the total number of items of this area. And that is why socialists see first, how do I do this? So let's see first, interesting the distance between them. If, suppose if I type 15 year except off 11, this will select all of this rectangle and make the distance between from this point to this 1.15th and vice versa for all. Now we have an array of this rectangles all over this curvature with distance of 15 between all of them. But what happens if I want to change the number of total items on this a to-do that. You have to see this. There is a major option here. This, I usually call this an except of measure. I will turn on divide. Once you really can do weight, this will let you divide a number of items you want. Or what is total goes land. Now, x above 20, I will type here tenth. So we will have total 10 rectangular area over this path. So this is all about items in pathway. The next one is row. It is quite similar to the breaking material. See the difference here? It is set to one. I would recon and zip file. So we will have five rows. Again. This is bit hard to understand, so I'll click Close. Now, you can see we have a row over this array, insane, but now I will change the distance between them. 45 Enter. So for this, you can see this always x in the same curvature 0, well, below one. Now, what does this I can change the base point is dv, dy dt earlier, we can also switch the levels. We already saw that in rectangular but is quite similar. There is no difference between this. So next is tangent detection. So once I click on this tangent direction, I can give a brief or you can say I can specify the first for the tangent on this call, but this curve is not way too curvy, so it is not anymore often held for us. So next option is align items on settled on this alone, I align items. We can see once I click on this align items, the first of our rectangle touches this covert, this angle. So as soon as I've done this align items, it will make all these rectangles does the same thing, and this will make it all look like this. So I can interchange it again, too wet normal and make this straight. And if I want to do a line as per this length curvature, I can do this by clicking on this align items. So this was all the same of all. There's this z direction option will be helpful for us in 3D, so we'll cover that in 3D portion. So I'll close this for now. The last arrays. For RAD. To understand this, I will draw a rectangle here again. Okay? So, and I will also draw a circle you as it touches this rectangle. Okay? So I will add to it the polarity. Now. I will select the objects that I want to create ALL select this rectangle. Now I press Enter, and now we have to select the path, or you can say the polar array of war led, but it is different. Earlier, we selected this path in this view to select a center point. So as this rectangle is lying on this circle, I will select the center point of the circle. Soon as I click on the center point, we will have an array created for this path. So I would like this. Nobody here. And now you can see we're getting hit with a similar options over here and saying created for this over this circle. So effectively this item number and increase it to 10. 10 rectangles over this circle created as an array like this. What is this between? This edge is the distance between from this point to this point of each and every rectangle here. Now we have a 360 degree field. So what is this one? Say convert this to 180, for example, when limit the angle to 184, this whole code. So starting from this 0.1 of this rectangle, it will repeat only, it will only LE 2. It will only let the rectangles to go to 180 degrees. I can also keep this anywhere to any random digits, 270 degrees, and it will automatically divide the each between with 13 instance. Next one is row reorder. It is in the row option, but it will still try it once I did three rows for this. So this will create a row of three between all these overlapping. So I will click on this distance between them and I'll create 250. It is still less, so it'll be x 16 Enter. Now, we will rectangles all over this, creating into 16. Turn this to 360 bag. So this will help your reader would RAD. Now, next is levers. It is again same due to what we saw previously. Secondaries associate you, okay, before go to click the associative, but an off in this one, we'll see that in this one. Another one is base point. We already seen that once you click on this rotate items or turn it off, this will make all the rectangles information, but we did original quotations. What is this detection? So once you click on this direction, you can either work in a clockwise direction or anticlockwise detection, depending on your edit. Once it is turned on, it will creating anticlockwise direction. And once it is turned off, it will creating clockwise detection. So I'm running this associative, associative option off this time. Now re-close the old, say Wait. So earlier we had an associative option on this, so TO option on with this. But in this way, we turned it off. So if I want to read this rectangular area IQ, click on this and we would have a retainer option available. Once I click on this area, I will have an option to edit this area. But in this, we did not associated this array. So each and every rectangle here you see it is not area now it is a common entity or you can say independent entity. If I want to read that, I cannot. I have to edit each and every rectangle here. Each and every circle part here, randomly manually. So this was all about the array. Remember if you want to edit this areas in future, you must keep the associative option turned on. I can not read that change later on. So I have proved make the associative option on, if I wish to further read theory in my project. So this is what about all the arrays? Thank you. 32. Overkill and Boundary tool: Welcome back. Previously we so many modifying tools. In this lecture, I will take you through another to-dos that is boundary and over q. So let's start with the boundary to. The boundary tool is available in year over year in dropping below the hedge options. So you can also activate the boundary to, with the command line, I can press down below you and it will activate the boundary too. Now, once I do it the boundary do it will show me a boundary creation toolbox, but we need to have some drawings in a growing portfolio that so what does boundary told me to do is once I have a set of lines or edges, it will convert them into a boundary or not polylines fixed shape. So I will draw any random shape here. Okay? This is fine. Now you can see when I select this shape, it will select single lines, not all in one or likes him what we did with the joint command by joining them, I can convert them into poverty line 2. But we can also do with the boundary point, and it is quite easy once they snip the boundary option from here. The boundary condition, now low marks will open. I have to just, everything is set to default. Let it be to deploy. I can type object type is a region of polyline, but it will be related me poly them, and click on Copy. So what does command line says is speaking to null point, I have two Pico indenter point of this shape. So I can convert this shape into the boundary. So telecom internship or internal point of this can be anywhere over here, over here, over here, or anywhere inside this boundary layer. So we kid and this shape is converted into internal boundary. So I'll click Enter. And there we are done. Now, when I select this, it will slip is whole entity as one. Now, the difference between boundary and joint command is that we can also do with this John common. But the difference between boundary and join command is this boundary creates a copy of that whole area. So when I click on Move and move this whole shape over this side, you can see it does not created over or converted this into the polyline, but rather it will convert it as a copy in polyline. This is the, what we do with this is sin still available as it is, but it created a copy for that with a polyline. So let's erase this. We will get to the overkill too. I will draw some shapes here. It was understanding over 2, 2, I'll draw a rectangle. Draw another rectangle over here. And I will also draw a line. I also do a 19 year like this. And I will also do another line from this middle point to here. Now, when you save a file with this overlapping lines, an API, in case it is a large project, it may result in crashes and errors in or what okay, while opening who saving five. But it also generates the size of the file to be more. You can sit at once the entities overlap, it will override each other. And notice the size of the file once you say can be more. So to reduce that, there is a command that is called overkill. What will it do? Let's see, I will tap over and it will shortcut for that is over. I would have over and press Enter. It says select objects. Command line says select objects. So first I will select this line and I will press enter. Now, you just have to click on enter. You do not need to change anything over here. Total sprint should be always to default and have a great, Okay. Once it's done, you can see that the two lines converted into one leg means it jointed with the lines without creating any override of that. Needed a copy. So this will delete all the extra lines that old IMC so that we do not require. Suppose in the case of these three objects, line rectangle and a rectangle 2, we will try to overkill combined. So I will type overkill again, an end. I will select all of these objects in the selection window. And I will press, enter and press. Okay. So you can see that all this line rectangle and this rectangle to bone are converted into a single entities. This converted into single line. This rectangle is correlating to this entity, and this rectangle is also entered into this entity. Over to kill will delete all the lines that override each other. So that's it for this lecture. Thank you. 33. Status bar: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about status bar and sniping in auto debt. So the small icons you see here, theta c2 attendee, status bar, this whole panel, it is called Status Bar in AutoCad view it is options here and you can also edit all your options is pretty hard working needs and convenience. See. So let's see what are the ways the options that we get here. So I would suggest you to sit this options. You can pause the video and take a screenshot of this. Whatever options i o tick mark here should be also helpful to you in your workflow. So let's see first one is greed option. This is creed. We have also seen this in previous lectures. You can turn the grid on and off with this icon. So next one is snap mode, on and off. When I click on Snap mode, each and every line I draw or each and every object or introverted before it's fully snap to the grid. I can not grow between any other points other than the great lines. When I turn the snap grid off, I can also draw between the glutes, abs. I have to turn on the auto mode. And you can see now I can draw between the greets to, but when the grid snap is on, I can only draw in specific grid points on the legs. This it won't let me go anywhere as away. So next option is ortho. We already know what this Ortho mean as we studied in various examples, it will look, you're drawing X's into horizontal or vertical only. So let's turn off my ortho. Next one is to restrict cursor to specified angles. So it is not required, it is, it is not much required in a workflow. So we we will discuss that in later portion. Next one is shown Snapping references lines. So we will cover this in snipping topic on other one is also snip mode. Next one is line weights. So this line has a line weight of staying. Right here. I will increase the line weight. But it looks the same. Anchor is the line width for this line, but it looks the same. So when I click on this, it will display the line weight. You can see there is a thickness on this line compared to this. If not visible, I will also increase it when. Now you can see the thickness of this line. But as soon as I've done this display line, line weight off, it will remove, it will not show the thickness of that line, but the thickness of lines does exist as illegal again, and turn it back to the normal metaphor. It ok. Well it is now back to the default button. Then back off. Next one is transparency. We already studied transparency and hedge come on and it is very similar to that. This one is selection cycling. So suppose I have a nine year and I also have another line right over, sorry. I have a line right over this. And then one other one. I taught this. Okay? So I have drawn a two-line that overlap. Each has a density. If I delete this little envelopes or stay in the big room already did this one. Okay, so we have a two line here that overlap each other. But what if I want to select the Beck line of this? So when I turn on the Selection Cycling option from here, toggle back. You can see if I click on this line, Selection Cycling icon will show up next to the cursor. I hope it is visible to you. So if I turn it off, it will be gone again and I will be back to the normal. So what does selection, Selection Cycling does? When you click on this and I click on this line. So again, I will have option to select either this line or third line, which one I want to select. Fairly on this line, the deadline will be selected. When I, when I move my cursor over that, I would again have the same options. And at this time I can select this link. So tonight and I can select both the lens or if I want any particular line to be selected, which when this overlapping lines, I can do that with this option. When a hover my mouse over this both option, it will highlight the line that I can select with the options, and it can also select None. So this was all about siloxanes Selection Cycling. Next one is nap cursor to 3D reference points. This will be covered in 3D part. Coming to the next portion, that is filter objects selection. This also will be covered in 3D part. This, this is NO2 scale. It will give scale to the objects that you have given annotations to cover this later. Now. And next one is switching between the workspace. Again, switch between different workspaces from this item to the next one is basically contains the units, units from this photon status bar. Next one is weak properties. So if I'm working on this line and I need to see the properties of this line. I just have to click on this Quick Properties. This will open a week robot is for this line. Like this, I can have color. The layer that is situated on. We will learn about layered soon. Line types like this may call them by continuous. We'll also learn about exome and length of that line. So this is all about properties. Next one is hardware acceleration. This is made mostly depending on your system configurations and requirements. It will work automatically on it. And I so this you do not interfere with that. The last option we have here is clear screen. So once I click on this, this week, we and my whole screen off this motivated only will enable the full-screen mode for the AutoCad. And I can switch back from this option right here. So this was all about status bar. So we didn't know about status bar and various lose within it. Now let's move on to the next part that is snapping. So if I draw a rectangle here, right this like here. So I want to, you can see that when I tried to draw a line and move on to this corner, it was kinda do, it will kind of give me a reference point. This is the corner point of this rectangle. When a morn this point, this will also be Umea and point as a reference point here you can see, you can read that. So here is how we get it. Suggest us the end points. Now, if I move on to the right side to WHO suggests me that reference line, that I can start my line width if I want to start align exactly with this reference line. So if I move my cursor over this corner and slowly move my mouse towards the right side. It will statistically that item, it will snap, move it the line that I need to do with the right, this reference. Coming to the next thing. We can also have reference with the midpoints. We can also have the option with the nearest points. And we can also go with the option with the all the corner points of this rectangle. How to change the settings for the snaps. So snip icon is whatever year snap courses to 2D reference points. I can turn it off. Now I want to have a neat evidence points to this, like, like this. So now if I want to draw a reference line, I can not have any reference to this. I can not mark exit which corner point it wouldn't be. But with help of this snap options, if at least one line and activated nap, I do like this. It will also snippet from the exit corner point of this rectangle. You can sense the settings of this from this status bar option, go to this small arrow key and click on this optics editing settings. With objects map. You can change the endpoint, midpoint, geometric center nor quadrant, extinction in Shakespearian and parallel and all these points that you would like to select mature workflow, some objects never tugging on. Can we turned on with effluent, an object snap on. Can we turn on with F3? So these are all the important points that you should have on your autopilot too. You can screenshot this and have this same settings in your objects snap. Next tool is, if I next to it is very simple and very similar to sniping. Suppose if I want to draw a circle or a line From this point at 100 distance and this pointed 100 distance. So what do I do normalise? I will draw a line. I will move it from this point to a 100 units on this side and 100 units on that side. So to make it easier. Okay, so we added vary in small-scale. Right now, like this, it is a foreigner down, say 33 units. So I will do it in a small-scale. So for example, it's going to retain a 100 into to you. I wanted to draw point it from two units from this 0.2 units from this point. How do I do it without moving and optic twice, like I have to draw a line here from this point, then I have to move it two units at this side and then do hundreds ever all these x's. So this is really time digging and it will mostly consume a lot of time. So to do that, first you have to do is select the line command or whatever object you would like to draw quanta that come on. Now, I will keep my mouse around this corner. Now I click Shift button. You have to press and hold Shift button and click right mouse click button like this. Once you do that, you have option of various type of snap settings here. Now from this year to select the from option. Once you select this form option, you would have option like this. Select the base point. What does command-line sees is elected base point, Emily cornea as a base point. Now I will move to offset of say, two units and press Enter. So we have a line. This would exactly measure the two units. You can see that. So we have a line drawn from two units. Far from this point, you can point your toe into any detection you would like to draw the line width. If I wanted to draw and this detection, I would keep my cursor here and enter the units I want to have offset from this point. Next one is middle point. So I have a circle here, I have a rectangle here. I will again activate the line command. Press Shift button, press and hold Shift key and press right-click button. Now we'll midpoint between two. So first one is specify the first if I want to draw a line starting from exit midpoint between these two weeks is, are these two points on this reference? How do I do it? So I will select this as a first and celebrities as a second. Now, line command is originated exactly between these two points. So if I measured this lane at this it is measuring it 0.91. Okay. Wait. Okay. This measured this measures 0.914. And when a measure of this angle from this length, from this point, it will also measure the same little point, 9, 1, 4, 4. So this was all about snapping and status bar. You can try with you so that options from this and knew as an issue to pack this mode of tools, this will really help you by drawing in a 2D plans. So we type of snaps. It is easy to make reference points and draw with references. And it will allow you to correct exit points you would like to draw with two. Thank you. 34. Layers: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn the most important concepting outerwear teddies layers. Each and every professional work is also carried out under the layers. So what is layers in? The Layers panel is available in home tip around here. So let's understand first what is layer? So this is suppose and plan. So in one layer I can fix my whole the plans. Voice objects off plants. In another layer, I can fix all the doors. And another layer, I can fix electric lines and electric it is of the building. None of the layers I can throw it fixtures and another layers I can borrow it cabinets and another furnitures. But in layers, you can easily customize each and every layer. So, so when you are done with your drink, oldest layers combine into one end former single drawing. You can easily access and toggle the visibility of each and every layer and customize each individually according to your needs. So let's get started with the layers. So first I will open the layers properties. It is available right here. Once I click on that, the layer properties dialogue will open. You can see there are so many options here. Just creator. I would just make this bigger so it is easy to understand and read. Okay, so I hope this is visible. Now. Let's understand what is layers. So this is a layer. Currently, there is a, by default there is a 0 layer in AutoCad. You cannot delete or you do cannot remove this layer from the autopilot. You cannot rename it either. So there is always a default layer creating out of it. So first one is default layer, the green sign, that green tick you see here. This means that currently this layer is active. I can easily create new layers and delete new layers. So first I will create a circle. So it is currently you can see the layer number 0 is E2 and created this circle. So this circle is creating layer 0. Now, let me create another layer. I'll click on new layer. You can name it as anything. I will name it as columns. Okay, so I created a new layer naming, naming it a column. I will create another layer. I will name it as furniture. Okay? I will create one more layer, say gloaming, and one more. Okay, So we created another four layers. Now, you can easily customized for each and every aspect of this layer. So when you do this, okay, so there is option on, turn on and off each layer, three's each layer, local layer, a layer. So we will see these three options later. First, let's see what is plot. So when we reach to the sheet imprinting plot, a portion, I will teach you what is floating means. But for now, just remember that when I turn this off, Suppose I have drawn some objects in furniture layer. So if the plot option is all of, even if it is visible in my view port. But when I finally print it out, it won't be visible in any PDF or any loading of the drawing. So this option toggles the looting of each and every object visibility into final plot. Next is color. So currently the white color is activity 1000 layer. So I will change the layer color for this. I'll click on white and make it red. Applique on this and make it green. I will click on clumping and make it blue. And I will click on this and make it T yellow. Okay, so we give a different, different colors to this options. So let's see what is line weight, line type, sorry, you can change the line types from this Layers option right here. When I click on this continuous option, a new select line type options will open. So I can, you can see that currently only 19 is already worth. It is continuous, solid line. To load different kinds, you just have to click on this load option. This will bring a big list of the different lines available in AutoCad. I can change whatever I want to. So let's say we change it to test2 and I will click on, Okay, this will load it into this select line type option. I'll click on this and I will click. Okay. So for this columns layer, the line type is set to two. Now what is line weight? We studied the language earlier from this option that we can toggle between the line weights and change the thickness of each line by this line weight options. So I will just make it 0.25, okay? That won't be visible, so I will make it 30. That it now there is optional transparency. We will come back to that later. I can read or write a description for each layer if I wish to. So next is furniture. I will again change the line type for this and say we'll make it WH column, okay, The validation and this an empty coffee. So I would done fuse changes to this both layers. Now when I switched to columns layer, I can do it with double-clicking on this icon sequencing inevitably call this, the Coulomb slaves will be activity. Once I double-click over here, the furniture layer activated. You can also do that by clicking on this or you, once you click on the layer, it will be highlighted means you are currently able to edit thick layer. So once you click on that, there is option here on the right-hand side of this, all these options that is select layer. Once I click on this select Set current and it will reset it to her and also the shortcut key for 30s. Or to see, once I click on this, it will be activated the current layer I am, I have highlighted. If I pick on this column, the column layer is highlighted. Now I will press altar and Kesey. Then this layer will be set as the current layer that I'm working on. I was preserved. See, you can see how this option tends to it. Try it here. Now, let me throw some object or with the columns layer activated. You can see that the line type we said is showing over here. The color of this is red and the default is default linewidth. We said for this layer rows 0.13, but it is not visible. Why is it not visible? Because we have not activated the shoreline Weight option. On secondly cone, this will be miscible. Can see there's now I will draw another object in furniture layer Double-click connectivity. You can also toggle it or even also fix this on the right side, left side, or right side of your board. Bye trigging the option here to this, you just have to click on this. And once you drag it outside, it will make these look at it from the ports. So let's drop them. Let's draw on furniture layer or a little rectangle. Okay? So you can see the line is not visible here. And we said to this line that ISO Dash double-dot. But to you it is not visible. Even the linewidth option is on, it is not visible. Blue that I will click on this. We'll go to the properties by pressing Control 1. When you press Control 1, poverty toolbar will open. Once you have selected a new object, you're going to press Control 1 and it will show property bar. You can also do that without selecting the for any object. Once I please control on a property bar will open 10. If I select this rectangle, it will show me the data for the rectangle. So there is options here, line type scale. So you can see though we heal given it the line type. The line type here is activated, but we are not able to edit it to do that. So I will just change the line scale. Say a 100 entered Syria is not visible. Let's do around 2000. Let's see. Still, we are not able to visit. We are not able to see the line scale. You might need to do this depending on your work. Or you can say depending on your work or you can say that depending on the current units you are gone. So I will try 5 thousand breaths and this is not visible because of the units. This type of plug-in might require more scale, but we are currently working at this size. So this may be creating the issue. So we will try to change the line type for this one. I would click on Load button and I say ISO disk space. I will try this one, breakaway, okay? And this will set the default one to this. I've also toggle when the nipple line weight to set, set it to say 0.40 leak. Okay, So now I will try to draw in this plumbing layer. I will activate this layer selected and highlighted and an oblique set current. Now, let's say I drew this square, you square or rectangle here. Okay? So we are object created in coming layer with the default color we said for this layer. So I will again draw on new objects in windows and doors layer like this. So we have object or CE diagram ready here. Now we understand them different other options in layers. So we went through this line type nine weights and transparency. Transparency is similar to what we studied in the hedge. I would click on this plumbing layer activity and I click on this transparency button. I can toggle between the transparency rate of 0 to 90. Say you want to transplants have 16 Glick and I will click. Okay, you can see this, the transparency or you can say the, this box that we created is now not very bright in color. Once I set it to default 0, we will make to the normal. So the traversal, this was about transparency. This option is. New VP freeze. So we will be using that in 3D portion, but let's see Next other options. So we have another options here that shows like cubelets icon. So once I click on this dysarthria options that will let me turn on, on and off or layer. So if I want to turn off this furniture layer, so we know this green box and furniture layer. I'll click on this. So this will turn off this furniture layer. It will not be visible or nodes mode selectable during the period the bulb icon, this turned off. Now again, I can turn it off from near. What is freeze. We have another option next to that is freeze. I will select this rectangle that is incoming. So currently the plumping is active. You can see currently the thrombi layer is active. Once I click on this free split on from the sperm being layer, this will not allow me to freeze the layer as the player is currently active. So i o to switch on to say windows and doors layers. And I will click on this fleas. Once I click on Freeze the box Q2, with this coming layer, we didn't correlate totally disappear. All the objects within the plumbing there were totally disappear. But what is difference between plum freezing layer and turning on and off or layer. So once you do that, once you turn off a layer, the five is still exits in AutoCad, but you will not be visible. And once you turn the fleas own, you freeze a layer to all the objects that are drawn within that layer will be removed from the AutoCad file temporarily. This will help you work faster and this will decrease the total weight of all you can say total size of the file you are working on. This will give you very smooth workflow if you are working on big projects. So that is where the threes command will be helpful. Next option is looking. So if I'm in furniture layer and I want to look this current layer. So click on this log button. Now is this one. As I click on this layer, you can see that the visibility of this button, usually visibility of this box changed a bit. When I click on Look, this will make to the normal curve. And I click on Lock. It is kinda, you can see it is being transparent. Little bit of transparencies observed here. So once you local layer, all the object that is in that layer will not be able to more customize them, but you cannot edit them. So if I try to move or you can say if I select this, I can select this, but once I keep my cursor on it, you can see a lock icon is, a lock icon is displayed on the cursor. So this means that this object is in a locked layer and I cannot edit or move it from his position. So this was about looking layer. Now, next is how to delete a layer through later layer and it to select this, highlight that layer. And next to this set current icon, there is a cross icon here determined. This is for deleting a layer. I will click on windows and doors layer, and I will click on Delete, but I cannot edit it unless and until a layer is empty, I cannot delete it. So for dating this icon, sorry for deleting this layer, I need to relate to all the objects that are currently in windows and doors layers. To do that, I will just click on this box that is yellow tissue in the windows and doors there. And I will click on Delete. Once I delete that, now I can delete this layer. So that layer is easily diluted. Mix your menu, we want to relate a layer. All the objects that are in tet layer should be moved to another layer. Or you, if you do not need them, you can delete them and then you can delete the layer 2 cannot direct trade glitter layer containing any object. So next thing is, how can I delete a current layer? Suppose if I am in plumbing layer currently prompting layer is active and Vl, this box you in the lumping layer. Sorry, this one never did it. So currently the plumbing layer is currently empty. There are no objects in the plumbing layer and I will click on Delete. So this will warn me again that terrain, the layer was selected or keep cannot be deleted unless and until you are in another layer and the layer you want to read it is empty and you have not said that as a current layer, you can delete that. So this was all basic about the thank you. 35. Layer stats: Welcome back. In an earlier lecture, we went through the layers and how to manage layers. In current lecture, we will learn about layer states. So what is a latest tech? Currently, we have a set of plan year and set of drawings with different layers and different colors and different line types. Everything is set up according to different layers. So what is a layer state? Suppose if I have to make some changes with the current settings, suppose there are furniture's here, tables here. You can see that in this restaurant whole, there are some furniture, furniture tables. If I don't have this layer, this is all furniture layer country we are on. So if I want to turn this off, this layer off and create quarterly and under a different set of layers for this train, I can do their tumor layer straight manager could do open that. We will go to the layer properties. Now, here, we know that this layer was old furniture layer, this one. So when a fleece, this the layer will disappear. The layer objects will disable. Again, 3's like this. We now we will create a different state for this complete layer stack. So click on this layer state manager ID content is available here. Once I click on that, I will have a radius options for the layers. Now, you see there are various state already existing in this layer. You can see that now one say create a new layer for this layer, strict for this, I will create on New. Now I will name it is, say without without furniture. Now we'll create the description. Anything. Okay, you're going to have anything you'd want national economy. So we created a new layer here without further neater. Now, I will click on this and save it as close. So it is a sale. So now to toggle between that. Now if I want this bake, I will go to the layers, sorry, layers here. Now you can see unsealed layers to it. It says that unsold layer state. I will again go down here and click this without furniture. And this is currently activity. Now, if I switch make 20 another layer state. Suppose Architectural, a lot of things changes seen in this adjective layer. I, o these cars, syphilis, red color. But mayonnaise go back here and tended to working. I'll say without furniture, I removed the furniture from this and the Gaza potential to white. This is no layer strips work. Now, when I open a new drawing and then go to the layers properties, we do not have any layers here, right? So if I want all the layers settings to be important to destroying, how can I do that? To do that, you just have to go to the drawing. You want to import layers from interest total. Click on Layer Properties, go to a layer state manager or this, or I forgot to mention one more thing that you can also open the Layer Styles Manager from this Layer icon. I'm going to click here. And you can see that manage layer steps, once you will become this layer and manage layer strips. Again, click on if I want to import this without furniture, they are sick. That resume. I will just click on this and click Export. It will take me to the default folder or anywhere you want to save it as it will be saved in a ls for my layer states. So I will click on Save and Close. So Labor Statistics and quartered. Now I will go to the grind where I want to import this. And that would be quantitative statement here again. And we'll again have option of importing the drawings. And when you can import. And I will I will go to that drawing and I will select the las format from the file type. Once I do that, I will end with this option showing you or file-sharing group without layer for meetings where double-click on this and this. So they are statistically stored. So now we have all the layer stack that is, we had to be exploited from other doing importer to this right now I can work in this layer and anything I want as I want. So this is how we can export and import layers in auto-grade. So this was all about layers state in auto-grade. Thank you. 36. Layer Filter: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about various type of layer filters. So when we open a layer's property types, you can see there is an option here containing name filter and we have options here, all and all used filters. So suppose it is when you are working in a drawing. If I want to create a different group for the specific layers, I can do that with the layer filters to create a new layer users to click on this icon. This will create a new group filter. So I will type here, say Layers, group 12, okay, So this is my new layers, group one to it. The layers to this group just show to click on Save, click on cURL, column Def points. And we'll move dimension layer 4, layer, furniture layer and fix layer to that. To do that, you just have to click on here. And now you just have to move and drag it over here. Once you drag it over here, this will create a communist different feeder for this group. So all these filters are grouped in a single filter. Now, how do you search among this filter? I will create another layer just for an example. Okay, So we have a layer group two here. I will drag another, some layers intact. Or you can just, if I hold still and press Shift and hold the bottom of it, it will select all the layers until that one medically and create all this interlayer group two. Okay, now we have different two options. Or layer contains this all containing all to use layers. They are Group 2 contains these few layers and layer group one witness these four layers. Now, if I wanted to sounds among this layer, suppose I want to search layers, or I want to filter the layers that only have a specific group property. So to do that, we have a layer filter icon here. So when I click on New Layer poverty Peter, this will create a property filters. That way I wanted. So I will name it as saying only red. And I'll click on this red color from color options and click Okay. This will filter out all the layers that only has a red color in 10. And when I, when I'm done, I just have to click okay. So and it will contain all the layers from this, this, and this contains the red as a color in them layer. So this was all about layer filters. Thank you. 37. Layer Match tool: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we learn about Layer Walk and metal layer properties. So let's get started with the labor. What is options? You can see that we do not have any career layer here. We do not have any new layers here. So I'll create some new layers over u. Let's say. Okay, I created a layer, now did send some properties quarters, but it recon red color, change line type to say something else. And I would say New Folder line rate to say 40 m, m, Okay? I will create another layer. Okay? And we're emulating a local area. And I will create another layer. Okay? I've written this new color to be green and Chris, okay? Okay, now we're done and I would change this default to say 13, and change this one to say 80, or whether it is tutti. But let's try it. Now. I will add to it the layer with red color and draw object here. So you can see line weight is on. So we can see that we have a thick layer here. This option on screen. Now I will again drew another switch back to layer with yellow color and draw another object on the screen. Okay, This is really thick. Okay? So let's try layer with green. And I will draw another object on the screen. Once I do there. Now, if I want to match the properties of this layer to this, how can I do that? Now, you can see that we have, our icon has seen much labor. What is soulmates layer? So when I click on this, the common lands age, the command line says select objects. Now I need to select the objects I want to copy from proceeded Screen1 and then press Enter. Now, select the destination objects. So when I click on, when I clicked on this yellow icon, it switched all the properties to this one. Now when I go back to this, ODD do is it did not change any layers, settings in their labor. What is, it only tends to convert this object with all the robot is off that layer, yellow. And it also moved the layer. It also moved this object from green layer to yellow layer. Similarly, I can do with this option to click on this message property. And now I will just click on this red one. Click enter. And I will select this both objects, this one and this one. So it took the destination of that layer to this layer. Now again, this layer is converted into yellow here and it is moved to the lay layers with yellow color. You can see that over here. So this O1 layers remain intact, right? Whatever the layer we use to match the robotic from, it will move back to the layer. So this was all about layers. Now, let's see. Layer walk through that. I will again create some layers and objects, shows the ellipse, and I will draw a 22 year. Next one is yellow layer. Okay, there is too much of a hero. Now I blew it with the green color too. And I do that again, so everything is visible on screen. Okay? So the Layer Walk tool is available on this layers panel. When you click on this layer walk, a new level of books fellow upon. It contains list of all the layers that we are currently in drawing. When I click on Layer green, every other layer rather than the objects that are lining layer green will disappear. So it is helpful when you are working on layer based project. Suppose we have a group set of furniture as now you want to look up the furniture only can do this with layer walk to magnetic only at red, you will only display the layer thetas a currently has objects in them. So means red object layers on an object. So it means or is the optics on this layer will be visible for the period. And we temporarily hide all the other layer and then objects. So this is all about layer walk to, this was all about this lecture. Thank you. 38. isolate, Unisolate Layers: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about isolating and an isolating layers also how to merge the layers. So I have a drawing of a bar restaurant here. You can see that it contains all the different layers and all the different components eternity in different layers. Now, what is isolating and an isolating layers? So for example, if I want to work on this furniture parts, you can see, well this table is set up situated here. I want to specifically work on third party. So when I'm working around this, a male trouble, like working along this points where these lands can be problem for me by working with this objects. So isolating a layer means it will lock all the layers except that one. So the isolette layer I've option is available over here and lay at a pennant in home Deb. So when I click on this isolated layer option, it will show me on the command line select objects. I have to select the objects that are needed to be isolated. So suppose I want to isolate all these furniture layer, every select the object. It is excreted into four meter layer. Once I click on this box, it will show me that selected objects humans living, or I can select this whole area. So under furnitures that are concurrently on the in yellow color ending furniture layer, baby isolated. I would click Enter or Spacebar. Now you can see the other components in drawing are literally faded. So they are afraid it a bit. And now take all the layers except this furniture layer unlocked. And you can work with them even if the line command is selected. And I tried to move this. Suppose, say I selected and try to move this, want to lead this layer or this furniture components will be more than all these other layers and components. Raise it, it splits and unlock. We can set it by going to Layer Properties. Now, you can take that except furniture layer, although the layers are being logged into drawing. So this will help me, or this will let me work on, work on a specific direction in your drawing. Again, select all the layers and dilute them, and only those unlocked layer will be deleted. Minister, current furniture layer we isolate it, will be deleted or undo that. Now, let's learn about an isolating them. So when I select a layer to change the drawing to its normal state, I just circle, click on another, a solid layer option over here. Once I click on this, it would undo all the isolation we did on that layer. You can work on different layer. Suppose this time I want to isolate it. This was a glucuronide so that they can select any component on the wall layer. So this component should we went to our layer, I click on this. Now, I will again. So you can see this whole was I've been isolated, detailed, tried to ensure you once I'm all this only was moving more to miss their eyes, water it differently. Now I will a nicer let them Okay, solid and drink respect to the normal. So this is all about isolating and on isolating layers. Now, let's learn about merging layers. To demonstrate that I will make some layers appear by default in your drawing. Yellow, green, and blue. Now, I will just do them with the colors red, yellow, green, and blue. Okay? Now I will draw component in each layer. Suppose first we start with the red one, will draw a rectangle here. Okay? This is in red layer. You're going to take it from here currently red layer is set to normal mode to yellow layer like this. And I will draw something on the yellow layer, say this. Now we will move to green layer and draw a circle in green layer or say ellipse. Now, I will move to blue layer and draw component in the blue layer. So now you can see we have four layers and four components in each layer. So what is most truly notebook? And suppose if I want to merge these layers or all of these layers in one layer, equal layer. To do that, I need to use them much to 16 electricity and select the source layer means this layer should go in to this and combined with this layer, it will do it in a second too. Let's check that. I would go to Layers panel and the Maasai consoler were already a disability oldest layer. Once I click on this, the command line shows that select objects on layer two moles. So I wonder select this objects. I want to select these three architects. This is one. Okay? So I want this object to be most in this green layer. I will select them and press Enter or Space. And now I will select the source object target layer. You can see that select object on target layer. So I want to merge all this layer into green layer. I'll click on green and blue equals. Now, you can see that it is asking me to do you wish to continue one cyclic years? It will delete all the other leaves from the layer tab. This is helpful when you want to combine few layers into one and work once you are done with your final drawing. So this is all about layers. Now, you'll notice that this, this selected, just move on despite of being selected in not transferred to the green layer. So the blue layer was currently active in the drawing tab, you can see that that is a brewery edible and clearly active, which shows the state of the current active layer on this layer pennant. So it could not be related to enhance whatever it did not allow us to move the blue layer with green. But you can see that we can still mostly all these green layers into blue. And because the blue one is currently active, if I want to do the same with green one, IO to select the green is a current active layer. So I can delete this blue one green layer. So let's try that. I visited green from mu and add to it the green layer is a current layer. You can see you're gonna also 1000 per year. Now you can see that the green layer is currently active. Hey, would again go to the much to this nano is live this blue object and press Enter. Now I will select the source object that I want to transfer it to 10 minutes. This'll tell isn't green layer one segment then it is one sec liquidity to Robin asked me to you, Louis, I wish to continue in Arabic years. So now you can see all the layers except green are deleted. Hence, where we transfer all the other layers in the green layer. So this was all about merging layer isolating in a nice auditing layer. Thank you. 39. Layer Translate: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about layered translator. So what is layer translator? Suppose I have a 2D drawing here during three and going for I drew a component in this train. And I want to transfer the layer informations in currently drawn component in this drawing. So we can do that with the translator layer. So we'll go back to drawing three VO2 drying, storing three in rank for currently. And i o period, a little green layer. In drawing three, I will use some line types or no line type. I will give some line rates, the 18, you can change any properties you would desire in this section. I will just green and I will give it a yellow. So we have a layer with green name and yellow color in this drawing. So we will move on to Dream for now. I will create a new layer here, saying, I will give the color red. Now, relate the line rate in line type B to default. Now, I will draw some component in trade layer. So you can also transfer, transfer a component to another layer by it is quick x's. They are too. So I will just select this rectangle and I will click on the data layer from this drop-down box. This will transfer this drawing to that layer. Select the rate is a current, active was kept, teal blue is current. So you can see I have created a red layer in destroying and green layer in this drawing with a yellow color. So this circle, I drove altro circle you, this contains a green color. Now, to do that, what do you have to do is for sale both the files. I will save this one. I already created a copy. I will just overwrite it. Say where he is. Now a so this rule, okay. So we'll say that this both the files in a location to access the draw, a translator tool unit to go to the Manage view window, a new layer translator option. Here, I wonder translate this yellow drawing properties to the current active layer in drawing four. So I will go to drain for, I want this yellow copy to be translated in this layer. So I will go to Manage tab now, I will click on Layer translator from good standard panel. Now you can see that it shows that translate from option in this, currently we have two layers in this drawing, which was 0 layer by default debt we already studied earlier. And the red layer we created now VO2, a loader layer that we want to translate this layer from to that layer to load that, we will load the growing number three files that we saved earlier. I will click on this yellow circle one and I will be copper. So currently, this drawing file is opened in days and it shows all the active layer in this drawing over here. Now I want to translate this red layer to green layer. So I will first select grid, and now I will select green. Once you do that, you will see a little highlight and complete highlight on this port. Tabs. Now I will click on this map option. Once I map them, you will see that old day or Nimbus read the new layer name will be green once it translates from red to green, and the red layer from this drawing is disappeared. Now we have to call it here. So we are currently two-color a year as red, but in that one we had yellow. So once you've done that, once you are done with this, you just have to click on translate. This will ask me if I want to save those settings or not. I do not wish to currently sell this setting so we can translate on. So you see it, see that the box changed from red to yellow. And when we go to the layer properties, the name of layer tends from red to green and color. Hello. Exactly as we saw in this drain number to be solving is translated. This layer, another layer of this drawing layer translate to, thank you. 40. Dimensions: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about dimensions in AutoCad. So we have a different depth and octets for all the options, bit dimensions, text, center lines, leaders. We will go through all this one by one. But let's start with the dimensions first. Note, okay, we can define a line length. You can say radius of circle, arc call or whatever. With the dimension tools, you can specify the range of distance from 1 to another dimension to, well, you can have a quick dimension tool options on the Home tab at annotation panel here. You can also access type of dimension from this panel and when you want to work on digital dimension. So we have more options. You can also do it from this specific eNodeB in dimension Benner via option here, drop-down arrow through which we can switch between different types of dimensions. The shortcut key for dimension is d. I am, you inactivate that by pressing Enter. I'll space. It will give it that dimension command. So let's start by basic dimension tools. I would run an example here which will help us understand them types of dimensions in order to read. The first one year is that is linear dimension, I will click an activity that the command line says to specify first diction and chin line origin or select Update still. So I need to select first and the second to create this dimension. So it's a 12 measure this lane. So Greek year one. And I will click here too is the second. This will create a dimension. You can see. Now I have to just drag it anywhere I want to place it. Suppose I want to place it this far, I can, and I want to place it on this set. I can also do that. So I would bless it, tried to year, but this redefined the length of this line. For me, this is vertical dimension. I can also do the wasn't already mentioned with this dual public unforced point and really considering point like this, this will also have me to make the dimensions in vertical as well as horizontal. Suppose you ever want to measure this land line? I can do with this leg this but this was not let me measure this accurately or either it will only let me measure it horizontal or vertical. To measure a slant lines in AutoCad we use to align dimension group. You can, once you click on this drop-down arrow, you will have aligned to Lear. When you click on this align tool, this will let you select the two points, data state entities slant or in a different direction or shape. So I will click on this as a force point and I will call this as a second. Once I do that, it will show me the dimension for this accurate line. Now, the next two lease, angular, good. This will help me measure the angular dimensions for the photograph. So if I want to measure this length, I can recall this first, and I really want this second. This will show me a angular dimension for this line. And you can place anywhere I want, as we saw earlier. I place it here. Now. I wish to measure this line and this lens and angle between them. I can do that with those same 22 quick access, this tool registered public on this year. And this will activate the two. Now I'll click on this line and this line. So this will show me the angle of degree between them, just two lines. The next tool is next to this article enter tool. So this will let me create length of this arc. So it's via a drone and archaea, I would click on this arc, and this will show me the current length of this arc. So from this point, starting from this point to this point, the length of arc is 198 point to coming to the next thing. Let's see. We are good ideas for this. Now, I want to rate measure this radius of this circle. So I would say click on the circle. This will show me a radius dimension in the form of shortcut. Social media radius dimension. Again, visit anywhere I wish. I can also measure the radius of this arc like this. And I am complicit or what a year. The next two layer is damaged tool. So when I click on Diameter tool, I can measure the diameter of any cell Colyer arrow click on this circle. This will create a diameter sign in the dimension next to it. The next two lease job dimension group. So when I click on job dimension tool, it will let me create a joke dimension for any arc or circle. Suppose I want to create the job dimension for this one. Once I do that, I was specified distance for the job being. So I clicked on this point in our oblique over here. This will let me create adsorbent dimension like this, like this. I can create job dimensions in AutoCad. Now, the next and last type of dimension, two lists ordinate. It is very simple. Suppose I read more of the society to understand it. Okay? This will, let me define a coordinate from x-axis and y-axis. So I will draw a line here from centred around here. Okay? So if I wanted to know the exit point where this line meets, I can do that with dimension dually, that is coordinate dimension group. If I select this point, then drag it down horizontally or vertically like this. If we read down say horizontally, this will give me the length for the x, x axis. Now, if I select, again in triggered down vertically this volume with a length older y-axis. So through which I can know the exit dimension or exit coordinate for this point. Land. Well, this point lent on what the axes. So this was all about types of dimensions. Thank you. 41. Dimension Styles: Welcome back. In previous tutorial, we studied about basic dimension and demands and types. So in current tutorial, we will learn about the dimension styles. Currently I have drawn a rectangle here on screen to understand some basic aspects of dimension two motor the specific dimension depth. You can go to the anode. This will take us through dedicated dimension panel. You can open the dimension style by clicking on the small arrow on this dimension banner. And you click on this, it will open the dimension style manager. Currently there are two types of dimensions directive in our drawing. Another two and standard. So what is annotative and standard? Standard mints the standard dimensions 10. Once you click on this and you can click on the set current, this will set it as a current dimensions Child. Currently, the annotative is active. So what is NOT two-dimensions data? Let's study about that. I will close this. Now. I will draw dimension here. First, I will switch to the eNodeB 2-dimension, only mentioned in two-dimensions on this rectangle, one. And here it goes, the second one. Okay? Now you can see when a zoom-in, though dimension will be easily visible. And then a zoom-in here, this two-dimensional will be visible. Now, what is annotated with dimension style? So once a drawing is drawn, suppose this is the current scale of my drawing, as we studied about in units setting up the limits for the drawing. Now, suppose if I scale this object, the dimensions with state, same place but on increasing the uptake. Or you can say, well, if I zoom out, the dimensions are not visible. To toggle that you can do it with the status bar here to there it is. Ed skills to annotative objects when denotation scale changes. When I click on this, it will turn on the energy to scale for the dimensions. Now, I will add just the dimension scale from this. I would be one ratio to this will decrease the size of the dimension. You can see here. When I click on this link, raise it to say one ratio a dessert increase the arrowheads and dimension style. So this was what about NOT two dimensions? Now, let's move on to the further dimensions or we did it this both. So we have another that is standard dementia. So let's open the dimension style manager now. Okay? So we have a two-year standard and an octet you. Now, when I click on this standard, standard, we're older maintenance terminator, you can click on this modify or you can create a copy of this standard dimension. For the moment, I'll just create a copy. I will click on this New button. This will create a copy of the standard dimension style. So you can name it as, let's say dimension style one. Okay? Now you can do it with the start with inattentive or the standard algebra. Keep this as a 100 one. So you can also toggle within the US used for option, you can set it for specific dimensions type. So you can say linear angular radius, diameter, ordinate leaders and told her answers. So I will say today is all dimensions and I click on Continue doing that. This will open some new mentioned manager, knows data manager or the same. Now we have different tabs here, line type symbols and Aquatabs. Tech steps, feet, tip primer unit types, alternate unit types and tolerances. Now let's go to the line tabs. So for example, when you are working with the dimension, let me tell you the basics for today. So this is known as dimension line. The arrow on the both sides are called arrowhead and these are called the extension lines. So you can change the color of the line by clicking on this red, green or events. It is by layer or a white block. Certainly to my layer, what will it do is it will take on the before to lay default color that is dedicated to the different layers. So I will let it be two bi-layer. Now, line type. You can similarly, you can do it with continuous or you can say my layer or by block are related to me to the default. Now next one is line weight. We're going to either see the specific language you require or you can do the same might digging on this my layer or by block. Next one is extended beyond the ticks. So what is this? We will get to this shown. The next one is separated steam line 1 and line 2. So when I click on this, the dimension line one from each of this dimension will be disappear. Or you can say in dimension two, you can toggle between this D1 and D2 through this. So press option, we will get to this baseline option that is one. Now, we can also select the color for the extension lines, as we discussed earlier, the circle or the extension lines against tend to read. Okay. And green, green. Okay, Shan or any one that you desire. Now, blind type extension one and then named action to again switch between this first, second line types seemingly is we're showing dimension lines. So this both options and this line. Extension line 1, 2, and 9 bit option as similar as we saw here, that we can separate the dimension line 1 and 2. Alternatively, you can also do it with the extension lines 12. So this was what about the dimension line and extension line here? Now, we want to do some options here that says extend beyond dimension line. So you can see after this AdWord, there is a slight amount of line that is going beyond the or extending beyond the arrowhead. You can switch it from C file. Once I do that, the dimension line will be increased beyond the extension line. Let's say I will switch it to 0.5 and enter. This is too much so base it to 2.2. Now you can see the height of this line is increased. Now predict is that I would have been to say point 1, 8 and Enter. This will decrease the line. You can see a slight difference over here. Now, what is offset from origin? So dense or say offset from this point in every dimension layer. When I increase that, you can see you can observe a difference on this preview. Now let's set it to one. This will create the offset for this extension line from the point of electric B2C 0.5. Okay? Or say point to file. Great. Now what does fixed length extension lines? Now, you can see there is some length we describe folder extension line. There it is offset and the lentil beyond this arrowhead. So when I click on this fixed length extension line, this will create a fixed lens for this option. So let's turn it off for the second, and I will click this to say 0.25. So this is, you can see that we decrease the offset over here. Now, when I click on this fixed extension lines, this will again settle offset limit or say fixed length for this attention lines then aggrecan desist to disclose to increase the extension line here. Now I will click on this again and you can see the difference over here. Next one is symbols and arrows. Now, we studied that are called arrowheads. I can change the shape and style of this arrowhead. So for instance, I would suggest you, if you are working on a big plan, it is great to keep it as architecture. Take, assuming it look more superior and professional, really get to the leader very soon. For now you can let it me to the close good leader. Now we're going to also change the size of this arrows. So let it see, let's say 1.5. And you can see it is, is to Tico to last for the current. Now I will say 2.5. I will set it to point to file. Okay? This is way too small. Let's see. Okay, does this perfect? Now, next one is center marks. And I click on this none, this one sharper any mark when they'd be you already is to circle. So if a ticket is Mark because we'll show a plus sign, when I click on this line, this was all in different lines on the perimeter of the circle. So to mark out that this is the center point from where the radius has been measured. I will let it be to the mark and you can have similarly, you can also toggle when the size for the same. Next one is we mentioned Greg. We will get to, so the next one is arc length symbols, descending dimensions text and never will dimension text. So when you are giving the dimension to an arc, as we saw in previous lecture, where do you wish the text to be appeared? Kodak negative on this everybody motion takes this will take you to the dimension line, takes a boulder dimension line, and then a leak on and presenting dimension text. This will put it into breastfeeding of the dimension text. The next one is job angle because it's all about the job dimension type, Mr. Dieter layer, you can toggle them is predominates when we made the standard for that. You can see that the arrow was like zigzag. You can nobel the angles with that zigzag over here. And you can select the height for that each line of the zig zag we creating job dimension style for me. The next tool is takes two dimension, n dimension styles and we have different types of text appearing over here. You can set it to entertain you, or standard from this option takes 10. And when you click on this three dots, you will have a MIG takes tell option over here through which you can switch to different types of texts, ties against the different types of fonts. Like this. Let it to be the area that is like you can set a QDOT, mostly used one. And you can also see select the stan regular. This is all about what we can do with the text. This is very common, so I will skip that and came along tensile. Okay. So all current takes Dallas stick to what should be. The next one is text color. As we saw into lines. It is similar to that. You can switch to different types of colors or you can let it be to the bi-layer, which will automatically take it from the layer or returns a dedicated color for that layer. You can also play a few color forth. They're saying, when I click on this red, it will create a highlight books behind the text type. So I will take me to say background for say none. Now you can also change the text height. Make sure the arrow size and predicts station should be seeing. This will give a drawing, an authentic loop. So this is currently 1800, and that will make this both 1800. And so I will change this 201800. Okay? Now, the next one is, takes place Mac, where you wish to text to be placed. So when you click on Center, this will create the text over both mid-twenties dimension line, the central negative when it is on disordered underlain, we mentioned, it will place the text on the center. When I click on this View reduction, there's replace it from left to right or right to left as per units. Now, next is opposite from the midline. In a tense. This we're going to observe the change on to review. This creates offset from the dimension line. You can raise the text EPO, the dimension line through this option. Now, there is an option here, text alignment. And I click on this horizontal or the text will display it holds onto line only o strictly being horizontal axis, I'm going to click on this aligned with dimensional line. This will be aligned with the dimension line angle, so you can observe the change in this preview. I will lead me to the horizontal that is most regularly used. Next one is feet. What does this fit option? Suppose if I am putting a dimension where there is a tick size is too large for the Freaking the current total dimensions. Suppose there is a 1.159 here. So when I see that this distance is currently okay, or you can say enough for the text placement here. Suppose this is ADI small for this text to be placed between these two lines. So what would meet her first thing that you motivate one to ovoid or you can say first preference in between the dimensional line. So either text or arrows best-fit. So it will automatically does the best-fit do with admins like there will be arrows that we will remit showed first or between the text that will be sold first. If you click on this arrow, this will, by default take first arrows. Then what does the space is left will be occupied for the text and you click on this takes, it will show the text first two, then the space that adapt will be occupied for that was like this. You can solve it in the preview. Click it to either x-dot fit or let it be by default, and let autopilot decide the best. The next one is primary units. So as we saw, changed the units for the whole drawing. You can speech from this. So let's a decimal engineering architecture. It is quite similar to what we do with the tab. Set the precision to point, so two points listing on the units. Okay? Now listeners for Plato, you want it to be coma or 0, say space, and it shouldn't be period. We say dot. Now we have a prefix and suffix option. Suppose you want to write the prefix or suffix after each dimension, you're going to read from me when I type here m, m. This will lead an MMO laughter all this beaming chin. Once we apply this, it will be visible. Now next is apply scale factor applied to layout dimension normally. See when I click on this, this will apply a scale factor to all dimensions. Currently, we will get it. We do the default without the scale factor. Next, one is angular dimensions. Suppose for this angular dimension, you can generate winter different units do you require for the same and precision as we discussed earlier over here. What is this alternative units? So if I want to, if my client requires that he wants the units for that image into being MM, as well as in feet or semitone and periods, you can add an alternate unit to your drawing. So I will click on this display alternate units and helps you to do say engineering and set the precision to 0, 0 inch. Now, you can see that is a coma here that shows the alternate unit of holders dimension nest. Everything is same. You can say I'm before, primarily value or after by motivating. So I will set it to be for biodegradable, diffuse sent it to the below their primary value. Next one is 12 answers. Now, so this will set, the method may reach a tolerance for the dimension will be said, suppose there is a separation here between two graphs where you can say two x's. This will create told runs between debt, a point beyond which eliminate the precision should meet med. So I related me none as we do not require engender, this option is readily use. Make sure you do not make any changes to this tolerances. Nobody can. Okay. Now we have already Mencius Taiwan created here with the copy from the standard and aggrecan disclose mutant. The current, the new demand will be activated. And nobody on this dimension style one. And we'll give it a dimension to our coin. This and this being like this and this. Now you can observe it again. The dimension styles or dimension text is not quite visible. You can always do with the dimension style manager, again, specific dimension terabyte going from this option, clicking on managing dimension style. And you can click on there and modify option. Now I'm going to click on modify. Again, we will have this dimension is time and it appeared here. Now, first we will change the arrowheads. So let's say you make it 50, and let's change the text size to say file. Okay? Now every Econ, Okay. And close. So you can see the lens for this mode has been changed to file. This may look quite big. So let's again change it to say 2.5. That will be good. I will change this to do one file and guanosine symbol and arrows again to 2.5 and press Okay. Okay, Perfect. Now you'll see that we already added the alternative unit for the same. You can see the editors suffix here, that is MM always tends to this to your requirement. So this was all about dimension. Dimension style manager in creating your new specific dimension style is created just now. So your current drawing VOD mentioned as Taiwan, that is our modified dimension, type or style required for our drawing. Thank you. 42. Continuous and Baseline tool: My comeback, but obviously we studied about dimension status in this tutorial, I will teach you how you can use the baseline two and to continue to the baseline tool and continue to is available on this and not tab in two-dimension panel. So first let's CDO Continue to, you can evoke the continue tool from this drop-down menu, from this icon. But for that, we will give it a first-year linear normal dimension. From here to this point, I've drawn two similar figures here. I would just corporate this figure on this right-hand side. So to understand the difference between what the twos. Now, once you have given the tool, I can exit the dimensional by just pressing the escape key. Now, you can see that we have given a linear dimension over here. Now, as soon as I click on this continue tool from this drop-down menu, like this, one other tool will be 0, from which, from this point to this point, I didn't give you a linear continuous dimension throughout this body diagram. So I will give it here one. Second one here, 234. Now, to exit this command, you can press Enter or Escape key. Okay? So you can see that we are given a dimensions for this, all of the entities here. Now, what is the difference between continuous 2D and baseline to so when I use the continuous to, it continued to view the linear dimension throughout the body in a perfect direction. Now, I will again give you the linear dimension for this points from this to this, right, this. So as soon as I click on this baseline, do this, we'll have a new alcohol continuous linear dimension for the same. So for now, I will click on this point, say this point, this point, and this point, and this point, I would login to continue or you can say exit this, I press Enter. Okay. So you can see that through continuous to it, do the dimension flow whole lake from this point to this point only. It was limited between these two points only from last point to the next point, but in baseline to the limit is not there. It will take the reference point as a first of this linear dimension to the last point, you click on it. So this looks a little messy. I would arrange it. So now it is visible to you. So when I clicked on this linear dimension first and they walked baseline tool and click down here activated after activating the waistline, do it to the reference point from this as a first and do this for the second. Similarly, it continued the same fate on, in all these dimensions from this point to this point, from this point to this point, while in continuous to it took the individual references for the dimension. So like this, you can use this baseline to end continuous to this was all about continuous and baseline to investigate. Thank you. 43. Quick Dimension and Break tool: Welcome back. In previous tutorial, we studied about continuous and misalign too dimension of autocad. In its current tutorial, we will learn about quickly mentioned to end Breck dimension tool. So suppose, let's start with the quick dimension tool to click Dimension tool is available in this dimension Pena into an octet. This icon with a lightening. Or you can say lightning logo between the dimension is quote, quick dimension tool. You can walk this with this, or you can activate this from this icon. So how does this tool work? Suppose I have this so many circles on the screen, or you can also add more like this. I will add some more. Okay? Okay. So if I want to give the dimension tool the circles, I do not have to do it individually in order to circles. I can do it with trig dimension to all at once. So let's say that I will go to the eNodeB and activate the quick dimension to this. Now. So command line says, select the geometry two-dimension. I will select all of this geometry or so of this circle diagrams and press Enter. Now, we have a dimension here that shows the distance between all this same linear Martini to give the radius or diameter for the same. So I click on this diameter and I will click on, say here. As soon as I do this, this will say the diameter for all these circles with a diameter symbol and the measurement to the next in same direction in all of this circle at once. Now, let's try doing the radius for the same on this matter. Do the grid dimension tool. Now, I'll click on radius. And I will give a radius around here. So this will be our teacher radius and all of this diagram from this point. So this is how your dimension to it, giving radius and diameter two circles and arcs at ones like this. Coming to the next point in Greek dimension two, I have drawn some 900 equal distances. Over here. I will select all these entities and quick on, quick dimensioning tool. This will, let me give it a linear dimension on this Nevin, I click on this, this will give me the dimension of it. Nine entities individually below that already did all this. Now, let's get to the second in quick dimension two, I would activate the quick I mentioned to select all this line and press Enter. Now, I can either give this in vertical or horizontal or vertical being your dimensions, or I can give it a continuous dimension that we did earlier. Now what does this staggered dimensions? Then you click on the staggered dimensions. Dimensions see around here. This will give you dimension from this point to this point, from this point to this point, and from this point, this will be 30 mentioned individually to every entity. From the middle. Like this was Ligonier in stem. Okay? Okay. So let's take a dimension, a dimension from this line to this line, from this line to this line, and from this to this intermediate frame. So let's see the next option in quick dimension two. I will again select all this entity and activate the quick dimension to this tenth, we will select the baseline tool. When I click on this baseline, do this will give us a dimension from the base point from this line to this line like this. So this is very similar to what we studied earlier in the baseline to where it says arranged for better visibility like this. Now you can see that what did the baseline tool did here? It gave it the dimension from this point to this point, or this point to this point, from this point to this point and so on. This is what we studied in baseline to. So I will delete this and we will move on to the next Poynting written dimension to really activate the quick dimension tool, I select all this entities and press Enter. So again, the misalign too is activated by default as it was previously used. Now, next point is ordinate point. When I click on this ordinate point and say I will give ordinate point over here. This will give us the ordinates from, to see this zero-point as a reference on x axis for all this line. So this line is currently situated on x coordinate at 168.7 distance. Similarly, this will give us the ordinates for all this point of XX. Xx is ever delete this. Next is datum point. I select all this, press enter. Now, we studied radius and diameter in circular part. Now what does this datum point when I click on this datum point, and I will say this as a first and give it a second. Now, when you clicked on this as a first, this key to both the reference for this entity May's point and gave the reference points to other entity based on their distance from this point or distance from this point for this whole lines. So for example, this was our base point. From this point, the next line will be situated grantee. The next one was was at 40, and then X1 was with 60 and so on. So this is how you can use the Greek dimension tool to give the measurement to the various entities at once. This will save you a lot of time for you. Now, what is Lake dimension point to? Delete all this Endrew few line to explain you. Now, I've drawn the speaker here. Now it will do the anode tab give it dimension from this point to this point. This and from this point to this point, angular dimension or display. Now, when you are working on a project, when the two-dimension intersect each other, you can see you might have absorbed the debt is acquired Cape between this lines that intersect each other. This is not provisionally accepted when two lines or tried to each other on the dimension. So we're white that we have a tool in auto red tennis court, big dimension to break too. You can activate this from this icon available on this dimension panel tab. You can see it is, it is says that break to every coin. When I click on this break tool, the command line ask us to for multiple or add or remove break. Currently we have only one here. So I will just select this dimension and press Enter or Spacebar to break is not visibly until a Zoom mean. So so you might remember that in dimensional status, I mentioned that we will go to the breakpoint or same distance in coming lectures. So now to increase this break, I will go to the dimension style manager. By this, I will click on modify. Now we have this style manager appeared on screen in the symbols and arrows. When you go to the dimension break here, you can adjust the distance that they showed all of this. Over here. I will click on the Br2 and I will press Okay. And it glows it. Now. You can see but you can also that the brake distance increased from two points from this to this total Incoterms behavior for distance or four units of break between these two dimensions. So this is how you can add dimension breaks to the various dimensions. This was what about Vicki mentioned too, and break dimension too. Thank you. 44. Dimension update and Adjust tool: Welcome back. In previous lecture we learned about weak dimension and make two. Now in this lecture, we will go through it to space tool and update two. So I have drawn before diagram on the screen, you can see that and given that dimension to it. So the EDTA space to Israel in dimension benefit in eNodeB audio that ruler, you can see these actors space do. You can also do it the interspace to buy the Command key that is named as well. You can say namespace, which is total time deem as and it really actuator speeds tool and press Enter. So let's try actuating from this week on this Hagen. And don't even space toilets activated dopamine lenses sneaked obese dimension. So I wonder where does all this everybody mentioned with the base dimension from this or you continue distance from this dimensions. So Yukon this, once I click on this, so Command Menzies did silica dimensions to space. Now I want to space all of these dimensions. So glucagon does, is this and is now the command nc, then opposite corner, the one phone and 40 daughters over here, another four dimensions, 1234. Do we spaced from the reference of this dimension? Now press Enter. Or you can also press the spacebar. Now, we have options. Either we can enter a value or you can call it the auto. The auto in it just to the dimension on its own. But we will enter a value offset 20 minutes and press Enter. Now, each dimension is based, exit leave from 20 units, every voice in every dimension. From this dimension to this dimension. The vertical height is 20, and from this to this vertical age is 20. So this is a two space, two books. This looks much clear and need to know. So let's move on to the next tool that is update to. So currently in drawing VO2 type of dimensions activity and as I will open the minimum dimension style manager and create a new style. And I will name it is new. What? Okay, So the new one is currently being intuited. Now, I will select some status change, some closed as Teams takes time to say three. And they skipped line o, say the moves, arrows and energy Buddha. What we seek is Saudi, fixed blend, Studio extension Rhino and make it fall. We call key and click Close. Now, currently the new one is, do suppose I want this old dimensions to be mood? Or do we used in the new one style in his drawing to use blue that we just told to click. Well, first we have Greg direct the current dimension we owe to say that the dimension do we, that we want to use in the current drawing. So currently we activated the new one. Now I will click on this oblique two, and I will select the objects. So Command lens it in silico optics, I will click on this, this, and this, this, and this. I selected all the dimensions and press Enter. Now, you can see that this dimension of nutrients from the standard one style by using the update to do switch back, I going to be lukewarm, do the study to manage it and say standard as I do every economic update to elicit activity team and press Enter. Now, this will automatically transform them back to the standard toolbar current activated state. So this is all about update to the update. Good. You can change the dimension to the currently at two dimensions, dad. Thank you. 45. Dimension Jog and Breakline tool: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about BreakLine to n dimension job to decline to is used to define rockier or you can sit there is a courtier that is not visible, intertwine, or it is not to scale. So you might have absorbed in the technical drawings that there are some lines that go like this that is as executor and there is a thinner line here to create getting out of it, we use Brick Lane 2, so I will type the brake line crew commanded his break nine and press Enter or Spacebar. Once you it will activate the decline to come on. It will ask us to specify the first for the break line. We can also change the size and extension from your butt. That is not important. I will click on this point. That will be my plus point. Now, I want my BreakLine to go over this applicant, this, and it will be my second. Now, we have to choose a midpoint, but any point where we want the logo symbol for the break to be. So I will click on this middle point in Greek OOP. So this is, this created a break line over here from my points. So when I have been acclaimed tool like this, I will try it here. But this time you can see that there is an extinction. You can change the size of this extension from this command against extinction, from this command line. And you can also enter the size from this changed sides to three and a change extinction to two. Now, again, this is a post point. You this as a second. And I knew this has a midpoint. So this is how re-coloring tool works in. Okay, Now, let's understand. You mentioned John Berlin job. So suppose if I give you dimension to which block this is 15, and this is 15 as well. But so if you see impractical, the total blend for this whole block should be 30, but we created a block here. So then I measure this total block. This one you may a 38 year. So to demonstrate that this is not to scale dimension that we gave here, I can just double-click on this dimension and type here 30. So this is going to be 30. But then someone open this train in auto and measured the length of this one show up as a 30. This will be 33. Demonstrate that this is not to scale dimension. You can use the dimension job that is available here from this dimension penalty Antarctic. Again, you can do that with lean shop. That is the shortcut key, limb Job. In Job line over here. That is the shortcut key for the image January. Now, so command line says that selected dimension to it, the job. So I will select this dimension toward the job. Now, specify the job location. So I will say this one here. This will give us the jaw or here. And you can also have this change took place through like this. But there is a, you can say there is a text Year 1, we're going to put it in the middle. So this was about BIM. You mentioned jokes and break length in Oregon, I think. 46. De/Associate and Centerline tool: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will see two new tools that is centerline stools and associate AND associate Jews in AutoCad. So ASU demonstrate that I will draw a rectangle here. Now we have a rectangle on screen. So winning you would imagine too distracting, go to any length or anywhere texts from this point to this point. Okay? Now, you can see that there is a dimension that defines the length of this line, or the dimension is now associated with length of this line. So for instance, when it tends to length of this line through this vertex. And equity Cauchy. But he mentioned will automatically tend itself, is attached or associated with this land studio associate a dimension. What I can do is I can use the command line tool, that is, but you can say command-line shortcut for the D associated to it is near. So the associated, as you type DIS AUC and associate tool over here, you can click and activated. As it is activated, the command line says select objects. So i o to select the dimension that I want to be associated. Click on this dimension. Now we press Enter. Now this dimension is D associated with the length of this line. So protested, I will just decrease the sea. Now Vd associated this dimension from this length of this line. So if you want to end, do you foresee it? This dimension and the length of this line you can do with the dimension then are available here. That is, the associate to it is available in dimension penalty in an octet. I can click on this. Once I do that, the command line says select objects or D associated optics. So I would click on this dimension and I will press Enter. Again. The command nc is specified for secretion line origin. So the audition for this dimension should be this 0.2 as command line specifies. Second should be all here, as you can see now with respect to t associated with this line. So when I have intends to overtakes the vectors, this will be associated with the length to it. So I will delete this and we will move on to the next portion that is central lines. That is another panel available. Next two-dimensions, that is centerline. So what is centerline? Centerline is nothing but you can rotate your centerline marks in circles and radius between two lines. This tool or this tool set dedicated GPU sex variable from the 2017 autopilot update. So make sure you are using AutoCad and that throws her career. And I will draw two lines here. I will just copy this. Let's activate the center mark tool. Once I click on the center mark, this will activate the center mark to the command line says select circle or toward the center mark, heavy, select this circle. Okay, so you can see that there is a center mark available on the circle. Now, I will click on the center line tool, and I will click on this line is a line and this line has a secant line. So we have a center line between these two lines is created with the center line tools. Now, you might have noticed that this line does not have a proper scale. To do that, you can do is select this and press Control 1. That is the shortcut key for Greek properties. Or you can also open the properties may rightly in on this, I'm going to click properties. So to do that, I will press Control plus 1. This will open up quick properties for that. You can alter the line types. For this, you can also work as a close size from here. So I can see Cross says to say one that will be tangent to the one. He can also change the line scale, that should we say five, press Enter. Now you can see the line is properly visible. Similarly, we can do with this ln two, best control one. And you can also change the various aspect for the lines to. So when I select this line, it will ask me for the line type scale and press F5 and Enter. I can also increase it to say 10 and enter like this. You can use those into line tools in your code. Okay. Thank you. 47. Single Line and Multi line text tool: Welcome back to this tutorial. In this tutorial, we will learn about X types and takes lines in order where we have dedicated takes to all available here in text panel, in an octet. You can always have a quick shortcut for the takes to available ER in Home tab in annotation panel. And then click on this drop-down menu. I have two options, multi-line text and single line text will go through this, both in this equatorial. So let's move to the type. Now. You can see currently the material Text Line tool is active. So when I click on this a or you can say text option, it will go up the Majestic Lane 2. So I will see, I click on this and I was like the single line tool. Now, currently the single line tool is activated. Now the command line says that specify the start point for the text. So I will see I want to start my text from all of this point. Now, come on and say is to specify the height for the text. You can specify the height with this cursor to, but in this case, I was a center height of say, 10 units. Press Enter. Now, the commodities asks us to specify the angle for the. You can also do this with similar limit the cursor, but I would let it be 0 and liberty and press Enter. Now, you can type anything you wish in AutoCad. So I was a step. Okay. So like this, you can use the single link text to, to move to the next line. You can press enter and start typing the second line. Like this. Similarly, you can see that we do not have any option here for the text tools. So this is all we get in the single line text tool. Let's understand the difference between single line text tool and multi-line text tool. As a speech from this drop-down button to the multi-line text to when I, when I select this multi-line text, I will be asking again to specify the first for the corner point, or you can say in the M text. So in this, you can create a box or a window in which you will be writing your text. So I will clear it from this point. Knows electricity the second. Now this creature walks for me that I can write. And it's just the width and height of this box. So when I will change, you can change the height of the text from here contains the standard and default text from your standard out and R22. I let it be a 100. So let's type something here. Okay, like this. So I wrote this line over here. And you can see that we get so many options on year. I guess we get into Word file or even word peds. So I can make it bold, italic, central line, or you can say it but through this, again tends the font type from this. I can also select a different type of, you can say I can also switch this to different layers. Again, tends the color for the same like this. I can also enter columns for this. You could also option that you generally getting word. I can also add logos or you can say symbol set. Then suppose I wanted to enter data, I can add data over here. Now, this is all about single length and multiline innovate. In multiline, do you get resorption so it is easier to edit them later. So I suggest you, you should use modeling tool rather than single-link takes two. Thank you. 48. Managing Text Styles: Welcome back. In previous tutorial, we learned about multi-line text and single line text too. So in this video, we will learn about textiles, an annotative and standard text difference. So you can open the text style manager from this text panel and our temp from this drop-down arrow, you can see that it's a small right corner at 0 overview and then click on this. This will open a text style manager. Now you can see VO2 type of styles currently active in our drawing. You can, as we learned in the dimension statement, I don't. You can also create your own custom styles from this new option on the standard. And I'll create a new. As I click on New, it will ask me to name might style, style. Or you can say, I will enter this random name, my style, and click on. Okay. Now we have a myostatin name. Now you can see there is a font name here. You can adjust the font as you desire from this point. Now, that is a sum. You can see there is a head. Before this point. You can see that is similar font over anyone but before then name. So what is this activate their third, it is nothing but does. It defines a certain angle organised hurting angular detection for them. So reef I read this, it will be entered into 90 degree detection. So it is better to switch to the normal text. That is, you say, I will select this area of black, mare Barrick. Okay. Now you can change the font style to regular bold, italic verse. You wish. Currently we are editing the mice tell you can say current textile is my. Instead. I can clear this innovative or I can create this normal is I wish I was excited to say file with vector between this two should be one. That's normal. And I can also write this upside down or backwards. But the couple ID. Now we'll close this and then do the tics can see like this into something or write something to swoop, be written in the recently style that we created. So it's a step something random. Okay, once done, Escape key to this and this will ask me, do you want to say what's it takes tinges, Mbps is going as a loop is turn, our textile will be activated or you can say return over here. Now let's learn about anatta to text. So what is annotating texts? He didn't know about the notation in order to introduce lectures. So I will select this takes, okay, and stains to start off this to the Annotate you once a week on this in order to do this one show you any change is currently on the screen, but it has now on an altar to it. So when I click on this NOT to scale and change it to one ratio one, we can see that started off this, you can say sizeof this annotation increased. So when we change the scale of the complete drawing, so we're not at you options, you can also combine or even seller, so change the size of the text that is aligning with your drawing. So through this annotation options with intense it back and may increase or decrease, or even against any alteration scale you wish for your texts. So this was what about anatta to texts and different textiles. Thank you. 49. Leaders and Multileaders: Welcome back. In previous lecture, we learned about managing textiles. In this tutorial, we will move on to the leaders in auto-grader. So in similar to the text says we have single-line and multiline. This autopilot. We also have multi leaders in normal leaders. The normal Leader tool is not available here, but you can always activity with the command line. So let's start with the reader to. So I will type the shortcut key for the leader, that is leader itself. I would type liter and press Enter. As soon as I press Enter, 32 tool is activated. Now you can see that the command line says that specify the leaders start point. So suppose I want to give you the leader to this link down here. So I will click on this. Now this will draw a line with an arrow to define the leader to it. Now, come on and say is that specify the next point. So I will view this as an exponent here. Now, we can manually more points is V. These are, suppose I can add one more point here, one more and one more. Once you are done with defining the lending spore, the text tool, you can just type Enter. Now, the leader asks us to, or you can read on the command line, that is enter the first line of annotation text. You can iterate the multi-line text here, or single line text here. But this always been the secret text format as we studied earlier in this Mytileneans single length. So I will type here is lintel level and we press Enter. Now, if you do not wish to add the second line, then press Enter. So I will press Enter. Now we have an AMU and that is blended level. So this was what about the leader? Now, suppose when I click on this leader text, I do not have any options here to add text later. And similar, if I click on this reader itself, I do not have more options to E2. You can say I do take, but you can always do that with the quick cohort is, so open the properties. It's Control plus 1. That is the shortcut key we stood many times. I will click on this leader. This will display the properties for this leader. Now, I can either change the arrow size five. I can play around with this arrow styles and different types of status here in the Eigen tenth the dimension style for this leader, and so on. And I can also edit the text through this, but I cannot have other options to edit the text as we had in multiline text. Now, what is multi leader? So I will click on this multimedia tool here. This will activate the mighty D22. The shortcut key for the multivariate tool is M leader itself. So M leader and press Enter. You can see the command line says that specify leader arrowhead location, or leader lending first to contain fruits and options. So I will just specify the first. So here, now specify this second. So say this will be my second. Now, we observe that in this, we were able to create multiple points and segments in this leader. But MIT to the segments or you can say lending sake by default to two, you can also edit debt. We will see that in later lectures. So I'll just click here. This will be my second. Now, we exited the leader segment 2. Now though we have to enter the text data. So I will say sea level recenter. The interest. You're going to press enter and exit. In order to exit the command, you just have to click anywhere outside the this M textbooks. Or you can also click on this close text editor option and close the Perkins exit command so we can't disclose text editor tool. And this will exit the multi-meter command. But you can see it is not quite visible to our eyes. Without zooming in. We can see the arrowhead and everything. So we will go to the properties and this I will go to the properties we promote is with Control 1. Now let's change the liter arrowhead size. So I would weekends create a file. This will change the Leader type and I will predict the height of the text that will be saved file. Similarly, now it is feasible. We'll also have a lending options here. We'll see this in coming lectures. So you can see there is an ending option here. This distance is called lending for the text from this leader. So you can edit that too, but we will seen as needed properties further. So we have some more options in multi-meter. So let's see them. I would eat it. This fourth moment. I will activity to do. As soon as I click this, this asks me for the second points, but implicant this options here before you click on the first or you activate the post-print. If you click on this options that is available in command line. So it is, this will show me various options for the reader. Now it is, Wait a second. Albicans is turn off the dynamic input of energy to Italy, dir command, equity go to the Options. Now you can see we have different options here. So let's see the first one that is leading to type. So this was the Leader type that was straight line. What we drew here earlier was also straight line. So let's try Spline this time. So click on this blank. Now, say leader lending. I explained you what is called Retail lending. So I click on this leader lending and it's asking, It is asking if you wish to have a little ending or not. So this time as we can know, then we have a content type. So in content type, when I click on this content type, it will ask us to either we can place I am text or a block. I O created a dipole bloke here we will learn about blocks in coming lectures. But for now, I have created this particular block with the name block one. So click on this block and this will ask me to name the block that out. It is currently activated in this growing. So we'll type the bloke named that first block 1, press Enter. Now see thetas activated that currently loc1 will be the point where the mtext except of mtext. Now, the next one is mixed points. So you can see we had a two max points, 1, 2, and the multimedia tool was exited. After that, we have to enter the M text too. So I will let it be three is ten. And next, next one is post tinkered and second angle that was from this point, this angle and second angle for the lending, but we do not require that in our current data. So let's say I will click on exit options. So let's try to delete it in this one. So we can say here, and I will create this client and said will be my third. Now you can see that as we entered the block number one as a reference for the except instead of the M text. So we have a block number one, or you can say block except of the mtext here. So like this, you can also enter the options that are available in multimedia tools. So this is all about multi leader and leader in autocad. In coming lecture, I will teach you more about the multi leader 2s and various options within it. Thank you. 50. Multi Leader Style Manager: Welcome back. In previous tutorial will end about liters and milliliters. In this tutorial, we will learn about the maddeningly to status. So I will just create a circle here and a leader multi-meter symbol. It looks fine now. Now you can, so you can edit to worry scam modifier leader's style and create a new style from the leader manager to teddies over here. And you click on this mode arrow on this leader penalties in eNodeB here all year. I hope this is visible to you and I click on this. This really welcome motility style manage this multifidus time in nature, we have two options. Data currently two studies are active, annotative and standard. We already studied a lot of things about NOT Q and a 100 twos, or you can say standard text and liters. I will create the contents, modify current retirees standard. You can have this motif option to being on the modifier panel. Now, I can change the format to straight spline, typically already sowing the options in command line. And I can also change the size of this error. So I will set it to say three. We also have this break size. This defines the egg between this lending and texts. Now next one is liters structure. So maximum data points are too, we've already studied third word is 23 segments for the angles. And we have a lending. So you can set this lending distance 2 from this tool. Now, next one is content. So in content section, you can either select this mtext or block or non V also salted. Now, you can just edit this. This is our simple. You can have an annotative or standard text type. You can have angles. So even align it to horizontal or always write feeding. You can change the color of trues. Contained a contains the height of the text. I will set to 50. Okay? Now we will always left justify, or you can always add a frame around this length is currently if you do not need any of that. So I will just click on this copay. Now, you might have noticed that it wasn't visible earlier. As soon as I click on this, modified tinges will be visible in the drawing. So I will click on this close button. Now you can see 10. This has been modified to this. To create your custom leader style, you just have to click on this arrow and bring on the multi-step multifidus Tag Manager. Just totally new button. And you can Nemo neither see. I will type leaders tell one, click Continue. We will also tend to be really innovative and standard from here, we can continue to keep this a standard. Now. You can also change the oldest options, as we saw earlier, this is very simple, so ugly Cauchy and we close. Now the currently does tell is leaders is terrible on, you can always change between them through this banner. So this was all about creating and modifying it. Leaders tab in auto ahead. Thank you. 51. Align, Collect, Add and Remove Leaders: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about the various options already been motivating to. The first one we're going to learn about is aligned, aligning the leaders. Next one is collecting the leaders. Next one is eight liter, and next one is remote leader. So let's start by the option that is aligned leader. For the instance, I will create some more tinnitus on the screen. This will be my first one. We add one more name it is to create 31, um, it is three. Okay, so we have this three liters on screen. Now if I want to align this whole induce single or z, like straight x's, I can do that with the option that is aligned leader. So we call this a line option here. Now, Command Line sees that specify the mighty details that I want to align. So clear on this multifidus and press Enter. Now, select the mighty leader to align to 0. So this means that I have two selected material from which I want to align all this into straight line. So we call this first one. Now you can see that I can align them all in a straight line like this. So if I turn on the ortho, this wouldn't let me lock them into the single line like this. And I agree, Correct. Okay. So this old leaders are aligned in a straight line. This is what about aligning them leader in straight line? Okay, So everyday world studying the next step is collected. Now, I hope to teach the correct tool here. It works with the blocks only. So I have to change the ending point from M texts to blob in motivator created a Monday for bloke here. First put understanding. So I will go to the multi-meter. I'll go to the options from command line. And I will go to the content type. Now it seems to blog. And I will name it as a block to the name of that box now created as Blob rest sender. Now, term blockName is the aisle exit options and I will create leaders here. See worst, oblique turn off the ortho in greater leader. Or I can also do one thing and that is, I will copy this leader around here. So say post your boasts a hint. And then I'll copy it. Now we have all these three liters turtles block as ending point or say lending. So we will try with the click tool. When I click on this click to the command line says select the motivators that I need to collect. So it'll be calling this old his multifidus and press Enter. When I do that, this will show me another leader that is originated from the main first leader on this three datas. So decor here and angular. What is new is this will combine all the three liters into one and attach all the three blocks in a single row. This is now the Collect tool works in leaders. And we did it all this blocks and leaders. Now let's learn about the add and remove leader. So I will create a leader here. See this, and I will name it as mean or say one. Okay? Now, if I wish to add moldy discolored this existing data, I can do with this data eg leader to overhear invaded panel and click on this aid leader. Now command line says select the multi leader, and it will select this multimeter. And under leader will originate from the text in this leader, I can click here, here, and here, and click as many as I wish. And I can press Escape to exit the tool. Once done, you can remove this vital demo data tool that is available when needed painter below the Add Leader tool. And I click on this remotely due to this will again ask me to select a multi-meter I need to wish to remove. So I really like this multimeter specify details to remove. You can see that it shows me here that specified leaders that I need to remove every con, this multi leader. And this says isis want this one to be here. So I will press Enter. This will be more than multimeters that I selected on this edge single milliliter entity. This is how you can use all these four tools within data format and desire fully modifying the leaders in AutoCad. Thank you. 52. Tables in AutoCAD: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about creation in the table tool is available in another tab over here with the table options, you can also activites table From Home tab in Annotation panel. We have at this table icon over here. You can enable the table to through that too. Also, you can type the table and shortcut key and evocative. They will do like this. So let's start by creating a table. When they click on this table option, it will open this drop-down button. Now I will click on this table option. And this will open a insert table dialogue box through this ache and interpret the data what I contains the number of columns and rows within the table. So first let's see what does it say? The first option is here, tables. So I contains the table style into standard. I can also create a custom tailor creating, clicking on this table button. It is very similar to what we saw in liters, textiles or layers. You can create your customized table style organism modify the existing tables from this. This is very simple and it is totally similar to this options over a little bit here. Now, the next option is insert options still start from empty table or from a data link. You can also enter a data link if you have any two x's, then next option is from objected tie in drawing. So if you have any existing data of table and drawing, we can also do that from this option. Now, this preview option will show us the changes we make over here. So when I click on this preview option, this will display the date table and how it will be looking in a growing. So next option is insertion behavior. This is why we need to specify the insertion point here. So when a activity table, this will ask me to the point from red. I want to move the table in the drawing. The next operand is specified window. To specify window option, I have to draw a window like we did in M text. So that will define the high tender levy talk each column or each at all for the table into that, the scale for the whole table will be decided. Next option is column row settings. So I can increase the columns and rows through this option, I contains the column width from year and he came tends to 0 height enroll a Tardos from here. So these are the columns. This vertical lines are vertical rows or columns are columns. So these are vertical columns, this horizontal arrows. We already know that. Now, next option is still vector, satisfies so forth. Stroke style will be titled. Second row says style will be for the header, and third row will be for the data. So I can type the main data for the table here. Then a new title for HNO3 columns here. And the next options are for the data entry. So as soon as I click on this okay button, this will activate the table into drawing. So this is why, this is where i o do define our insertion point. You're going to read the command line says bits specify the insertion point for the table. So click here. And this would include the table into drawing. Now, I have to click anywhere outside and this will exit the table to enter the data in each column or each say that I just told to double-click inside that. So I can write here, I can double-click on this cell and this one, let me write inside that cell. Well this will you get the basic options that we had in M text. And we also have them in word or word bread to edit the textiles and input different types of logos or symbols. So I can either click outside and exit or I can click over here to close text editor to exit. This is how you can create a table in AutoCad. Thank you. 53. UCS Icon, View Cube and Navigation bar display: Welcome back. In this section, we'll learn about reuse and viewports in AutoCad. So in this video, we will see the basic viewports in Rio. Many options here on the left dollar data from weekend switch between different views in AutoCad. But you can see that is a real curiosity or that the UCS icon on this site. And we can also have this navigation bar. So you can enable and disable these three tools from this view debt. We held this view port blues pennant already been done off this UCS icon. This will, okay, when I turn off this, you see, So you can, this will turn off the UCS icon in the drawing board. Now, I can again switch back to on like this. And I can also change it to the command that is UCS icon is command-line sees I can turn it off and off from this two buttons of and this will be turned off. I can be inactivated through the same command line like this. And I get done, you're done back. Now. I can also turn off and turn on the navigation bar in this view cube from these options like this. And on switching dissolve, this. Make the navigation button received well in the brain port. So these are the basic of view ports in order, Greg. Thank you. 54. Creating Custom Viewports: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we learn about creating a custom view in order there. So what have, we have different options in this viewport to be held. We have predefined views in order red, I can switch to top, bottom, left, right, and so on. We also have a few minutes that option you, and we can also switch from better than and perspective you look at. So i o destroying year and currently I'm in top view of this drawing. Now. We also have this named views option here in this panel. I can also switch between the views from this. Currently we are in top view. I can go to the board from left view, and I can also go back to the top view from this option. This is how you can switch between different views in AutoCad. So suppose, for example, if I need to construct, really work on this part, or I need to open this part of this drawing. Consequently, again, create a specific view that only displaced this part of this project. So to do that, I will just zoom in on this area. Now we have option in named views. This banner that contains to10 New View View tab. So as soon as they click on this new dialog box will open. That will help us create a custom view in auto-grade. So I will name this view as a C student. And now I can double the VUCA dignity for this. This is going to be set to the next option is view type. I can clear it does in emetic still walk. So boundary options we have gotten to display and defined window. In current display, the boundary of this entities will be set to the currently active part of this drawing will be displayed on the view. Then I click on this defined window is going to be, let me click select those specific window for the part of this project would be displayed in the view soil, just Greek on this and select this bar. As soon as I'm done. I just told the press Enter. You can read on the command name that specify the first corner or press Enter to accept I represented an accepted. Now I've always said, and as soon as they click on this, okay, our new view will be created and press Okay, and then we'll get it out. New specific view so I can zoom out. And when I click on the stop and you can see the modal views, we have this option now enabled. Then I can switch to restaurant and barbecue back. There's one at a desk. Learned about this. We would take us to the specific view that we created to what can this restaurant and bar area. You can also switch to that view from this name news banner. I can click on this unsaved View Options and I go to the restaurant bar and select it. So this will activate the current view. Now, suppose if I am in this part of this drawing and I need to switch back to that. So S1 is equal, equal upon this. And a story about this will take me to the selected window that we specified for the data stored in Denmark view says how you can create a custom use in AutoCad. And you can also switch them to this box. And you can also, as we step through this options, that is another method to switch back to that view. To do that, you just have to click on this View Manager option and it will open up new manager in AutoCad. Now, you can see that that I'd options over here we have this mortal use option here. We just have to expand this big leaf on this plus icon. And you can just click on this restaurant and bar. As soon as you do that, this will give you those selected area of that view. Now, you only have to do is click on this set current option and manually copy. This will take you back to that view in AutoCad. So this is how you can create a custom view of it. And W2 that real flow, different methods. Thank you. 55. Model Space and Layout Spcae: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn the concept of model space and paper space in AutoCad. I heal some diagrams drawn here. The currently active view that you see, this rectangle screen, it is called viewport or model space. So we held this two options here, layout, one in Layout, go in order ahead. So you can toggle this button through View tab. And we'll this layout tabs in, in interface been an option. And then click on this layout tabs, this group. Turn off the layout tabs. And when I click on this layer of depth again, this will toggle on the layout tabs. Now, the currently active port, this is called the viewport, which out of reach VR in model space. This is called model space where you can edit and draw new things in your views. So let's say I go to the Layout 1. This is fair. We have this basic structure. This is actually called Pepper space, but it is also called layout. In AutoCad, you can have many views and layouts as per your needs. You're going to get new layout, like layout three. And you can also add potato predefined title blocks, borders to this views were floating and printing purposes. Now, Let's say that this is layout number two. And this layout number one, I cannot get a specific table, title, block and border, which we'll be discussing upcoming lectures in this layout options, I can partition different type of title blocks, then previous one in this layout to similarly, I can have modified layouts as per my needs of this main model. Makes sure that your northern, that now that you can only edit and modify the mortars or model you are trying in model space only. You cannot edit them in layout one or two or three. Or in a nice paper space, you can only make these, you're going to only add just the abuse of this mechanism of integral of u of that and going forward here. But I can not editor select any part of that drawing in this modal space. You can only add just the available you for this layout. So these are the concepts that we need to learn about model space and paper space. Then they make some changes or you are draw a new object in this drawing, this would also displayed in the mall there two layouts for the drawing like this. You can see that they're currently, this view is not able to color the whole circle. So I can just then, through this rectangle, we will learn more about these layouts in upcoming lectures. For now, this is the basic concept unique to learn about modal space and layouts. So there is also one more. The modal space is also called time-space, meant diets based is it is all divided into graphs and my layout phase is also floating space means that you're going to just murdered or view or a label of this Motors. So this is called floating space and aerospace also. Thank you. 56. Viewport Configuration: Welcome back. In previously, tutorials will learn about basic layouts in model space in AutoCad. In this tutorial, we will discuss some basic configuration of viewports in detail in AutoCad. So currently you can see this I0, this currently view protect tooth that has truly fire via IFrame is a style and top view is currently active. Suppose, if I am working on this circle, right? I've drawn the circle over here. Now, I need to see the circle or view the circle from different angles. We're working on it. So to do that, I have to distribute this view ports in different angles or different parts that one viewport will display this part of circle. Another viewport will display the same circle from different angle. So how can I do that? You do that. We held to go to the View tab and we have this viewport transformation option, model view ports. You can read that. Now, when I click on this drop-down icon in view port configuration, this will display me some available styles for the view ports that I can customize it. Now. I will just do iraq the see two vertical viewports. This will distribute the current viewport into two vertical viewports. Now, currently, you can see that it's a blue border on blue boundary displayed over this viewport. Then I click on this. The blue boundary will be displayed over this viewport. Now, this means that whenever I click on this view port, whatever I will do will be you walked on, will be activated in this viewport means this viewport is currently active. And when I click on this, this view port is currently activated. So I can move around in this view port as fair and more rounder. You knew this report as well. But you might question that. What is the difference between this new ports? Now, Let's say I turned on the radius, turned on this viewport and you need to go. So turned off in this viewport, I can turn it on. I can make 1000 students in this viewport and this one to be effected in this viewport. Likewise, I can switch between different views in this report. And I can likewise same similarly I contents into different views in this loop order to better understand that I created before it, 3D model year. You'll see currently I have this 3D model in this view port that is activated and deployed. I can just hop around or you can say moron and this report, by pressing Shift key and holding the middle mouse button like this, I can automate around in this report. Now, if I wouldn't need to move this rectangular box to access center of this circle. I cannot do that easily like this. So to do that would have to do is i 02 minutes this from the view port in the top angle. But I also need to keep moving this in 3D to show or to understand the changes that are affected in this. So let's say I will create for infuriated you ports here. So let's say for equal viewports, as soon as I click on this, we have four viewport available for this one. You can see that that is a currently greed activated in this one means that this view port was activated previously from meat. We created this another three viewports. And I select this view port and go to the bottom, you say, sorry, top view. Those in if this viewport and take the strength view for this. And I will select this. And you can also, you can say you can also Google the views from this drop-down. And it gives a left view. Okay, and this will display the 3D view for those. Now I will take this time to say goodbye diaphragm, like this. So when I select this box in this truly a top view, this will always select the box in an interview. I can go to the Home tab and move this box. Whisker my needs. And this will also activated in this. But you can see that when I move this box, it move that box to the bottom of this, like this. So indeed, 2D view we cannot have worked in say, you can say that in 2D view you cannot change the objects in 3D view, which means it will automatically push them to the baseline or bottom of the x's. So like this, I'll press Control Z to undo that. Like this. Okay, so like this, you can have a different view horsing would okay? You can also change them to different news. From here. I will try 32 left views. I can Lu any four right views means one main view and another three subviews for this. Like this. So this is how you can create different viewports. You can customize different viewports. And since the styles and configuration of this viewports. Thank you. 57. Named Viewports and Join Viewports: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about customizing a naming viewports in AutoCad. And we would also learn some basic tool to we can, how we can combine the or joined the viewport. So for instance, I held this diagram or 3D models drawn into this port. But you currently cannot do CDO 2D model for this because it is set to top view and it is in 2D wireframe. If I model the isometric view or CE side view, you can see that there's a 3D model and make intense the style from this conceptual diagram, I will send you back to wireframe view. Now, you can name of specific youth what according to your specific needs. So when a seed, this is a view port configuration, okay, and now I will be more to the 40 quality reports like this. But when I moved to 40 quadruplets, what did he do is he created the copy of God and active viewport. So in all this view port, the stylize concerned to wireframe and a view is set to the top view. I will undo that. Now. I want to name a specific viewport that each time I wonder you put an interpretation and switch good on a specific view. What should it be starting with? So I will do is every word of this named option in Newport. The named option is available in modern view ports panel, Bu dat. Everybody on this named option. Now this will open our dialog box naming new box. You can see named view ports currently we do not have any, so it will say doom auto configuration. Now we will do the annual reports. Now, I will select the viewport that I need to modify C4d equilibrium ports. Currently, we held this 40 quality reports, means our screen will be divided into quarterly reports. Now, next options are naming it. So I will see my custom view. Okay, I named it does make us to mu. Now we have option here apply to, so we have option to apply to current view port and display. Currently, there is no specific viewport active means we only have by default display that we are getting automated. So let it be it to the display. Next option is setup. So if I wanted to set up this into duly or 3D, so select the TD as we have a 3D model activity drawing. Now, next is an enumeration or configuration or modifying the news. So suppose I want to this top left, you could be said too, martin Buber, okay, I will select this. I can also edit the visual style for this service, select conceptual folders, and then select this front view to be isometric. Ok? Say so I click and I was elected as a holistic. Now, what does it have? This one as a mortem? We already have bought them, So I would say front view and then set this to be shaded. Okay? And this one, and this electors will be sketches of gray. And we'll do the same back. Okay? Now we have already and directors or the same modifier, does you, what value we will do is I would select, Okay? There's one as I click. Okay. As you can see that what we have modified the data for two views are you pores. It is activated in that form. Now, suppose, if I move back to the single view, okay, that will activate the currently activated view. Now, if I want to switch back to that view, what can I do is I can go to the name named. And when we go to the named or the end of view port data book will open. Now you can see that in memory of what's w, we have a custom view that we created earlier. Modality would have to do is I just double-click on this and press Okay. As soon as I press Okay, if you login NEC director old view or world modified viewport configurations that we created. This is how you can modify your viewports. Now, let's see how to combine W boards. You can only combine the edges and viewports means you cannot combine this view to this view that is not add descent. We can only combine this to this, this to this artist, to this. Now let's see how to combine them. We have an option here that is called join. To join option. Joined viewport option is available in model view ports in new tab malodor named option. And click on this joint view ports option. And the command line sees that selected dominant view port. So I want to combine this view, the disk. So I will select this as the dominant view port. Now i o to select the viewport that I need to combine it into this next viewport. As soon as I clicked on that, the whole view was combined with debt view means this will be the mean mu and that will be in this border. So now we have three rather than four. So there's a combined is two. Now let's say I wanted to combine this view that this edge isn't real. What can I do is I was electors Join option of being selected dominant to be this view and select the viewport. But you can see nor W2 that way. As a told you that you can only combine the edges and views means first I have to combine these two views, and then I can combine this to you. The only equal height or equal war boundary view ports can be combined within each other. So let's see. I will go to the join of in as electives as a dominant view. And as you take this as a combined view. So this is how it can be combined. Now, I can combine this both with each other easily. So let's trade it. I will select this join again, select the dominant and cylinder combining real. Now, I will combine all the new ports in single-wall to this. How you can combine the viewports in AutoCad and make sure that you take down that only entrusting rule can be combined into each other. Thank you. 58. Layout View Manager: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will discuss about managing report in layout debt. So I have drawn a random plan here in this green. As you can see tag. Now, I will go to the Layout go option. And we held this layout model year, which sort of so-called floating space, as we discussed in earlier lectures. Now you can see that we have two different layouts. Layout one and day out doing as we discussed earlier, we can create as many as peevish over here. Now, this, this whole plan is currently soon created in this very pretty that comes by default. It, they can just pick like this. Now, if I want to edit this view currently their designs inside this periphery, I can do it by double-clicking inside this port. So we can say this. Now, I can zoom in and zoom out for the view that I need to establish for this layout. So I'll select this seeking area and I will click outside this box over here. I'll press the escape key. And once you do that, once you double-click outside this box, now if I zoom in and zoom out, this whole layout will be zoomed in and zoom out means that currently this viewport is now activated or Saturday to that very fully that I previously defined. Now, I can also have more modification options with this layout. So I will delete this media detector layout of w that we set it from this drawing Saudi on this drain. Okay? This is the drain. And we again go back to the layout one. Now, that is a command through which we can modify the views in layer l that is called an M. M. We put this, the MU will be activated. You just have to adapt the m mu in command line and press Enter. You can see that specified corner view port or again to specify a coordinator of view port like this and draw view. This will have in Zoom character drawing in this layout. To demonstrate again, let's say we try and take a beam under, and I will draw a small box here. It would have been its own present-day entire model in this periphery. Now, you can also draw various steps of view ports like this. And we got to inactivate them. Enter. Now we options here that are called feet. As soon as I click on discrete option, this will feed the new port into pedagogy of this layout. Click on this. And this will have been through the mortar in this pity party by default. But we didn't it, it would have been equal to the m view. We have another option could draw it in this layout through this polygon or option. When I click on this polygon, an option, this will ask me to specify the start point. So we'll draw any type of polygon here like this. And then we'll close to close this. I can do is econ this endpoint. Now, I just have to press Enter. As soon as I press enter, this new shift will be activated year to reach the neck mean, you find my view of debt model like this. You're going to grow various type of very pretty for this mortar viewport. Now, I can turn it off and off on by this ng-view options to login with a MU. And you can see that is option here on and off. So it's ugly, code is off button and select the objects. So I will select this and press Enter. And I will select the CIS type here as he is, put the white. So enter, this will be done off to view, this view port. We will inactivate that. What I have to do is I would like to view MV1 again. Press Enter, and this time I will turn on, on Select Objects as this very free and press Enter. This will be done on the view of this model inside tech model port. Sorry, this view model, injectors viewport now. And it's more and more one of them modification options in Newport, how we've taped the end view command and press Enter. Now, we can also toggle between the shared blocks from this options, be studied sulfite how we can draw new viewport in here. Now, actually let's delete this enabled through some other options here are needed. This viewport have either been click on view option and press Enter. Now, I will create a layer. Okay, perfect. Now you can see that when I double-click on this entity or this boundary of view port, I can I do this. But if I want to lock this view, say eight to the room and kitchen and edited public oxide. Now, this is locked over here. We're taken again, WE can edit this. If I want to lock this viewport. Again, do that with MU command and locking options. So I will type them in command line and press Enter. You can see there is option here that says block. You'll click on this lock option and click on this lock on. Now, MU, select objects, come and ask us to select the AP test day want to block. So I will select this view port option. I'll say layout and press Enter. Now, we can see this, this is locked as double-click. This is one. Let me, and you did like this. You can unlock and locked up using layout, literally MU command. Now, you can also draw or you can also lock it in top ticks. We, if you remember, we currently do not have any objects inside this view. But we, if you remember, neorealists traded in Zoom options that we can, how we can zoom into object in specific view might be remembering dead. In Zoom options. We learned how we can zoom into an object to the video Zoom command source on booze. Similarly, you can focus on this viewport in a particular object, this object, you put option. So this was all about modifying layout views. Thank you. 59. Concept of Constraints: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will discuss some basic overview of the parametric tab. In AutoCad. We have dedicated Parametric tab in the cerebrum your here. We heard about geometric constraints and fewer dimensional constraints. So what is constraint? Through constraint, we can have, we can create a parameter ie coercive drawing with dedicated barometers in AutoCad. You can modify the shape and size of each drawing during any design procedure. So parametrics help us to get better control over our drawings objects and better management of them in our drawing. Earlier versions did not have this dimensional, linear dimensional constraints, but is as AutoCad introduce the dimensional constraints to, you can say that it completed the AutoCad. So to demonstrate a basic feature of constraint, I will draw a line here, S L. I will turn on the ortho2 roto parallel line. Okay? I've done off the ortho and I will draw another line here, C like this. Now, let's say we will try this better constraint from geometric or Option. And click on this bit. A little constraint option that is available in parametric tab. And geologic panel will be called this better than constraint is only Zeki. Click on it the command and ask us to select the force source object. So I want this line and this line to be parallel, but I want this line, this line to stain same position while this leg to change or ink line at position 4 to get parallel to this line. So first, select the main source object. I want this line to be the source or set but host for the better change. So click on this and press. Okay, now the command line says select the second object. I will call this as a second object. And you can see that we have a spirometry icon, constrict icon displayed next to this, both lines and this line and this line are now parallel to each other. This is what constraint dose in AutoCad, this to this cubic and have a better control over our drawings. And we can manage and distribute different objects parametrically in AutoCad. So this is just basic concept of parametric tab. In AutoCad, we will learn more about constraints and dimensional constraint in coming lectures. Thank you. 60. Constraints Settings: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will discuss about constraint setting dialog box. So for when we are drawing, we will see about how we can activate or modify the constraint in current drawing. So the constraint settings dialog box can be walked from this drop-down arrows in dimensional panel as well as geometric panel in parametric tab. So I click on this arrow and you will have a constraint settings currently, all the type of constraint, I'd say Dear. We'll look at this options one by one. So suppose draw, drawing here, say L. Then I would draw a drawing here like this. You can see, you know, constraints are applied to this drawing. The delete this. Now, I will again open the constraint settings, and I will select this infinite geometric constraint. As soon as I click on this in when I draw a new diagram or a drawing on the drawing board, this whole constraint that r can be applied on the drawing will be automatically applied on it. So as soon as I clicked on this, I will copy and now I will draw another feeder, kingdom feeler. You draw a line. You can see it automatically applies the constraint to this horizontal and vertical lines. So every doubling open this and I will this time, I will undertake the perpendicular constraint and say, I will take this horizontal constraint. Okay? So we do not want horizontal and perpendicular constraint to be automatically apply to our new drawings. Then I will click, Okay. Now I will draw a line here. Like this. You can see that node is under the constraints are applied to this drawing. Like this. Only vertical constraints are applied to this trying and point constraint adequate to this drawing. So let's see you another options available in constraint. Check this to make this default. And I will turn off this info geometry constraint. Now, the next option here is only display the constraint bar for object in the current plane. When a tick this, it will only display the constraint part with it are secreted in current plane. I will let it be turned off. Next option is constrained by transparency. You can see that there is an option or there's a symbol here next to the line of constraint. I can exist the transport intuited of this constraint to this option, where we decrease it to say ten. Every Cauchy. We can see that this become very invisible or afraid in this port. I would have been tended to default, but I can also increase this to my desired. Make this 90. Now this is very quite easy to look up and visible would have been open this. The next options are offshore playing constraints. So we didn't take this show constraint bars when objects are selected and press. Okay. Now I will draw new featured here. We can see that the constraints are automatically applied as soon as I'm drawing. Two, again, Google that option could be warped constraint settings. Now we've done on the show constraint, but when objects are selected and uncheck those, so constraint, but after a blank constraint to selected objects, click Okey and I will draw new figure here. You can see no constraints, icons that are available are visible here. When I select this object or drawing, the constraint icons will be visible next to it. Says how you can toggle between the constraints and constraints settings. We also have a few other options in dimensional constraints, and then click on this constraint settings. Dialog box will open. You can also switch between geometric n-dimensional within it. We also have auto constraint option we will look at later. For now, let's say that dimension name format for this constraint. So when I click on this name, this will display the name of this dimensional constraint. When I click on Video, this will display the size of this constraint. You can see in this preview. And when I click on them and expiration, it will show us the expression for the value of this line. So D1 is the name, and d2 plus D3 equals to D1. That means that is the expression for this name. And next option is show loci configuration constraints. Then I uncheck this one, show lock the constraint at adding a notation format. Next one is show dynamic constraints for selected options. So we will learn lookup to this in the dedicated lectures. Next one is auto constraint. Through this, I can activate auto constraint for the objects. So I would like to store pay to showcase that. Now currently post, let me turn off this info constraint in for geometric constraint, okay? And I will draw figured here. Okay, this is fine. Now when I select this no constraint on a hill here. Neither them off, they had applied to this drawing at this point. Reading for this. Now, I select this and I will go to the auto constraint tool. You can see that all of these are currently applied to this Auto Constraint tool. Click OK. And I will click on this Auto Constraint tool in parametric term in geometric panel. Click on this. The command line says select objects. So select this whole octet. Now I'll press Enter. As soon as I press Enter alter or constraints are automatically applied to this geometry. So you can see that this all constraints are automatically applied. This sign is for better perpendicular, this one is for pileated parallel. This one is for parallel to. So like this. Well, this constraint are automatically applied. If you wish that you do not want the horizontal constraint to be automatically applied. Parallel constraint promote automatically apply, intends to this options over here, you can uncheck them. And you can also select all appear on through your needs. So you can easily modify this all as per your needs in order to get. This is all about constraint set up. Thank you. 61. Parallel, Coincident and Tangent Constraints: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will discuss some tools of geometric constraints. So we earlier, we saw auto constraint to in previous lecture and we also saw the constraint settings in previous lecture. I will click Okay. Now, let's see. First one is coincident constraint. Another one is better than a constraint. And the third one is tension constraint. So I will draw a line here. So here it is. Okay? I will draw another line here, this point. Now, I want this line from this point to be attached to this line at this point. To do that, we can use coincident constraint. The coincident constraint tool is available in geometric panel in parametric tab in the ribbon. So I will go and select this first coincident constraint option. As soon as I click on this, the command line says select the first object, okay, So first object or first. So if I move my cursor near this point, this is showing me the middle point as a constraint point. If I go around this corner, this will show me this point as a constraint point. So you can just go down the point that you want to select and you can click on, okay. Okay. So first thing you might, you may consider is that if you want this line to change its position to make at this point, the first you're selecting is the source point or the host point. So my host 0.4, if I want to move this line, at this point, my host point should be this so ugly code here. Okay? Now the command line says select the second. So this point of this line should coincide, but here, so select this as my secondary point. We are already selected this as a horse point. And as soon as I click on this, the line will move to that point. And this will change its position to this without changing the angle. So this is how you can use the coincident constraint in AutoCad. The next one is better little constraint. If you mate hosting that earlier in previous lecture, I will select a nine-year. Now you can see that this is not parallel or Ben see this is not openly vertical. I will again draw a line over here like this, okay? Now I want this line to be parallel to this line. So my host line or host constraint should be this. So what do I will do is I would click on this better constraint tool that is available right below the coincident constraint. I click on this parallel, select the first object. Remember, always your first object will be the host object. With reference to another object, we'll change its place. So it looks sleek. Select this and select this as the second object. And you can see that these lines are a predator to each other. Now, let's move on to the next option that is tangent constraint. Now, do that. I will draw a circle here. Okay, This is enough. And I will draw a line here. I want this line to be constraint, well sorry, I want this line to be tangent to this circle with a constraint tool. To do that, I really walk these tangent tool often when this geometric panel right below the better and coincident tool, I'll click on this tangent tool. It is asking me to select the first object. Remember, you always have to select the first object is the host object means top tip. You do not wish Teddy tinges, it's placed for the another object. The second object you choose will always tend it's place to get in alignment with the constraint you want. So I select this circle and I select this as a second. Now, you might notice that this mode it place, but it is not visible currently. But this line is tangent to this circle around this point. To prove that I will just extend this line to this limit. So let says Let this line and I go extend command. We already studied this extend to modification drawings. There's like this. This is not letting me extend this line currently. It goes through is not selected both. So obviously if this board and I'll reconnect stained and I click on this line. This will be extended to this point. So it is proved that this line is now tangent to this circle. So this was all about this to tool in geometric section of this Constraint tools. Thank you for watching. 62. Collinear, Perpendicular and Smooth Constraints: Welcome back. In previous tutorial, we see, we saw this three Constraint tools. In this tutorial. We will discuss about next three twos in constraint banner. So we have this colinear constraint. But when you create a constraint and this more than constraint. So let's learn about this. Quoting a constraint forced. To do that, I will draw two lines here, c1 plus 9. I will turn off auto to lock it into the axis. This will be my fourth line, and this will be my second line, or geometric shape or object. You can call it anything. Okay? Now, I want this line to be in co-linear path with this line means I want this ln, two more lines blend. Or you can say I want this line to mean the same xs. To do that, I can use this colinear constraint. Another constraint tool available in geometric panel in this parametric tab. And click on this. Now command line says select for subject. So as we discussed earlier many times that we have to select the main POP tech as a source object or the object. We do not wish that the tangency disposition or vector displacement. I select this as a whole stoke tick or fossil tech. Now command line says select the second object. On selecting this, this will move upwards in to collide this into the same direction, Jose, same xs. Now, next one is, but when you put a constraint, do that, I will draw lines here. So this line, and I will draw another line. Okay? Now you can see this, this line and this line are not parallel to each other. But to show you that, Can I do is I can use the better perpendicular constraint. Now, I will select this perpendicular constraint. I was elected as a source object because I want this line to be perpendicular at this point. But on this constraint, so select this. Now as per command line says select second object. So it's like this line. Now, this both lines, I'll pillar, sorry, perpendicular to each other. But you can see it, this is not quite visible, or you can say this is not looking good. So what we can do this, we can use the coincident constraint to make this point reached. Or you can say to combine this point or unite this both objects. So what I'll do is I selected coincident constraint. I select this point, and I will select this as the second. Now, this looks perfect. We applied to constraint on this objects. The next one is smoothing constraint, okay? So tell condition for the smoothing constraint instead, it will only work with this blinds. It does not work with the ax. To do that, I will trust lines here. This will be my first 49, and this will be my second plane. Okay? So to use the smooth tool for smooth constraint, I select this as my first code point. Is it like This is my second go point. Now you can see this will automatically make a go in this both the segments 32 is more than the constraint points, means there is no God no visible in this constraint. This is owl. You can use colinear. Colinear perpendicular and smooth constraint in order of it. Thank you for watching. 63. Concentric, Horizontal and Symmetric Constraints: Welcome back. Previously, we saw this Constraint tools that is calling it but bendy ruler and smooth. Now we will learn about concentric constraint, horizontal constraint, and symmetric constraint. So let's start with the concentric constraint. I will draw some circles here for that to demonstrate the concert Excel constraint. This is fun circle and I will draw another circle. Now, the concentric constraint work as it will correlate the center point of this circle, eta. Same point means if I wish to move this circle exactly from this central point of this circle to this center point means this both with collide at the same center point and we'd be in, into each other. To do that. I can do it with the concentric constraint. I click on this conservative tool. Now if I select the first tick, again, I'm mentioning that this will be my source object, means this object will move to that Cellectis's post-op tech. Yep, this is the second object. Now, this word circles are constraint to each other at the same center point. You can see that both held senior center point and our collide into each other. The next option is horizontal constraint means that if I make sure the author is off and I will draw nine year and M line like this. The line is currently not in horizontal plane or it is not in locked into any x's means. This is inclined line. To make this horizontal, I can use the horizontal constraint. I click on this horizontal constraint, this geometric panel, and it will become this line. This will make it into horizontal constraint or what is under x's. Would again, you OK, this horizontal to nitrogen make this line into horizontal inclination. Now, the next one is symmetric constraint. Okay? So pay attention here. This is very interesting to, for the instance, I will just draw a circle here like this. And I will draw another circle over here or say omit this coordinate. I will clear this is big circle. Now, I will draw a line between this port circles, the cone ortho to draw symmetry plane. Okay? Now, we will go back to the barometric tab. Okay? Now you can see that we have this two circles on a screen and our line between them. So if I wish that the circle should be the size of this circle. This circle should be reduced to the size of the circle and should be at exit. Same position from this line is this circle is. So I can do that with the symmetric tab. So I will go to the symmetry constraint. Click on this. Now command line says select the first object. So I want to change the size of this object according to this. So my first object will be this. Now I will select this, hit an object. And now command-line sage said that's the data symmetric line. So between these two, this will be my asymmetric line. And click on this. You can see that this constraint to each other means if I change the diameter of this circle and this damage or whether the circuit we also change with respect to this symmetric line. So this is how you can use the symmetric constraint. Now, we can also change the different shapes. So let's see one more example for the symmetric constraint. Are you drew a line here. Perfect. Now, we've done all the ortho and draw an ellipse here. Sorry, to this two-year to that line. Okay. I'm sure ellipse here, and I will draw another ellipse here. This, okay? Now I want this ellipse to do besides of this ellipse and look at it. The same exit distance from this line is, this one is. To do that, we'd have to include the parametric tab and select Symmetric constraint from this geometric panel. Once I click on this, reselect this as my first object. Now command line says select the second object. So I visit like this. And now a common name, sage that does the deck, the symmetric line and it's like this is a symmetric line. Now you can see that it automatically will change its shape and size according to this constraint. And also just the space between this distance of this spectral line. So if I change the direction, if I tends to modify this object, this will also change in this site. This is how you can use symmetric, horizontal and concentrate constraint in AutoCad. Thank you for watching. 64. Geometric, Vertical and Equal Constraints: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we so concentric horizontal n symmetric constraint. In this tutorial, we will discuss about freaks, vertical and equal constraint. To do that, I will draw a line here. Okay? Now I have a line on my viewport. So when I wish to rotate this line, I can do this easily from this point. And I can rotate this line is put my desire like this. But if I use the fixed constraint, say this one, and we'll click on this fixed contract option from this geometric panel. Now, the command line says select a point object. So similarly, as we used in coincident constraint, it will display you highlight for the point that you wish to choose. So we'll select this point. Now, this point is locked at this, or say fixed at this constraint. Would again use this and I will fix this point, this constraint. Now, this line is fixed on both the points are locked with the BOT-2 points on constraint. If I try to rotate this line now, select this, hit the arrow statistics or cookie photos we've already studied in previous lectures. Select this point and try to rotate it, but come on. But autograder will review me a warning that one or more objects has constructed prevent geometry to be rotated. What do you want to loop? It says the either I can elect the constraints for, I can maintain the bone strain. If I relax, it will remove the constraint from what the points, if I maintain, this will keep the constraint, but I won't be able to rotate the line. Similarly, if I tried to move this line, this point, move it because it is locked or fixed constraint points. This is how you can use the fixed constraint tool to unlock them. You just have to click on this. And you can just show this again. So the next tool is vertical constraint. Suppose I have a line like this. Okay, I heard two lines on my screen. Now, if I wish to make them vertical, SVD didn't notice until constraint, I can use the vertical constraint to simply call this constraint tool or anybody geometric panel. Let me comment this line. This will turn this line in 2D vertical constraint or login. Choose this line to make this vertical. This is how you can use vertical constraint. The next tool is equal constraint to this. The last tool that we have in geometric section of the constraint. Then go to the Home tab and create two circles here. Okay? This is very similar to what we studied in symmetric constraint. But in this, we can constrain each optic with each other without using the symmetric line in between. Suppose, if I want this object to be sized for this object, I can do that with the equal constraint tool. So I'll just click on the equal constraint. Now, command line says select the first octet. So this circle will be my oldest object or main object. So select this first num command line says select the second object. And we select this one. So this will change its size equal to this object. Now, this is how we can use the different type of constraint in AutoCad. This was all about the geometric meaning of constraint. In order paired, we learned about various shapes or you can simply just within the geometric constraint. Thank you for watching. 65. Show and Hide Constraints: Welcome back. Previously, we learned about constraint and it's types. In this lecture, we will go to, or we will discuss the show and hide all the options in constraints. So I will draw some figures here. See any random field over here, draw it into auto mode. Okay, so you can see that we have a figure drawing board. Now, I will do the parametric tab and I will give it the Auto Constraint command. As soon as I do that, the command line says select objects, say tanks. So I select this whole object like this. Now, press Enter. And also constraint will be autoplay to this drawing. Now, you can see that all the different icons in this and all of the points are highlighted in the constraint form. So divide that we have a tool that is called Show Hide option. So the Show Hide option is available in geometric tab, sorry, Parametric tab in geometric panel. Click on this option as soon as equally contest, the command line says, select the objects. So far, suppose say I don't want to, this, this and this, and this. I selected this four line segments and I will press Enter. As soon as I press Enter, we have option that is enter, an option that is Show, Hide and reset. So if I click on this height option, the oil, the constraint logos symbols next to this lens will be heated. So now you can see that if any, if I select this line, it will show the constraint on D. It is selected. When I select this line, it will show the constraint, but meanwhile, there are no constraints displayed. Audio and I click on this, it will show the constraints. I can again do the normal. Maybe going back to the show hide option, applicant is, I will select this four line segments again, and I will click on Enter. Press Show, disarmed by the normal. One more thing. If I, again activity should wide. Now I will select this two lines for this time. I press Enter and I will hide them. So constraint for this and this are hidden until selected. So this two line segments have constraint, but they won't be visible until isoelectric line. And we're going to go to the Show Hide option. I select this word line. I'll press Enter. And then selecting show or hide option. I'll click on reset, the boundary setting this, this will bring back the normal stage where we started hiding and showing it in the drawing board means it will just set it to default. The next option is show and hide all the, all the, all the constraints will be visible on screen and then click on Hide All this will hide all the ones straight on-screen selected. This is how you can show, hide, and show, and hide all options can constrain. Thank you for watching. 66. Dimensional Constraints: Welcome back. In previous tutorials, we went through geometric constraints in AutoCad. And this tutorial we will discuss about dimensional constraint in auto bag. So we have some dimensional constraint. So let's first understand the concept of dimensional constraints. We also have dimensions in annotation. But what is the difference between parametric constraints or parametric dimensional constraint and normal annotation dimensions. To understand that, I will draw a line here. See with ortho nitro line over here. Now, I will just copy the same line over here, like this. Okay? So we have a line on our screen which I'm with. Both are equally length. I will give you denotation, say linear dimension. This point to this point. Okay? This is not visible. So I will just said just the size of that. We already studied all this in previous lectures. I'll make it file, press. Okay? Okay, this is too large. Let me make it a little bit smaller than this. Okay, perfect. Now, you can see that the length of this line is 19 or two or 300. Now, we'll go to the parametric tab and I will assign a linear constraint to this line. So when I do that, this will ask me do was point. And this would ask me the second is you get this snippet. Now. It can burst over here. Now you can see that this both line held the same splint and it is measured in same land. What is the difference between normal dimension and parametric dimensional constraint? So I'm going to stand that I was just trying to change the length of this line by tensing this dimension. I will make it 25. Press Enter. Okay, So this did not change the length of this land, but it only dimension means this line is not to scale, but 30 mentioned. Then measuring this line, this would be measured, it measured it 19, 200 to 300, okay? But the dimension which is 25. But in case of this dimensional constraint, when I double-click on this and I added the value of this to 25 and press Enter. This will increase the length of the line. You can see the difference on the screen. It will actually increase the length of the sign means. The dimension will be associated with the line, but it would also change the length of nine on altering the dimension. I will delete this both and we want the next part. So in dimensional panel, we have two types of dimensions. In this tutorial, we will go through linear, horizontal and vertical. So n will also go through aligned dimension. We'll go to the Home tab and draw nine here. This maternal, the ortho. And I will draw a second line here. And I will draw one more line over here. Okay? I will go back to the parametric tab and I will assign a linear dimension to this points this to this. But you can see that either I can select it a horizontal or either I can put it vertical, but I cannot align it to this line. This can not be put into inclined formation at all. So what I can do is through linear dimension, either you can do it in horizontal or vertical. Similarly, we already saw the option was, so we already saw an example on linear dimension. I will try to horizontal dimension here, and I click on this point, and I will click on this second. This will measure the 25 units for this line and press outside that key to exit the command. Now, I will give it a vertical dimension here. This point. And this will be my second. This Rudy has 13. Now, we already saw that we assigned two dimensions in a coin. The first dimension will name it automatically as D1, while the second one will be need to Minsk dimension one and dimension two. Now let's alter the size of this dimension. I'll click on this 25 and make it 30. On pressing Enter. This will automatically increase the length of this line. Moving on to the second example, if I just click on this and this to say 30 and Enter, this will again change the length of that line according to the dimension assigned. So this is how this three-dimensions work, means linear, horizontal and vertical dimensional constraint working Motorhead. That is a big difference between normal dimension and parametric dimensional constraints. Okay? Now let's study about the aligned dimension to understand it better, or draw a line here. This puppy. And now I will go to the parametric tab and give it a Aligned dimension from this point to this point. Previously we studied that, sorry, by mistake or to exit the command. Previously we saw that to linear dimensions, we couldn't liter mind aligned dimension four, that means I can either horizontal or vertical, or I can switch to specific horizontal dimension or vertical dimension only. Do align dimension. I can measure the line segment that is inclined information. Now let me change this. Okay, so I will make it 45 and press enter on a, pressing Enter this one, change the dimension that, sorry, this one tends to 0 Lenton any vertical or horizontal format, but it will extend the line in the same good it is currently situated in. This is what our land dimension does. To demonstrate an example, let's say I owe a rectangle you. Okay? Now I will go to the anode tab and Saudi Parametric tab and give it to align dimensions. I select this point, and I will select this book. And now currently this roots as a dimensionless 40 to all these barometric dimensional constraint. I didn't know that it means if I zoom out, this will show me dinner. I do not need to change the lens for them. So if I zoom in this automatically adjust it says inward formations like this. So let's say I was in this land, 250 now present around you so that this will automatically change the length of this line. And this will be pulled back over here, and this will be pulled into front part. So this is how aligned dimension works in auto ahead. And do that. Now, let's say that i o copy of this. Sorry. I hope you, of this rectangle over here. And I will give it aligned dimension from this point to this point between this two. If I want to make this distance to be 25, what happens is that this rectangle should shift on the right side. So we'll enter 25 and press Enter. But you saw that this rectangular board performed better than the right-hand side. So this is where all the geometric constraints comes into play. I will undo that. And now let's do some constraint to this point. So starting with this one, I will give it a fixed constraint first. So I will assign a fixpoint trained all at this point. And never the signer say equal constraint for this line. And this line means whatever changes I make to this line, the eyeball language automatically follow. Now, Let's give another constraint that is vertical constraint to this line. Then another vertical constraint to this line means this fourth line should not only move, but should also stained and vertical DMO dimension only. Now let's try by altering the image. And now I'll put 25 and press enter or exit of this parametric, sorry. So except of this shifting this on the right-hand side, the line move this rectangle. What does that mean? That it automatically shifted this point to other side, rather than shifting the fixed constraint, geometric constraint rectangle, I would undo that. What happens if we remove this constraint? Constraint? We will delete this constraint. Sorry. I will undo that. And now let's say I want to shift disconnecting, Got it at the 10, shifting this without deforming any size. So what I would do is I will sleep on this vertical constraint. I will make this vertical. We're looking, make this vertical. I will make this vertical. And I would make this vertical constraint over here. So this four lines are now being vertical constraint. What do I will do is, next thing is, I will give it a equal constraint on this both side. So let's say we do a equivalent strain on this. Do this, sorry, this, and this. So now let's try by changing the blend between this board. I will type 25 and enter the new distance. You see that without deforming, region tends to length of this rectangle like this by using the constraint. This is how you can use this constraint in practical approach. Thank you for watching. 67. Radius, Diameter, Angular and Convert tool: Welcome back. In previous lecture, we learned about dimensional constraint in order they're, in this current lecture, we will discuss some other features off dimensional constraint. Didn't know anybody in this dimensional panel. We have here is radius to dominate tool, Angular and convert to. So let's get into them. To demonstrate to a host one, I will draw our q is going to be my 1.2nd and say third. We are done with the ortho, okay, So what we have an ikea and off-screen dimensional or Saturdays tool is available in dimensional panel in parametric tab. And click on this dimensional to three dimensional radius tool to walk that. Now, command line says select arc or circle. So currently I want to measure this arc radius for this arc, I click on this. This will show me a radius that I need. I can put it into any detection. So let's say that I will keep the radius four here. Now, I can add just the radius for this R. I want it to be 80. I press Enter. This will increase the radius of this arc from its center point. Now, you can see that you can also do this with the circle. So if I draw a circle Year C like this, the radius off 70, Okay? Now we have a circle on our screen that has current weather, us 70. So everybody on this and the radius for our circle is 70. You can see that I'll select this dimension. Now. I contend this dimension to 35 and press Enter. This will reduce the size of the circle to the radius of 35. The next option we have here is angular constraint. So I will draw a figure here to demonstrate that. I will draw a line, draw a line like this, and then draw another figure like this. Now, you can see that this line is currently spaced going horizontal x's, and this line is inclined in both x's. So I will select this angular constraint, dimensional constraint from this year. And every press on this as a host line, main line, and these are the second line. You can see the detail between them is currently 14 that is visible on screen. Now I read just this degree for angle between them, 260 and press Enter. This will move the second nine that we choose to the angle of 60 from this line. Now what if this line is noting and angular space or I can do with the ticking host as this line. So let's try that. Or you go to the angular constraint. I was like this is almost and select this as a second. Now you can see the degree between them is 104. So I will make it 150 and press Enter. You can see that we can also use it in the inclined lines that we need to change the host top. So with the reference of this eye tends this line at the angle of 150. This are quite good at constraint and motivate. The next one is diameter. It is very similar to what we did earlier. I will draw a circle like this, 20. And now, if I give a diameter to the circle C, that will be 40 of course. And I can change the diameter where you do 60 and press Enter. This will increase the size of the circle. Now, you went through all the dimensional constraint over here. But what is this called? Convert tool, okay, so to convert TO, YOU CAN, for, suppose for example, you draw a circle in a diagram, okay? So if you gave it to NOT two dimension first, now you need to give it a dimensional constraint, but you do not have to delete the NOT to constraint oriented or two-dimension. And then to give it a dimensional constraint, you can either do that with this convert to, so how does that work? Let's take out away. So I'll draw a line here like this. Perfect. Now, this is not currently in x is, so I will draw straight line here with all her boss ortho, okay? And I will draw a circle here like this. I will go to the anode tab and give it a linear dimension. This point, to this point, this is not currently visible, so let's add cyst the size for that. What are the modify? It just says, sorry, this to be say 10. And I'm going to just those texts to be ten. Press OK. And I will close this. Okay, now this is quite visible, okay, and I'll give it a diameter annotation to this. So let's say we have a diameter of this circle. Now we give this both and NOT to constraint. So the NOT to dimension. We'll switch back to parametric temp. We earlier saw that if I alter the value of this dimension, this won't make any change to this line. And if I return the value of this diameter, this won't make any changes to the circle eater. So if I want to draw NOT NOR sorry. So if I want to do dimensional constraint for this, I do not have to delete this both and dendrites in order to constraints. To do that, I just have to click on dimensional constraint panel. And you can see that we have this convert to, click on this convert to, and the command line says select SOC two dimensions to convert. Now, suppose I want to convert this dimension two weak constraint. So click on this. I can now go and click on this. Okay? So I selected this book dimension to be converted into constraint, and I will press enter and racing into both. The value of this constraint is now Saudi. Both the video of this dimension is now constraint. So double-click on this. I can change the value to be 350. Press Enter like this. I can edit, this is two, and I will change it to five and press enter. Like this. You can convert different in order to be mentioned into constraints. So this was all about the angular, radius, diameter, and convert constraint in order of egg. Thank you for watching. 68. Modifying and Deleting Constraint values: Welcome back. In previous tutorials, we learned about Angular aligned and various type of causal Constraint tools in autocad. In this lecture, we will discuss how we can do a modification or to the constraint with two values. Or you can say you can enter the specific values for different constraint. So I will draw a rectangle here of the 10 dimensions and two-dimensional, say 15, and then enter. Now we draw a rectangle here, 0152 into ten units. And i'll, I'll give it a nine dimensions of this point to this point of 15 units, that it would be 15. And I will use dimension to this point, to this point, sorry, this point to 10 units. Okay? So if I alter the video of this, we saw that the length of this line will change and this will deform direct angle to make it or to make it constant. I will give you the equal constraint on both the sides. So this constraint and this constraint, this line segment and this segment will be constraint now. So N80 tradition to this landscape when grossly affecting it does. But you'll see that after applying constraints, dimensional constraints to each of these wor year is called D1, D2. And so if I use this value and see, except of this, I will type here is one, that is the value of this constraint. And divide by two means, 15 divided by 7.5. So I will press Enter. This will reduce the size of this lane to have 725. This is how you work with the constraint in order that so automatically by changing this, also enter the value of this. Let's see another example. I will draw a line here of say, five minutes, okay? The length of this line is five units. This is an order to constraint. So the NRA to dimension. This is too large. So just use the barometric one repeated linear dimension of this and that. So we have a value of V3 integrins this line as five units, I would draw a circle year. Okay, of this size. Now, what we are doing is I will give it a radius that will be over here, okay? Now we have a radius value over here. So if I want the circle to be file, I can either edit this. And if I want this circle to have the value of this D3 means this segment, then I can do it with my typing that are the radian one is equal to 3. Press enter. So this will change to the length of this line. Now, if I read the line segment, let this, this will also change the value to that circle. So except of this, I retained this video to say 10. Press Enter. This will also analyze the circuit given us this is now associated with the knee three, that is the length of this line. This is how you can manually editor. Many would say modified constraint Lands, End dimensions, and this will also take effect in all. The next constraint means it is a constant value that we'll be taking a fact in preview coming constraint. Let's see another example here. So we saw that this is 7.5, that is half of this 15. If I tense this video from 15 to 30, like this, and press Enter. This will also take effect in this side. Now, as this side is d by two means this would be 15 and this will read 30. So this was all about giving a modifying constraint values. Now let's learn about the delete constraint tool. To evoke this delete constraint tool, command line says select objects. So I can select this line segment and what will it do is this will delete older texts or all the constraints are currently active on this core object. So as a press enter or leave the concert on, this rectangle will be deleted like this. So this currently it is, does not have any values associated with it as a constraint. So this is all about routing constraint and modifying the constraint values. Thank you for watching. 69. Parameter Manager: Welcome back. In previous tutorial, we learned about various aspects of this constraint to, in this lecture, we will learn about the parameters manager. You might remember that in earlier lecture re-entered the values manually, but you can do this in more organized way. So Toulon that I will just draw some figures here and one screen. And I will do some random parameters to them. Okay? This should be enough. Now, I've assigned some values to this ones that we make this constraint equal. Constraint to this. As a D one is going to be my D one value. You need constraint to this line to be vertical constraint to this spot here, as well as here. Okay? I will give you some other constraint to this object's radius to this constraint. And I will draw one model or say let it be. Now, I will give one parametric dimension to this one over here. And I will make this both side as well hosting. And second. Now, you saw that in earlier lecture we change the radius manually by typing D1, D2, D3 point this line. But if you need a more organized way, men, some men who are working on a large project, there could be so many constraint hedged is difficult to zoom in and zoom out in each corner and change the value of this constraint will do that very easily via this pedometers. As soon as I click on this banner will be open, which will contain all the expressions and videos and names of each of this. So if I want to change the D1 value, that is 161 currently, very double-click on this, and I will change the value of 250 and press Enter. We can see that this both line is currently active, means this line 120 position. But both the distance between this line and this line, it will be same as droning earlier. Hence, the length of this language state equal to 50. Now, suppose in this one, I will say that the value of Li2 to be equal to three, and I'll press enter. You can see that cyclical expression cannot be evaluated. What does it means that we were ready Fix theater at this, both into vertical and this boat into equal. So this one, let us change the value of 31. So I will just let it go. It'll default. Skip to the end sake. Now, I can also change the value of this by Korea or type, sorry, need to and press Enter. This will increase the size of this circle with a value of two, that is 122. And you can see that already when we change the expression of NYU, and it also changed the value over here with f of x one equals V2. This is how you can use the parameters manager. In AutoCad. This would elect you have all the defined value for this. And you can also read it the constraint by clicking on radius. When I click on this cross button, is going to get the value of debt means to circle. We no longer have any constraints. So this is all about working with parameters manager and constraint. Thank you. 70. Concept of Blocks: Welcome back. In this section, we will learn about blocks, concept of blocks, creating blocks, editing blocks in dynamic blocks in order. So what is a block in AutoCad? You can see that I have a bed finger on your screen. So this is a pad and this is a block. It is not a diagram, this is a block. So when I try to select a single line of this, the whole block will be selected again, more of this in any direction I want. And this is very light rather than comparing to a normal diagram. So let's say that I have a big drawing year and I need to use this bad in all the rooms too, so I don't have to draw a bed in all the rooms. What I can do is I can create a block, offer specific bed, and I can copy that block into all the little. Now you may think that what is the difference between copying a block and copying a drawing normally in all the rooms. So if I copy a normal drink of padding all the rooms, this will create some space, or you can say it is good, gets her some space on our planet. It means that this food make our friend heavier. So using block saves your time and makes the file lighter and lighter as possible. So this will use less electronic space means that our drawing will be lighter. So no matter how many blocks I create or copy this bed in also drawings, this will not take more space than a single block. Means if I have two copies of this block and destroying lectures, the drawing will only or file will only contain the space of synchronous block. Now, there are more options or whatever in block that is good. This is currently in normal block. It's nowadays it's a dynamic block. So dynamic block, thermodynamic look, we can tense the various parameters of a block. Means that I see sturdy table containing a blog. So I need to use this 2D table in different projects. And each project contains different measurement for the sturdy table. So I just have to enter some values or parameters of block and dispute on automatically change the length and size of that steady table in different projects is put my needs detail called dynamic blocks means you don't need to edit the whole block to change the length or specific ADR for that block. The dynamic load creation takes much time compared to the creation of normal block. We will learn about everything in coming lectures. So as for now, you need to understand that block is a diagram that is containing atomaton diagram converted into a block which is lighter space ten normal drawing. Thank you. 71. Creating Blocks: Welcome back. In previous tutorial, we discussed the concept of blocks in autocad. In this tutorial, we'll create a specific block for our current drawing. So as you can see in the drawing board, we have this four rooms created. Each of this room is missing a door. So we will draw a door ten converting to block, and we will insert the lowers in all the other three rooms. So let's start by creating the door over year. I will draw a line from this middle point. The distance ellipses three-foot 68. So I will draw vertical line of three foot six inch, three foot six inch. Press Enter. Now we have a line for the door. What I will do is I'll copy this and make this around one inch for the thickness of the toe. Now we have a door here with the thickness of fun. Gloss this both hands with the line. And I will call it here and close this and faultline. We've done all the Ortho. Now, I will join this all the four segments and convert it into a rectangle. Now use the join command and we're into the joint and press Enter. So this is now a single entity or single object. Now I will draw arc. I will use the start point, end point, and the center point. Ok, so let's start centered. And so we will read over this going to be good. So I will select the center point. I said at the start point, and select the endpoint. So we draw DO on this diagram. Now, if I need to copy this to H and equity where this will create Lord, on our file. We already discussed this point in previous lecture. So what I will do is I'll convert this door into a block. But before that, let's give it some color. So I will select this both entities and press Control 1. After pressing Control 1, I can alter the color, what is 20? So I will go to Select Color option, and I will give it a brown color. Okay, this is fine. I hope this is visible to you and I will be return line scale. Landscape is finite. We do with the line rate of say, 0.30 and I press, Okay. Now the linewidth might not be visible and written on the line weight. Okay. So you can see that the door is currently visible. This looks a little bit thicker, so I will now introduce the anyway to see 0.30 minute. Okay, this looks fine now. So I will create this door, this both entities as a single block as it over. So when I click on this Oregon, I just keep my cursor on this. This shows this is an arc. And when I click on this, this will show that it is a polyline and it will show that in various information of color, layer and line type. So to convert this into a block, what I will do is I will go to the Insert tab. Now, we have a block option on the left side, block definition on this year. This both 100 allocated block panels in the Insert tab. I will do is select this both entities. And I will click me. That is the shortcut key for the block. And I will press enter this video walk the block definition tool, which means I can create a new block from this, or is it I can also use this create local option on this panel to do that. So let's name my blog load. Okay, now specify onscreen base point. So this is a base point for the owns green. What does that mean is every week on this or sale, I will just click on this peak insertion point. When I click on this, and I will choose this as my insertion point. Means whenever I insert a new block into drawing, from this point, I have my cursor will use the insertion point. The next one is rock units. So currently logged in, it'll say two inches by default as our current drawing is in architectural units. You can see that over here. So I will let it be. Next option is alt text. So I will specify onscreen or I can select all six. So I will click on the Select Objects. Now is lead this and this as my block of text. That means that this boat will be created into a block. I'll press Enter and this will be selected. Now, I can either give it to NO2 behavior, scale uniformly or Allow exploding. Allow exploding means that I can further edit this ends up read this block into pieces. So I will let this tends to be. And next option we missed here is retained convert to block and delete. If I click on retain, this will retain the current drawing as it is, but it will create a copy of block within the autopilot, means it won't be visible until and unless they insert this from this block panel. So I will convert this to the blog. And if I click on this, delete this, we did this drawing, but it will really save it as a block in auto head means similar to this reading option, I can insert debt from this block panel. So I will just click on this convert to block and breast. Okay? Also, you can enter description for the your blocks. So we need two door for the for loops. Once done, you just have to click. Okay. Now, we saw that earlier when I clicked on this, this was showing me as arc and this was swaying me as a polyline. But now this is tends to block reference. So this is now a blog Vanek tied to change. This will be my base point as we defined earlier. I can't express it anywhere or place it anywhere with this reference point. I cannot move this from another point because this is the base point for this block. You can see that my drawing as a block. Now, if I delete this block accidentally, I do not have to recreate a door and then converting it into a block. The block is automatically saved in AutoCad. You can also create your own block library in order there. We will see that in coming lectures. So is 4. Now I deleted the blog to insert it back into the drawing. Oh, I have to do is go to the Insert tab. And you can see that few blocks are available in auto head. So click on this door and it will bring back the door block, then press it here. Now, similarly, this block into the All Rooms. Either I can copy this length with copy command and bless it over here. Or I can insert a block each time with this Insert block command. Length is now our drawing looks complete with the blocks. So as we discussed earlier, this door block does not at the space of different drawings. This only gets the space of single dog entity which is grown into broom. Which means that combining all the size of this folder, this will only it will only occupy the size of single door. So that was it about creating blocks in order that thank you. 72. Inserting Blocks: Welcome back. In previous lectures, we learned about creating blog and concept of block. In this tutorial, we will discuss various methods for inserting could blow in October. So currently I'm using the same diagram as we used in earlier lecture. So I have a blog dedicated in previous tutorial that is due next week on this tool, we have specified the insertion point as this is the best point. So if I want to insert a load over here with using this as a base point, I do not do need to edit this door and specify them different base point each time. What I can do is I will go to this Insert tab and I will create this Fourier. I would click on this door. Now you can see that I can insert a door in my diagram. But you can see that the command line says that specify insertion point O. We have options here, so we'll go through 10. The first one says the base point means this was my base point out the door. You can see this currently the cursor is getting the door for holding the door from this base point, that is my insertion point. We click on this base point. Now this will add, let me read the base point for this door. So I would pick this as my base point. Now I can place the door instead of this as a base point or say it is said is at this point with this point. So it inserted all the tech base point. Now, each time I use this command, the eye can only insert a block, only ones. To do that on repeated purpose. What I can do is make and go to the Insert selected DO, and click on repeat option. So this will let me repeat block until it's currently set to years. So I will click on yes again. And I will bless the Doria. Naked eye again, place the door here so this won't exit the command after blessing to do. So, let's see what are the next tools available in inserting locks. We did this for now. Now suppose an ugly count is low. And you can see that earlier we tend to waste point to the different. So that will be only for the individual block placement ten TED width of vector base point of this. The next one is scale. When I click on the scale option, you see that specifies scale factor for XYZ axes. So there it is currently set to one. If I keep that two-point file, sorry, I will click that 2.5 and press Enter. That means that my load is now divided by the factor of 0.5 means it is reduced in half the size. I can have intent to scale back to normal by clicking one. And I can again increase the size by clicking here too. So like this, you can alter the skill of the blocks. You can also add it to the scale of this block in all directions, x, y, and z individually and manually from this options, the next one is rotate. So if I click on this rotate option and it will give the anchor of 45, the block will be rotated from its insertion or base point to the angle of 45 in the drawing, as we discussed in previous lectures, the AutoCad runs the calculation of liquid. You are angles in anticlockwise direction. So currently the block will be rotated in this direction. It can do that, make DKIM minus 45, press Enter. Like this. You can change it to the clockwise direction. The next option is explored. So make sure that this export option and distribute options are not available in previous version of what, okay? This were introduced recently. So when I click on this export option, then pecan years, and I bless the block here, or a year. Now this both entities are now exploded. If you remember earlier while creating blog, we use this most entity is an object and we just combine them into one as a block. Now this will be defined as a arc, and this will be defined as a polyline as we saw it earlier or before creating it in a block. So this is how you can insert block with various methods and modifications. Thank you for watching. 73. Annotative and Write Block tool: Welcome back. In previous tutorials, we learned about getting block and inserting block in various different methods. In coding tutorial, we will learn about writing a blog and creating an altar to dock. So let's say that we're going to add this block into an audio block. So I recreate this block by placing it in an exploding it. First, I'll go to Insert and click this door. And I will click on Export option and click yes. Bless it over here. Okay, now this block is exploded into two different entities relevant to create a block for this heavily on me, create a block and a name. It is door or CNO, k2. Doh. Okay, This is perfect. Now I click on this and pick the point for this. And this time I will pick this as a base point. And we select our text. This both press Enter. And I would click this on behaviorism annotating. Now, what I will do is describe the description is this door is annotating. Okay? And press Okay. Now this door is currently converted into an outright you go. So if I go to the Insert tab and try to press this, bless this altitude or this will ask me a scale to place this into drawing. Currently the scale is set to one ratio one. If I send you to one ratio two and press Okay. The double says door replaced in drawing means if an oppressed disk, this will change its size into the blue one ratio of two. And older currently active doors in this drawing will be increased by the size. You can see that this default that we placed earlier is also increased in size. And this also displays that annotation that change the size of the string if I dumped off this annotative scale. And ethnic this, this will again display, when selected, this will display the maze drawing of this load. So this is how you can create and placed in Urdu blocks in Motorhead. Now let's learn about option that is available on my own by clicking this drop-down window, cooked down button that is, write a blog from the local symbol you can, you might interpret that this is tightening block means this is saving a block as a drawing. So if I were already held his blog, which means that if someone created a block and give me the file, I denote how the waste file for this block. If I wanted to save this file as a separate drawing in different entities, Min separated entities by exploding. I do not have to select this, copy it to another drawing. Again, insert is an exploded into a five, delete the previous one and save it as a drawing. Again, do that directly with the right Block option. So to do that, I will be considered block. Now, I select the source as a block. I will select this, okay? And I can also set the location for this block to be saved. Currently, it is same two entities. Units are inches, so I will let it be inevitably cookie. Now, the block name has not been specified, so we need to specify the block name from this drawing. So select this load. And I will click, Okay. As soon as I click Okay, a file with this name of new block will be saved in my directory. So let me go to the directory and check. So what we had saved this file as a file in this directory is this two different entities. This is how you can convert your blocks into a single drawing with this right Block option. You can also convert this part of drawing and save it as a new file. So let's see that relatively constant right block option. Now, either I can select this entire drawing and save a copy of that, or I can select two objects option here. And I will become this big points. So this will let me read the insertion points. So I will look at this and say the insertion point to be this. Now, I will select the objects by this option. I will select this part as object for insertion. Once done, you just have to press Enter. Now this both files as elected, I will name it as new block 1. Okay? And I will let the units be inches and press okay. Again, this file will be saved in the directory with the same name, will go to the directory. And I will open this, say new block one. Okay? You'll see that the earlier, which is what we do is we selected this inner window and exported this as a new rowing in another five. This is how you can use the right block tool input. Okay, Thank you for watching. 74. Dynamic Blocks: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will discuss about creating a dynamic block and editing an existing law on those green, I have created this blog as a default block. You can go to the Insert and take the name of this block that is dynamic block testing. Now if I want to edit this block, all I have to do is a enter the command that is block and e, ms block E, that is the command-line shortcut for the block editor. And press Enter. And this will only say that block editor is read-only means that I have to click on this block and click on this block editor option that is available in log definition panel into Insert tab and click on this block editor. And this will open our edit block definition two or say dialog box as electrodynamic block and press. Okay. Now we will be taken to the Options and we will have all the options that we had and earlier, or we studied in previous lectures, that is, constraints, linear constraint dynamic constraints. Or you can say that dimensional constraint, 3D construction constraints students better than it does for them. And we blow SEO blog, desk globe. We have all these activators that we require to edit block. This means that define need to change some parameter for the drawing. I do not have to exploit this block, tends to convert it into a block. Again, I can do that all the options or other modifications within the block editor. On the left-hand side, we have excess bit on midtones. What I'm going to say it's end constraint for the block. So I can edit it this block and define the different dynamic parameters for the blog. So if I want to do this bloke, a stretch dynamic means that I can stretch. This blog is where my needs. I have to assign some actions and been amateurs do that. So let's say first we will assign a linear parameter. Means from this point to this point this week, my distance 1, which I can stretch like this or like this, straits it inside or outside. Now, I will define an action for this distance one. So we go to the Actions and click on this stretch option. No common lens it that select a parameter. So we select this distance parameter. Now I will assign a start point. So this a specified for SQL on Windows stretcher frame or polygon. So I will select the center point, and I would let this whole block inside. This is the second. I select all texts that is this block and specify the second corner point. Okay? The command line says specify opposite corner, one found means this block is now currently selected and press Enter. So you can see that we have option or you can say stretch dynamic option available and this. So I will close the editor. They'll command will ask us to save the changes to existing local and not. So I will let Excel do changes to an existing dynamic block. This block is now a dynamic block. Then I click on this. You see we have an option here to stretch this globe as per our desired length. Again, stretch this block to this point, and this won't affect the starting or base point of this block like this. So through this, you can assign a video stapled fractions to a block. I can again go to the edit option and assign different type of actions to this block. Says how you can use the dynamic block 2 and block editing to it autocad. Thank you. 75. Recent Blocks and Importing blocks from other drawings: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will discuss how to access the recently accessed block in AutoCad. So we saw that earlier through this Insert tab, we have the currently active blocks in the drawing. When you click on this recent globe, this will open up Adobe library or dialog box, and it will cross this. And if you also go to Insert block option and click on this block from libraries, this will again of 10. Evident is dead. We can access from this recent 90 works too. I will bring this into the center. Okay. Now you can see that currently we have this diagram or dynamic block debt-free created previously active in this drawing means this. We have this rock that is a recently used in destroying currently active one datacenter VM the drawings. Or we can have the blocks that we used in previous drawings. I can change the icons from this medium, small, detailed, or extra large. Let it be extra wheel does NOT withdraw that we created previously. We have this normal dog that we created previously. And if I go to the liabilities and you can import a specific, more specific block from a specific drawing. So I use currently selected this little man doors that we created previously as a drawing to take the block from means that I just sort of click on this library's option located drawing this little Mendoza. And I will double-click in this. So this will give me access to all the blocks from their drawing. Like this. You can import different blocks from drawings to insert a block into drawing register to click on this, right-click on this block and click Insert. As soon as I click insert, the current trying will have the block in it. You can see that I can insert this block anywhere on this drawing. Now been able to insert this block. Both the block may be active in drawing. So let's learn another command that is for each block. Suppose, if I held this block used in drawing currently, and I do not wish to have this other block in this drawing, which is taking some size of this file. So all I have to do is type the ports command and press Enter. Now I will go to this block option, select this dynamic block testing and persona. This will ask me if I want to pause this item, partial checked items cause keep designer. So as I clicked on disperse all items to block or deleted from the drawing. If I go to insert, the block won't be available. That means that the block is pushed out of this slide, is unused and loading nothing but it was occupying some space on the file. There is how you can use the recent block command, import from other drawings and use the points command to reduce the file size that is occupied by unused blocks. Thank you for watching. 76. Utilities Measure tool: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about basic utility tools in auto back in basic UT, two tools we have measured rules. You can open this basic utility tools from this Home tab Utilities panel. Click on this utilities. Do I have a drop-down button interrupt measure panel. Now, in measure V0, different types of measuring tools. So let's start with the Week 2. Infrequent, I have drawn a circle year. This will display my cursor is a large and when a ticket near 20 Arctic, it will display meter measurement for there, you can see that the Command Line sees the distance, radius, angle, area, volume, quick mode, and exit. These are nothing but the different measure lose a little bit over here. So if I click on this circle, insert disciplines. This is, this will display me Eddie and better emitted for the circle. Now let's move on to the next tool in measure penalty, that is distance. So let's see. I have drawn a line here. Next is okay for measure the distance of this lane. They can use that measure to go to measure tool and I select the distance option. No common lenses to specify the first, this will be my first, and this will be my second line. Now, this is displaying meter, but aren't measurement for this line that is 81 units. So this distance. Now similarly, I can measure the radius of this circle with the measure to measure, click on radius and it was ellipse this set of code. This will display meter radius 40 circle, and it can also be splitted Eddie off this acrobatic MODIS Betty option. And this will display me though, circles ADL, but blue that I need to draw a rectangle here, the drawRectangle. Okay? Or equal to the measure tool and select the ADR. Now, specify the floss corner, 0.2 corner, 0.3 corner, 0.4 corner point. Once you are done, you just have to bleep. Total is symmetrically can distort. This will display me the area of this rectangle that is 2479. Once you are done, you can escape with the escape key. Now let's measure the area of this circle. Glue that have login go to the major penalty and select area. One says delete this area. I just told us, click on this object icon and select this circle as an object. Now, this redisplay me the area for this circle. The next tool is angry. So do that and we draw lines here. Ok, to measure the angle between these two lines, I will use day in Google from this drop-down button. On the same good is through my first and it's moving my second. Now, you can see that the angle between this two line is 44 degrees. The next tool will be, that is volume group. To measure the volume of this circle will have to do is select the circle, were to measure two and click on volume, this one. As I do that, the command line says that they can select first corner, 0.2 column print fourth corner point as we did in rectangle. Or I can select the entire object made this option. So what I will do is I will select this entire object and then click on the circle and press Enter. Okay, You can see specify the height of this circle. So if we convert the silicon into 2D, it will convert it into a cylinder. So let's see. I will get tired of the cylindrical week 30 and press Enter. Now the radius of this circle n, increasing height, converting into a cylinder of 30 units, the volume of this circle will be 773,327 units as displayed on screen. So these are the basic cupidity do was to measure the different type of components. Or David, thank you for watching. 77. Quick Select tool: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about another utility to that is quickselect two. So let me explain you what is Quick Select tool in auto. Suppose I have this setup growing here and I select the drawing, the all components will be selected. If I select this form, this side, left to right. Again, all components will be selected. For instance, if I just want to select some parts of this drawing or filter out the selection, I can do that with the Quick Selection Tool. So I will select this part of this growing like this. Now, I will go to the utilities tool that is situated here in Home tab. Now we have this icon year with arrow and lightning symbol that is quickselect public on this Quick Select tool and select tool dialog box will be opened. Now, this is asking me that I want to apply the selection filter to current selection or whole drawing, I would let it be two current selection. Next option is timing, selecting the type of object. So I just want to select all this text or M text that is available in this drawing. So I will do is go to this multiple, hence tends 10 to the n M text. Now, I need to filter out the type of properties of this m Dexter, but I will just let it be to the normal text. And next one is operator, means that the value of this object and properties should match with the equal, not equal, greater than or less than most electrode. I wanted me to the equal. And where you can be, you can feed it out when you buy colored or block or layer. I will let it be to default by layer. And this will ask us how to apply. So including new selection set or exclude from new selection set. So in this monopoly can exclude, it will not select the new selection and it will create the insight that, but by including, including new selection set, it will create a new Silicon set of this dedicated option or filter. After doing that, I will click Okay. And this will filter out all the other objects insulation rather than M text. So you can see that this M text is selected. Then a more down here, all this M text selected. This is not suited. Why? Because this is single line text in this drawing, all the texts that is currently in this join is selected. This is how you can put it on different venues in a drawing, are different objects in a drawing. Tool selection. F quickselect to thank you for watching. 78. Attaching Images and PDF: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we'll learn about some attaching images and PDF to auto ahead and importing PDF autocad. You can insert an attest different files in AutoCad through this insert data in this reference panel. You can attach an image as a reference to auto bad, as we did in earlier lectures, you might remember. So to do that, I will click on this attach to locate a file that I want to attest to this drawing from this file types and Select All. So this will disclaiming all the files available. Now you can see that is an absolute coordinate system practitioner available to open in this drawing. I select this and press Open. Now, it will ask me to name the five. I will let it be as it is. This will let me preview the file and specify one screen. Means if I, I can either enter the manual venue for the position or I can specify on the screen. So that will be more comfortable for us to specify it on the screen. Now I can tend to scale that I will also specify on the screen. And I can also specify the rotation on the screen, but I will let it be 0 as one of their press. Okay? This will ask me to the insertion point of this. We made clear to click this. Now I can scale this has been my needs or requirements. Current scale factor is one by default. Will press this. Now. I'm just going to click here. As soon as they click, the image will be inserted to the AutoCad. Currently, this image is under layered in AutoCad means I cannot make changes to the image. In AutoCad, I can either adjust the brightness, contrast and I can create the freshness to this image in AutoCad. I can change the transparency. I can again clear to external references and can remove leaping to this. And I can create clipping boundary to this. But as for now, we do not need to change any or we do not need to do any modification with the image. Next option is attaching PDF. So I will delete this. Now let me tell you the difference between attaching PDF and importing PDF autocad. So I will go to the Search option of in. Now I'll go to this file and I select All files. And I will change it to PDF. This will be slimming all the PDFs debt or wherever w is 0 one PDF and the coupon. Now, we have seen Rosa at the debt we had earlier in this real part time to full path or low path. So if I need full path, this will set the full path for this drawing. Viewport have elected me to the relative means. We can use it later. Now I will see that the insertion point to be specific on the screen wires let it be 000. This time employee cookie. As soon as I click Okay, the PDF file is imported. Sorry, it is attached in the automatic drawing, which means that I do not have this component. Individual entities. This is nothing but an image of the PDF. So I cannot add anything on this drawing. To do that, all I have to do is import a PDF. You can click on this Import PDF button and you can look at the same PDF and break open. The import PDF dialog box will be popped up on the screen. Now I can sense the different attributes of this drawing inside this dialog box. This will display the number of pages and I can import specific basis for my needs. Again, click on this and click on this. Currently this PDF has only one page, so it is displaying one. Now specify insertion point of the scale. So that could be to the one scale and insertion point, do we by default, whatever it is and rotation to be 0. Next is PDF data to import vector geometry sorted files, true raster images. So this is what currently that is, this project is saved in older datas and entries in that will be carried away with this PDF conversion into Motorhead file. I will let this be as it is sold at this layer's be as it is. So this node ears will be modified in this PDF drawing. And I will click on this Import as block. This will convert this whole PDF into block, but I won't do that. And I will let other options be by default as it is the canopy. Now this will take few seconds. Okay? This PDF file is now imported to the auto bed. Earlier when we are testing a PDF file, it converted into T2 image means we couldn't change or edit anything. But now we can edit this. Each and every entity is in AutoCad like this. You can see I can adjust this lines. I can even move this and edit distance lines like this. This is how and this is what is the difference between attaching PDF and inputting PDF autocad. You can import images and other references to auto fit with the same tools. Thank you for watching. 79. Tool Palatte: Welcome back. Earlier, we studied about utilities in AutoCad and various utility to use quickselect to PDF attached to and various other tools. In this tutorial, we will discuss about tool pellets inside of it. Then you go to the View tab from this ribbon. We have this dual credit option over here. As soon as I click on this to parent option, a new dialog box will be opened. This contains civil, electrical, mechanical, architectural annotation, construction, and etc, and many other types of models currently activated in AutoCad. Which means that if I need some seaweed blocks, suppose I need this international speed limit book. I just have to click on this and drag it into the drawing. This will move this drawing into this automatic file. I can drag and drop more files like this in AutoCad. We can see this. Again, say I can also go to the architectural work and I will insert some other drawings to this auto cut like this, like this. So similarly, you can have these various blocks in AutoCad through this tool beds. It does not only contain the civil, but it also contains electrical. I just sort of leak press Okay. And then insert them to this train oblique. Okay. You can see all these blocks will be inserted into autopilot. Now when it leaks, right-click on this. We have option here to create a new custom pellet. I'll create a new custom palette and nematodes my pellet. Enter. Now, if I need to add this object to my pellet, will have to do is go to the any other tip that I want to move. I select this concrete by and I will drag it into the, my pet it over here. Sorry, I'll click and drag it into the edit like this. I can do similar with this Laurel roller bearing like this. Unless it over here in my palette like this, you can create your custom parrot in auto ahead and create a specific block set in order to get you need in your drawings. So this is all about food pellet input. Okay. Thank you for watching. 80. Groups in AutoCAD: Welcome back. In this section, we will learn about groups in AutoCad. So what is a group? A little bit, nothing but a set of entities that is combined in one and detect as a whole object. So for example, I will try to draw a door here. See, Okay, I will try to draw door in this what we're drawing. Create offset. And I will create a knob here. Okay, so I draw a basic tour in AutoCad. Now, when I select this, only this rectangle will be selected. Only this rectangle selected only this small circle will be selected. Each time I have to Moses select this all objects InMobi drawing. But if I want to create a copy of this without selecting each and every entity all the time like this. I can do that by creating a group. To create a group of this whole entities, all I have to do is go to the grouping option. We're grouping painter in this Home tab. You can also walk the group by typing group int command line. As soon as I type group, you can see that it was statistically the group. Come on. Have we call this group, or I can do this bag deep on this icon. Now, it will ask me to select the objects. So I will select the old objects. Now I press Enter, unnamed group is created. You can see that this says that Nim group is created. So first, let's give a name. I would undo that by controls that. Now this group is not currently active. I select this whole, rename it as group. And again, it will select it as a named group. But in order to give it a name, I can do it by giving it, say Edit Group option. And I was like this group. Now I can rename this. So I will give a rename to as Dough, Press Enter. Now, this is contain all entities combined one and create a DOE means this is all grouped into one group. You can go to the edit option. And when I click on this, this will let me remove the objects and head top cell objects. Suppose I want to remove this knob from this group so we can remove ticks leak on this knob over here and press Enter. Now, you can see that if I select this knob will not be selected, means this is not a part of this group. So I can move this leg this. But if I select all and move, this node will come along with this. If I select this outer rectangle and move, this wouldn't be moved both the rectangles meant to those currently active group. Now, I will again ungroup all of them. To ungroup all of this, all you have to do is select the group and click on this ungroup option that is available in this group panel over here, oblique corner, no group. And this whole load is now again into single entities. Let's see another example for the same. Create a circle year. And I will also create another rectangle here like this. Now, I will select this and this to create a group for this. Now unnamed group is created again. Now when I select this circle, you can see there is a boundary to displace that this water is a group currently. Do that. You can select your group selection on and off. If I turn off these groups, election means this both are currently active group. But when I select this rectangle, the circle want is elected end Casey, if I select this circle, rectangle 1 p, select means. If I turn back this on, if I select this rectangle, again, both entities will be selected as Hold. This is how you can toggle between group on and off options in AutoCad. Thank you. 81. Group Manager: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we learn about group manager and doubling between the bounding box or boundary box of this group. So previously we created two group of the circle and rectangle in previous session. What I will do is you can see that if I select this a boundary boxes displayed, if I want, I do not wish that the boundary box would be displayed minutes. Each of these I can do that with the group drop-down button over here. And you can see there is an option here that says group bounding box. I will select this, or you can say uncheck this. Now, if I select the circle, the both entities will be selected as the current group or currently activated as a group. But it will split the bounding box around it. If I re-encode that and click on this, this really split the bounding box 2 here. Now let's create some other groups in this mode of Ed and create a circle. And I'll create a rectangle over here. And create another circle. And then create another rectangle over here. I will click on Group, group one. And then I select this object, press Enter. Now this is creationism. Group. Unnamed group is created. Now I would have in select this boat, create a glue, quote, ready to group, select this group and rename it to group 2. And I will rename this group again as a group one as it was previously selected as a group. So great, cleared this group 1, Enter. Now you can go to this Groups option and we have option here to group manager, and I click on this group manager. This will evoke a group object tool that will display the object grouping currently active in their drawing. So we created this group one and group two. This both are active. If I want to see which one is Js, I just have to click on this group to an icon, this highlight option that is already here. It's going to say click this. This will highlight the group two in the drawing. You can continue and it will take me back to that. Now, you can either, you can find the groups point, okay? So this fine tool, currently we do not have a logic project, so it is easier to locate this port group 1 and group 2 in AutoCad. Now, here we are hosting their options. If I need to remove object into group, it is to click on the Zoom option to select this and press Enter. This will remove that square or this box from this circular group. Similarly, what we did earlier in the edit group options, you can again add this loop, check back with this group by selecting it and pressing enter V0. Different options here that we selected that we saw earlier. Let us exploit option to group will be ungroup into individual entities. This is how you can manage groups and you can add it loops in AutoCad. Thank you for watching. 82. Isometric Drawings: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about the concept of isometry drawing in AutoCad. You can see that manipulator drawing, this isn't normal drawing. Isometric grain is different from 3D drawing. We will find it out. So, so to switch to the isometric drawing port Mohr buret to do is go to the Object Snap settings. From this point, it will create, click on this 2D snap option, create objects snap settings. Now from this, you have this option or tab here that says Snap and Read. Have a critique on this. As soon as you click on this, we have this option over here that say snip type. Now couldn't leave a snip type is sacred. Meet Snap and Read snap is saved to the ducting uterus net, net. Click on this isometric snap. Our drying port will change into isometric drawing view. So you call this isometric snap and click. Okay. Now you'll make an OB so that the cursor's is changed and also the glutes are changed into isometric view. Now let's try by drawing a line. Now, either I can go in this direction. And in this situation, if I tried to draw it vertically, again, not do that to switch between this vertical direction, will I have to do is press the Function key and F file, F5 if you are just using this system. So I press F5. Now I can draw vertical line. Again. If I wonder draw horizontal lines, I do press F5 to switch between w like this. So let's create two units of line like this. And we'll do the, this horizontal view. Create two units of length is, and there'll been created two units of mine into this. Now I ravine switch to two minutes over year. Now if I want to draw this in TED detection, I cannot do that. I will again create deacon this F file and do this like this. Take the snap form reference from year and row horizontal line. Now, it can not draw this easily without changing the snap options. So you can toggle between these two views in isometric by pressing F5 like this, and horizontal and vertical direction. Like this, you can draw the fellowships in Agile metric drawing. I finished the string. You saw we draw a cube here. You'll see I cannot drop it and click horizontal lines. So I will press F5 and I can toggle between horizontal and vertical line exists in isometric drawings. So say you draw a line along this reference. Okay, now to join this, we drew a clue. Now. But are you asleep? We talked that the Isometric 2D and 3D view are totally different. So if I try to rotate this axis, you can see that we draw booby drink only, but it looks like 3D miss, it is isometric. If I go to the top view, this can look like there's a 3D object, but actually it is nothing but a 2D object that is drawn in 2D view means it is an isometric drawing. You can see this is, so, this is all about isometric drawing and concept of isometric drawing in AutoCad. Thank you. 83. Isometric drawing example: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about an example to draw isometric view to get muddy point is, so currently isometric view is active. As we start Julia, we can tends it to optics, NAEP, and we can go to the snap grid option and donor to the isometric snap. Now let's try to draw a 3D steps over here. I mean that an isometric view that is drawn. So go to the line option. Select this as my first. And I would say draw height off the stapes. So let's say we function key f phi. And then I will change the x's for drawing. Now I redefine this as say nine units. Press Enter. Now we have a line in our drawing currently. So there'll be included the line tool, select this and draw a horizontal line by changing the x's, by clicking FA. And I will draw the three units and removing go down. And great gone three limits. That when Moses sake, three units, down, three units, three units and downside for me, three units. Now I will join this line with this starting point. Okay, sorry, like this. Now we have drawn and stepped side here. And this train all entities and use the join to create a whole entity. Now this, all this object is created into a single entity. And we need to copy tool, select this corner as a reference point. And you can see that I can either move it in this direction on, in this addiction. Function key f five and mold is on this side. But I see Dan units. This is too less soil loving more for the 210 minutes. Okay, this looks fine now. Now I will join each line, but this line too. So I was going to score with this slide off the corner of the steps. I can also copy, select this icon, multiple copies. Select this as a reference point and start hoping this line head just different points in AutoCad that this nato mortality change the axis through the F8 key. Now you can see that step is ready to delete this line to make it look more clean and neat. And use the trim tool and delete this, make lines of this. Trying, okay, like this. Now you can see that we draw strap in isometric view. If I tried to change their direction, our viewport, you can see that this is not a 3D, but it is a Julia isometric view of a step in 2D drawing over the top view. This is how you can draw. Iso made it cranks in auto back. Thank you. 84. Standard Primitives and Visual Effects: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about 3D B6 and onto pad. So currently the viewport is set to 3D view, but if I switch back to 2D discreetly back to the drafting view, as we discussed earlier, you can navigate around by pressing Shift key and middle mouse button to correct this viewport into 2D surfaces of 3D view. Now, let's switch to the 3D working space. To do that, we have this option here, as we discussed earlier, include the workspace option. We can switch between different modelling views. So I will switch to 3D basics. This will show me the basic modeling that we need to doing. 3d means that we are currently in 3D space and we can create and objects and extrude them into 3D models. So let's get started. The first we are going to learn about in this lecture is concepts of 3D and some 3D primitives that are available in AutoCad. Currently I'm in a top view. There is option here that says box. And when I click on this drop-down button, we get to various other ships option here. So let's click on this box option. Then I will draw a box here like this. Currently, my visual style is set to gray. So first I will turn it to 2D wireframe. I will draw a box here of safe. I will enter state around or both. Now you can see that we are asked to describe the height for that. So especially by height or 2. So to set the height for the box, we need to switch to the 3D view. So I want this 3D view or view Cubans wish to a 3D. And I will define some might for the box. Now, we draw a 3D box here in auto carrier. But you may think that this looks just like a simple normal box without any segments. To do that, I will go to the 2D wireframe and switch my conceptual style. So this will look now like box or you can say 3D model radius. There are various other styles available hidden. So this will highlight all this, but each send objects behind his books and make this box completely black. The next visual style is realistic. So this will give a realistic look when we apply material. But make sure that you do not use a realistic view all the time. This view some load on your system and it will make automated workflow slow, so use it only when needed. The next option is shaded. So it is quite similar to the holistic view, but this will give you a gray shades on your drawing or mortar. Next option here is shades of gray. This will give only 3D shapes of gray color. And next is sketchy. This, we'll use some sketchy look to the auto CAD models. Then next option here that is far off that we use in general in 2D SVR. Last option here is x-ray. So this will display this engraved form displaying all that, but it's behind this box. So this editor, some concepts show stat. And we are currently switched to sex of gray for this pre-produced lecture. Now, we learned to draw a box. The next option here we get is cylinder. Cylinder. Drawing a cylinder is quite easy as we drove circle, but in a 3D form. So you can see that specify centre point or base point. So we have to specify, specify a center point for the base that we're using, circle. As well as you can see that there are three other options. So he bought other options. There are three point-to-point, tangent, tangent, radius, and elliptical. You are familiar with this as VM meter standard drawing tools when we drew the circle. So I will click on this center point and I will draw a circle of radius o, say file. Press Enter. Now it is asking me to define a height for this circle. So either I can dragons, we can define the height for this, or either I can enter a save file and press Enter. So we do a cylinder of height and the radius five minutes. The diameter of this circle currently is 10. Let's see the next option that is gone. Now, drawing a con is completely similar to triangle circle. Instead, we just have to define only 1, whereas we don't in circle. So I will just select this as the main middle point, new radius of file. And I will just define the height as we did in cylinder. So I can also take the reference point from this and define height. Again, go to 2D view, front view, like this, and you find a different site from the cylinder. Or I can just really can define height for this. So I will then.me or litho press Enter. So tight of this cylinder is five and this cone is sakes. I wouldn't reach to 3D view from this mu q. Okay. The next option here is spear. Spirit. So to draw a spare, which a circle click on this button here, center of this pair. And you can describe a diameter or radius. So it's currently designed specified radius or diameter. So if I click on diameter, we are to define a diameter for this circle. So I will define diameter of 10 and press Enter. This will draw spirit with the middle point that we provided. So this was the center point reproject for this bed. The next option here, salted, are two methods to draw pyramid. First one is we just clique and distribute my center point of the predominate from Veritas originated. And I will click on this. And now we define the height for this pyramid that will be safe file. And the next method here is again a walk epidemic blue and try to drop it Amit. We have two options, edges inside, so I will be coincides option. Now you can toggle between number of sides, your pyramid, how I can drop it. I made it with 50 sites. So I just told to click here. And this will draw pen Taiwan, Vietnam made negatives. You can see this speedometer is file size. Another option to drop it on Mediasite. Example, for example. For example, if I invoke the two sides 24 to default. Now, if I want to draw a pyramid exit limiting to this edge is C, you can see that I'm not able to do with this normal creation to normal creating the pyramid. To do that, I can use the edges option available in pyramid too. So you can see that specifies into point or the base. So I can edge option now specify for strain 0 h. So I will select this corner point as my age a whole chunk. And then I will report to a point and select this as the second where you can see that currently it is set to five sides soil I first change it to four. I will go to predominate again, change desired to hold, press Enter, and I will select edge option. Select this as my first and say that this has my second. Now, we have a pyramid and we will define height of three points Enter. So retro epidemic, this height option of d. So let's move to another option here. That is, wage rate is nothing but a standard being reduced from Cheddar available in AutoCad. We just create a rectangle here or box like this as we do the inbox. And we just have to define height or the side. That is this. So I will say you hired off Dan and press enter like this, making sure WHO, five, 10, and this rectangle is the base. The next option he had his daughters. So what is tortoise burrows is nothing but it is like a shape off and on or 80 you've enjoyed, as we did with spared and cylinder and gone. It is very easy to draw my center point. And now you can see that I can switch between downward to the radius as we did in corn and cylinder plus pen. And I will give it a radius of 50. Press Enter to define the tube thickness for this tube that is surrounded by this radius of circle. So I will define it to one and press Enter. This will draw Duke and you can set it swimming. We'll deal with that we have or lake alone or daughters. So these are all the standard pin reduce available in AutoCad. Thank you for watching. 85. Understanding 3D Coordinates : Welcome back. In previous lecture, we learned about some basic primitives in autocad. In this lecture, we will understand the most important concept of 3D modeling in AutoCad. We have this three exists here, that is x, y, and z. So if I switch to top view, we are currently active. Viewing X and Y exists from the top view, means all Tova protect the Lewin 2D or 3D drafting in growing the plants that is happening in this two Xs. So in AutoCad, when you start drawing in 3D more links, it will convert it into three x's steady said Xs, that is 3D. Now, i e, we can manually adjust up exist as per our requirements. So we have this option here, selection, sorry, coordinates penalty or on the home tab of 3D modeling workspace. So you can just click on this three dots. Once you select this exists, this is called a UCS. This coordinate is quit UCS. You can have this coordinate option over here. So when you click on this, you can, if you click on this, you can just drag it and place it anywhere. Currently the auto mode is on. If I turn it off again, unless it anyway, As for my requirement. Now, for example, if I draw a box here like this, now you see our drawn a box on x and y axis. Everything that you start growing really originated from x and y axis only. So whatever I draw here, my first originated, originated trend plane will be x and y. Then later we will move on to zed x is statistics. So if I want to change the coordinates for this box, I can do this. But this UCS icon, I can just drag it and place it anywhere. I can present it this corner of this box. I can also on this circles in each corner and rotate this into, say this like this. Again, note it in any excessive ceviche or I desire like this, you're going to alter gene x-axis, y-axis, or z-axis. Now, to make it easy, as you see, currently messed up the activity of the X's or ordinary for this drawing. Now you can see that is not what we started at language. So by mistake or by any error, if you just change the x's of destroying or excuse off any drawing, you can switch it back to normal by clicking on this word option, we'll disuse CSB word mismatch movements. If I click on this, the original position of the UCS that we started drawing from will be retain it position. Now let's move on to this next option that we have rotations for this vector quantities. They can alter this UCS in the x exists direction. If I click on why, I wouldn't be able to rotate this in y axis direction. And if I click on this said, I will be able to look at this. Xs has put their detection. I hope this is visible and you are understanding. Now, let's move on to the next option that is object. Or you can see there are three points. So if I click on this first option of what in it, I can set up a menu for different types of views here. So in Alicante is 3.1 option. So I can place this UCS, this bromide is there in any part of this plane. I can place it on top of this box. And then I can know, do I have to switch the Xs, that is X for this, and I will switch y axis for this. So this is how I just manually entered the UCS. What is noting from this box? If I click on this board, it will be back to its original place that we previously started by drawing. Next option here we get is Previous. So when I click on this previous option, this will move the UCAS to its previous position that we used. It is similar to what we used in Zoom. Do that we can switch back to the previous Zoom Data Model head. So if I click on this previous UCSB, we're back to this previous position. And before that, the clique work to make it pretty foil. Now, next option here we have this view. So suppose this is my current view, okay? This is my current view that I'm doing this box form. So if I click on this drop-down button and click on View, the x and y-axis will be better, or you can say perpendicular to my current view. What does that mean is it will create a top view on that view. So if I drag and again, select this, you can see that uses icon is now changing its position. So if I click on this view, but, and again, this will be my top view. So if I go to the front view, this is how it looks from the front view. And I can make this top view again electric mode this. So you can just manually change the UCS. Or you can say, many really tends to exist of this x, y, z it may clicking on this view option to your current view. But I suggest you do not do that because this will only clear to our iterations on your model and make, create some visual editors. So I currently see, you can see that this is all messed up on this word option. It will be back to its original place and I can just double it to the top view, back again, like this. Now we are made to its original position. The next option here that we have is that is face option. So the Vox has so many shapes. So I can just click on this box and I can place my UCS icon where you see as xs origination and coordinates on this box. So true that oblique on this face option and you select this face. Now, either I can accept it or I can sense the next phase. If I not satisfied with this position, I can pass it over to you. So next option is object. And I click on this object, switch B back to report by clicking on white option. And next smokes and option is object. This will automatically potato usurious to an object reference. So if I click this box object, if I sit up around this point, this video creator orientation from this box that is attached to this box. It is attached to a plane surface on this box. This is how you can arrange body. You can modify the different coordinates in 3D modeling space. Thank you for watching. 86. Navigation in 3D modeling: Welcome back. Earlier, we learned about this coordinate system and this UCS icon off auto peg. In this tutorial, we learned some basic navigation, tell whether it was working in 3D space. So if I draw a box here, for example, okay, I were drawn and rocks here. So I can zoom in and zoom out as we studied earlier. I can orbit around by pressing shift and middle mouse button like this. So you can see currently the orbit is set from the box as Escape key. And they know what a big box. You can see that the ultimate origin of this green, a green eye contact is visible on screen, is currently set to the middle of this box. So if I draw another box here, and I click on this, you can see that the green icon is shifted between these two walk slightly on the left side box. So the auto-grader will automatically choose the center point from this entity, starting point and ending point of this entity, and create a center point so we can read around and help clear view of our proper model. So this is how you can orbit around in AutoCad. And if I select this box, and then I press the Shift key and middle mouse button to orbit. The center point of origin of water will be set to the center point of that box. So you can see that on the screen like this, and while I'm orbiting through this box or that all the components and mortars or whatever on screen will be invisible. So if I click shift and middle mouse button to another box, it will disappear. This is how you can all read around in screen on AutoCad. Now, earlier we discussed that we will go through these other options available in this navigation bar. Introduce ugly. So let's get started by this full navigation wheel. But before that, we will see some band around. Do that is we already studied. We can just pan around by this and we can also do that with terminated mouseClicked. Next option is Zoom. We already studied some options in 2D. This clean. Next option is orbit. We just started daughter bit option. Now you can move it around like this, begging this orbit option available in this navigation bar. So this originator or weak command. Next option here is navigation wheel. So when I click on this navigation, we'll, uh, we'll build up your onscreen. You can see that I can just move my cursor around. And I can also select the options within this with this green highlight. So if I need to zoom in my model, I can click on the Zoom button and I can zoom in and zoom out to the pivot point. So if I click on Zoom icon over here is we create by what point from a dead end. Next option here is orbit. We already started so orbit. So if a clique, normally if I drag the circle on this corner and X-Y coordinate option, it will create orbit 0 pilot point from the last originated zoom option. So first my Zoom option was here. Now it'll be connoted. So there might be what point for this orbiting means if I click here and zoom, the point is set to year. So even doesn't matter if I drag the circle here. And Greek, greek on orbit may be what point will be the last point used in Zoom? Which none that option is rewind. So when I click on this reminder option, I can switch back to different types of navigation that I had earlier. Song is you can through this, you can remind your navigation that we read earlier. Next option is ban. We already saw it on soil. What is bang in auto ahead. And we also have another four option between this navigation. We saw a week on the center. This will let me clue tools might be what point on this drawing? So this Brewer point 0, 1, this, and this will take my circle on the port point. And this was shipped whole model as a center point of origination. So if I click Center and drag this over here, now, it was used to drawing that is entirely shifted as that point is my center point from this, all the four coordinates. So all the four coordinates, the Meetup practice center point. Next option is walk. So if I zoom in and say I want to walk, I'll be able to walk around with this to clicking and dragging the mouse keys. You can see that there is arrow appearing on screen. Through this, I can walk around. And if I go to this affecting this arrow far away from this circle to increase my speed of walking. If I take each new, like this little bit, it will move slowly. If I take it a little bit further, it will move. It would increase the speed of moving in this direction. The next option is up and down. I can go up and down to this options. To do that, I will go to the front view. And you can see as V activity at the Walk command, this opened the sky in AutoCad. We will come to that later. So when I click on this open downward and I can go to the top and worked on you like this. Again, it just go using Autopilot to this option. Next one is Luke. So when I click on this loop button, I can look down through this navigation. We'll, just, without changing my current position, I'm looping codon from the same point. So this is an irrigation in AutoCad. Loosen practice and play around with the tools to understand them better. Thank you for watching. 87. Selection and Gizmos: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will discuss about selection in 3D modelling space, and it gets more in 3D modelling. So I will draw a box here to get started. Okay, the current visual style is saved to conceptual for your information. I switched that to shared soft gray. Okay, now we have this selection option here, selection penalty year, and via various characters in this option. So currently it is set to no filter. So what does that mean? If I see, Let me go to this box between highlight this 3D solid box. When I click on this, the whole box will be selected. Now, if I choose to vertex option only, when I select this, only the corner vertex point of this box will be selected. Suppose if I select this whole box, you can see that only points of the corners I highlighted that are called vertex. So on the electing this, on this red dots are highlighted. I hope this is visible to you. Now. The next option here is that is age. So before that, if I try to direct this point around cities, all these points I've been wrecked together. But if I take this single point and I tried to correct this, it really form the box. You can see this this is out of the box, will be deformed if I tried to create a single point of vertex. This means that this works is not selected. Only the part of this box is being selected. Next option here is, so the next option here is age. So then a tried to select this with our Azure option. The edge of this box will be selected means only these edges this box has will be selected length is, again, if I drag my arrow cursor to this, it will only highlight the edges of the box, not the whole box. So this is how you can select the edge of a box. Next option here is freeze. So this will only select selected faces of his books like this. When a click on this, only, this face will be selected, not the whole box. You can easily select this face and you can move it around or drag it around like this and deform the shapes. The next option here is sorted history. So with the solid history option, if I click on this box, if this works, was deformed from any solid shape here, it will highlight it, but currently it is not, so it is not isolating this box. Next option is 20 MUX component. We'll get to this option later. Now, let's learn about gizmo in AutoCad and we did it this box. And I will create a new box here. So on selecting this box, if I select this book, you'll see there are three arrows appearing on this center of this box. That adequate Gizmo. So if I want to drag it around in said x is, I can switch to this blue arrow. And if I click on this blue arrow, I can read around this blue Xs. If I go to the front view, you can understand this pager. Again, move this box and this blue exists like this. I can also drag it in. Red exists like this. And I can also record in green exist similarly like this. So let's understand is in 2D view. Now, when I switch to 3D view, I can move around this box. I can break it on upside. Again, drake, it cried side leg. Similarly, you can just move around this box from its origination center point through this gizmo. Now, we have a few types of Gizmo in auto head. The first one is more Bismuth that we are already seeing on the screen. If I click on this movie small change direction pen and trip down this arrow key, I have another three types of nice most. The next one is rotate Gizmo. If I click on this rotate gizmo option, you can see that the gizmos 10 of this box is now changed to rotate Gizmo. If I click any other object and like this, this all objects will have now rotate Gizmo. So with rotates, rotate gizmo. Negatives. Again rotate this books from its center point like this. In trade x's, in green X's or in blue Xs. This is how I can order this books comic center point in various types of detections through this rocket is more. The next option is very interesting. Okay, so I was led to this box and I will switch to Scale Gizmo. And I click on the Scale Gizmo option. This will let me scale the box invidious detection. You can see that the triangles are appearing that connects all these arrows. So if I click on this blue one, I can scale this box up from its original length. I can either make it bigger or I can make it smaller with all this direction options. This works similarly in all directions like this. You can also turn on and on and change those place of this gizmo for this books like this, this new skill, my walks or object or moral indifferent style. So I can either make it league larger or smaller with the Scale Gizmo option. So it is always better to keep it default to movies more when you do not require any other modification. But when you need to look at the optics, you should keep it in. Rotate is more option. Scale Gizmo option is least used in AutoCad. Next option available is known Gizmo. So the student would remove any type of his most notable for you to modify any books or change its place. So, but I'm really enormous motion this books, There's no displaying is more on the screen. I'll switch back to movies more. And this will appear bakery in onscreen. So this is all about ECMO and selection in AutoCad. Thank you for watching. 88. Extrude: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we learned about extrude commanding AutoCad, what is x-coordinate of Ed? So we are doing currently boxes statically from this blend me create a plane surface and then we extrude it as a box. But suppose, okay, I will first mentioned data via the Stroke command or draw panel in this AutoCad SVR in to me, it looks same as 2D, so I don't need to explain that in detail. So I will select a rectangle here, and I will draw a rectangle. Now we're ready to do a rectangle here. Now, if I need to create this rectangle into 3D, or you can say convert this rectangle into a plane or a model. I can do that with the execute command. To execute command is available in Create panel in home Deb in this 3D workspace. So I'll click on this export option and select this box. And I will press Enter. Once I press Enter, this will ask me to define a height for this extrusion and we define the file. But I can also do that with the mouse option like this. There are different file and press Enter. Now we extrude this rectangle into a box on 3D model. So this is our excerpt command works. Now, the shortcut key for the execute command that is EXT, and you can press Enter and the execute command will be activated. Again, not extrude or re-extract of walks that is already more do. Now I will create another rectangle. And we will learn how to extrude in a path. So let's say create a rectangle here. I will delete this one. Now. I want to extrude this into code direction. So I will try to draw arc here in the center of origin. Okay? You can see that I cannot draw arc in 3D space currently. So I will rotate this XYZ did UCS for that. So I will rotate this UCS and convert this x y to this. Now, our x y direction is switched to this option. So I will draw arc that is perpendicular to this rectangle option. Okay? Like this. And I will switch back to normal UCS mechanism on this word option that we have already studied to this and earlier lectures. Now you can see that I have this box or rectangle drawn here. And we will try to extrude this box in the code shape of this arc. Could do that. I will activate Extrude command, command line EXT, that is the shortcut. Press Enter. Now, the command lines eight legs the optics 10 unit to extrude. I will select this box or rectangle and press Enter. The next options is select the option or detection part, taper angle or expression. I will select the path option here. And I will select this code as a path. Once I click on this, it will convert it into a code extrusion. So let's see that. As soon as I clicked on it, it converted into a cobra extrusion. You can extrude this in various paths and forms in AutoCad. So this is basic example of how to use a Extrude command in autocad in 3D modelling. But we will then go through this brace blue combined in coming lectures, which is more beneficial and more used compared to this execute command. Thank you for watching. 89. Revolve: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we, we didn't know about dual credit score retrieval in 2D model of AutoCad. Now into the morning discipline real various tools to give a bath or create a profile that he will cool, walks around the same. So if I want to revolve profile or a specific path, I can do that type of level due to demonstrate text, I will create a rectangle year. This will be my profile for the part. Now I will create some designs lambdas, see, draw a line you currently residing duty over the top view and create some lines here like this. Okay, this looks fine. Or dream the extra parts. Okay? Now we have this profile, total debt go down to a specific part. Whatever we were doing is I will first join everything, cleared it to no single entity with the join command and press Enter. Now this whole reelect as a single entity. Now, create other nine year. And the default is on this line. So firstly we click on this and then see it is, it is converted into single entity. I remove the society. Sorry. So let's see what we will do. The revolve tool is OWN Create panel in home Deb. I will be consciously will do, and I will select this as an object to be revolt. So common lenses, dead select objects, foodie volt. So on this. Now I will press enter. Now this is asking me to specify exist dark point or define x's. So redefine this as a start point. And this is my a, this endpoint. You can see that now this box or redesign is revolving around this grating itself into a solid mesh or a solid model. I can choose a specific diameter. You're going to hit specific angle for this rotation. If I give you a 360 degree rotation here, and if I say 180, and press Enter the superior half rotation here. So this is how you can use a revolt tool to create various type of structures in order paired. Thank you for watching. 90. Loft: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about loft tool in 3D modeling discipline of auto head. The loft tool is available in Create panel in home time in 3D workspace. You can see this icon is for block 2. By this icon, you might be having an idea what does fluff tool does. I will draw C L, first draw rectangle here. And I will do another rectangle in the middle of this box. I will draw one more rectangle. Somewhat bigger then this rectangle. Now what we will do is we will shift to front view was Devin select this rectangle. That is, so test 1. I will drag it upwards from the height of this rectangle around here. Okay, for several days. Now it's fine. Now let's just take it somewhere around here. And I reject this medium-size rectangle about that one. Now, you can see that reorients this rectangle in a symmetrical form that David's original exits make eating each other from the center point. Now, I would activate the loft too. Once you activated off to the command line says select cross-sections in drafting order. So I need to love this first, second, third, now you might be having an idea what does love tutors. It will smoothen the surface and create a loft around the corner. Now, we have two morphs and disliked. One is surface and solid. When you click on Solid, this hole will be created in a solid form. An ugly conserve phrase. This, all this. You can see that there are so many exists on lines available in this figure currently. So this all will be created as separate planes, means it is all planes p-v selected individually. So surface is not rebel option for 3D modeling. So we'll go with two solid. And I will press, once you press Enter, this will be selected and press Enter again. Now we created a 3D model by lifting these three rectangles. When a Moses, the last will be available in three more thing that we used as a mold will also be available. You can also do this with the radius 2. Suppose if I draw a rectangle here, and I will draw a pentagon onto the top of this C sides. Should we never draw pen Taiwan from the sine term inscribing circle. I'll move this a little bit about this height. And I will select love to recall this is a long acting, this will be seeking option. You can see that says how you can create a locked in different options and shapes are labeled in AutoCad. Now I will press enter and well-being for a centered, you can create various types of law through this icons and trying. Now let's see another option in law school. So if I'm drawing a circle here, I will draw circle year. I will draw another circle here. And never crank it up ports somewhere around here. Now, using all that, I have created two circles in this form, data each other. So I will create love to actually let this an except I'm selecting this first. I will also do select this point option available in this command line. When I click on this point option, it will ask me to select it, specify left endpoint. So I will select the center point is a loft end point. Now you can see this. You can be co-created a loft on this circular format when DO part. This is how the loft tool works in AutoCad. We have few more options in Locked-in. Let's see that. Okay, so let's learn another feature of loft tool. So I will do rectangle here first is perfect, and I will copy this rectangle is similar. So return whatever the height of the return on also. And I'll just click, Okay, now this looks fine. This is to the bone whose height? Okay? Now this looks perfect. We'll do rectangles placed over each other like this. Now what I will be doing is, and when you do path to this recently in extrude option, we saw that we gave a call to a rectangle and we extract NDT now, circular or curvature form. Now, in this option, we will do it similarly, but we do guides. So it was shorted this in order to draw in different x's. Okay? I will draw an arc connecting this bullet points. I would just say. Okay, now I will draw on this side, just this lake ways. Okay. Now you can see me there, David deform the shape or you can say extrude the shaping group form. I will login. I will select this as my first law section, select the set of second law of section. And you can see there is a space that is only when we went to here. Now we will offset it into that direction. But you can see I need to first fix this to this corner points in order to make it a perfect law of gravity. This corner point, now it looks perfect and we don't do it the loft tool, select this as a forced second 11 night press enter via this different option on the screen. You can see that wheel, this Guides option, will just perform that right now. But before that, let's understand this path via already studied this boss option into Extrude command. Next option is cross-sections already. This is what we've been doing recently, and another one is settings. So let's take the guide, will select this as my postcard, and select this as a second guide. You can see that now this box is deformed from two sides with the help of this arc is a guide. And I will press Enter and this will activate the final model. Now we are finally model of this box that is a newly formed from two sides with this help of arc, you can see this is how you can use a loft tool in order paired. I would have even switch back to normal UCs, make dealing on this void. Okay. So this option is used to create a various type of profiles in AutoCad. We will see more about other options in coming lectures. Thank you for watching. 91. Sweep: Welcome back. In this tutorial, you will learn as commanding AutoCad. So the sweep tool is available in Create panel in this Home tab option. Now what is with previously we saw that we extrude command. We can just direct oh, booty file into a 3D model to loft command rename can do different shapes and guides by extruding the object. And through sweep command, you can create a section and then mortality into specific. But so I will draw a profile here, section profile there will be mighty kingdom. Now, what I will do is I'll create a section here to see how it's accelerating. Okay, now I will create a spline. I would do it as blind. You don't have Ortho. Now I will eat regular spline on my screen. Now you can see that V0 is playing on my screen. Now, I want to extrude this throughout this specific part. So in order to do that, I can use this pip command. I will click on this option. Now I will select the street based. My object is the command line says select object to sleep. I will select this object to sweep. Press enter. Now I will select this as about this one. As I click on this, this command will take the profile of this rectangle into two, this whole butt. This is how you can create different shapes in AutoCad to sleep command. Next option we can see in sweep is we can create a circular profile like this. And again create displaying. Now I will select this command, this as my object that we skipped, press Enter. Now we can select this opening and we can also have a scale factor. There is a specific data transform effect on it, 2.5 and press Enter. And when I select this as a bad, So could we be skewed grid on this, but completely Bettina, half of the size of it. So you can see that as soon as it is visible, that form this point, it is in one. But as soon as she said this, but this is degraded into off means it is excretion is one-to-five scale factor from this point towards that point, this is how you can use this command in AutoCad. Thank you for watching. 92. Presspull: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we learn about our new command data sprays pool. This is one of the editing booths in a really brilliant editing panel. Now, earlier we learned about extrude revolve Afghans, VIP, David, all quite similar to each other. But press pull is a modification weren't enough, all of that. You can suppose if I am drawing a rectangle here like this, now, I will extrude this to extrude command. Okay? I have extra create this rectangle into a box. Now, if I wish to extrude this side more, or if they've reached where you decide faces of this, decrease. This bought into this. And I want to increase the size of this box toward this side, I cannot do it with extra blue. If I click on Extrude command again, we want to exclude this path or this side of this works. I can not do that for their day. We'll be able to clear DO DO file again and choose flip this around for that. You can do that with the help of the base pool. The shortcut key for the press pool is b. B, sorry, that is pressed. Press pool once a day, press the principal commodity to be activated. Now, if I select this side of, you can see that the feces isolated as soon as a more makers over 10. So if I select this side and click on it, I can either edit or decrease. Though you can say I can either press it. But bullied outside the table rule. It doesn't normally work in tech way. You can also do that. Suppose if I have this blocks here and I want to make clear to haul on this. So it will do so CO2 and I will draw a circle on the top of this, but I hope it is visible to you. I will change it blue shades of gray and make it invisible. Now we go to an ascetical on the dove off this box. We were to disprove, press this down to create a hole in this box where the activity place would move from here. Now we'll commonly see selects octet rule. What boundary? The idea that he took the circle as an object. Sorry, I was elected circle forced know, cleared this or oblique on this press pool. This is my mom. Great idea. I click on this and as soon as a gourd, this point, this loop here to hold, and it's sort of this box through this set of code. This is how you can use press Command. And as you can see, this is modification on the extra room. So it is better to use press pool when you want to add your dog texts rather than creating a new object with a modified tenses. This, you can also determine various type of shapes you've been added them basic insight or Boolean doubt. Check this out of the benefits of Facebook group compared to the extra. Thank you for watching. 93. Union Intersect and Substract: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about some other editing options already been ignored. Okay? We'll just three new options available next to the press pull command, that is union, subtract and intersect. So suppose, say I've ever drawn a box here. Okay? Now we have this box on our screen. What I'm doing is I will create another circle on the top of it. And I will just press pull this circle is a new anti-de. Okay? Now we have two objects available on screen. When you click on this, this bow tie combining Guan, because I used to press boop, boop, right? Now. If I will just undo that. Suppose c, If I have created a circle and rather than risk pooling means it is originated from this box. I press pull from this box. If I use an extra tool, circle, if I use expert for the circle, and when I click on this cylinder, it is a different entity other than box. Box is a different entity and this cylinder is a different entity. If I wish to create or combined this both without using the Facebook group I can do with the union. So what I will be doing is every day to it the union command or union do it from this edit pennant, availability, Home tab, and click on this union. As soon as I knew that the union command line say Set select the objects I was like This is my first object and second object. Once done, just press Enter. This will combine these two objects into one. Now, this boycott of single uptake or single entity. You can see that on screen it works both ways. Suppose if I draw another box here, right? Now, I need to join this bot box with each other. If I just make it a little bit into this side, now this walks back combined with each other. So what we're doing is to create this bolt into a single shape. I will select both of them. Then I would click on this union to assume that they do that. Now this box will be selected. Both of them one by one and press Enter. On doing so. Disport books got nano single union in AutoCad. What if the detection or you're going to take the distance between toolbox. So let's take it out. If my walks is here. And I wish to combine this book with this whole complete new shape. Can we do that with the union to take it out? As you let union booth I was elected for stop tick and select second note. And I will present data on doing so. This MOOC ticks will be created into a single entity. Now this older objects will act as a single entity in this drawing. But you can see that now this shape is nothing but a single entity or a single model. That is what origination is one. Let's move to the next tool that is subtract 2. I will delete this for now. I'll go with the default view, corner view as a theater box here. And I will create a cylinder you. Okay, so as you can see that I was a mesh this cylinder inside this box, somewhere around here. Now, if I wish to subtract this part from this, I can do that with a subtract 2. Subtract 2 from this edit panel. Now I was like this as a full stop tech and press Enter. Now command line says select another octet. So to walk through the my second object, and I would press Enter. As soon as I press Enter, this box will be subtracted from this cylinder. I would do that. Okay, now that we track, deciding that from this box. So except up choosing this box, sorry, the cylinder first would be to choose this box first. So I've given you up to subtract two from this very panel or form debt, I will select this box as opposed optic, press Enter, select this sitting there as the second object, and press Enter. Now you can see that it's hitting that is subtracted from this box, leaving this as a shape off sitting that it was mashed into it. So this is our subject. Move up in AutoCad. Now, let's learn about new boutique that is intersect to unleash it reaches mesh. This influenza does entity or geometry part of this objects. Now, if I match this object inside this box, right? You can see that this is currently machine sectors walks and that is some geometry that is combining or there is overlapping each other. We'd win this Dropbox or sitting there as well as this box. So if I only want that part and test of this objects to be separated from this geometry. I can do that with the intersect to use tech, and we just really consent to intersect two. I will select this box as my first object, press C, and then select this as my second object and press Enter. As soon as I do that, the word object part or geometry that is combined from this multi-part will be left out. And rest of the parts of this both objects for 3D data. This is how you can use this intersect in AutoCad. I would undo that and look around for one more option. That is another tool that is available yet. And it is quote, interfere do now. What does interfere to when we use this intersect with the bottle overlapping parts of this box. So I will click on this edit button. I will go to the stripe cooperate option of labor according to see it with this red box and at all now the interfered with this activity and select this box as a force 2 1, press Enter. Next is sitting at a second one and breast angular. This will highlight me the bark. And you can see this, this is the Arctic. Many intersect this objects. This will be visible to me. So I can use this for and night. You can say that taking interference checking of this components. This shows me that this part and this part are currently mashed into each other. So this is all about this Who's in auto bag. Thank you for watching. 94. Mesh and Surface Plannar: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about some mesh tools and sort of faces. So we have currently been doing this. Objects in 2D planes or in regular style that we usually do. So currently the visual style is shared, so pretty. But these are nothing but a truly lines that we convert read that into a press Pull tool. Similar thing but to truly lines that we later converting two models to extrude command and press pull options. But if you wish to literally draw sort of phase plans, suppose if I want to draw a rectangle, I will draw a rectangle. Then I will extrude this into a plane. But what if I just want to detect finger to be a single plane? So if I need to create a ground for this house, for example, let's imagine this is an owl's, okay, now I need to create a ground for that. I cannot have this. So you're not held this rectangle as a Chrome which is empty. It can rotate material to this trauma tree. When we come to the first section, we will learn about creating materials to models. So potency for now I can notate the material to this geometry. Now, clue that we need to create a blend surface does not have any thickness, but it is a subspace. So you can just click on this Create option. Now, when you click it, click on this Create dropdown. But in real this planner surface options here. First, we are going to focus on this planner object only this a little later. Optics are very similar to this modifying options that we will be learning in further lectures. So let's understand the difference between planner and do a normal rectangle. Already did this 3D model. And I'll create a rectangle year. Similarly, I will create another rectangle. This planet command lines planes of status. Now you can see that this both our rectangle, this both are same. Okay? Just ignore the size difference. This both are same rectangles and this is nothing but a simple surface. They both Hell no thickness. This is 0. This both contains 0 thickness, but it is a surface, this contains a plane and discontent is hollow. This means that it is just like write it. This is a plane surface. Now, if you wish to convert this into a plane surface like this, you can do that with the planner command. So I will type Blaine surf on the screen and I'll press enter. Once you do that, it says that specify the force point. So I can either draw a rectangular shape like this, or I can select the object option from this command line and click on this object. Now, the plane surface sees that select objects. So I will click on the circle and press Enter. Now this circle is converted into a plane surface. I can do that similar with this rectangle to have a prototype plane. So press Enter and then click on soft tick button. I'll click this and press Enter. Now, this is how you create a plane surface mode, okay? Now we have other options here that are called mesh objects. So first I would direct this. It is quite similar to the difference between our normal erecting, but in a blender, architecting good soil create a pedometer here. Right. Now, you can see that this is a pyramid selected, okay? This is being highlighted in a blue form. So you can see that it does not have any x's on it. Now what are my shop texts? Who go to the Create option and we have the similar options for anybody here. And we'll go to this folder options, incoming modifying options too. But for now let's focus in this pyramid. So this is a mesh quantity. I would select this mesh pyramid from this mesh option, and it would be it a mesh pyramid. This is very similar to what we are doing earlier. See this. Both are grown objects and this wouldn't, does not have any your similarity, sorry, this book does not have any difference in them. Only the different Thetas. If I select this one, it will not show me any edges. But this is currently divided into H's for better placement. So if I'm working on a detailed work and I need some edges on this to understand the midpoint and center point and the vertex is on this drawing. I can do that with the help of this two that is called mesh objects. So either you can treat as normal objects from this period primitives or you can go to Mesh Primitives from this Create panel data available over here. So this is between difference between Lana's that oppresses, mess up her faces and available to primitive shapes and objects and OK, OK. Thank you for watching. 95. Editing and Modifying tools: Welcome back. Previously, we started creating and we have seen mortifying Vegas geometries in 3D modeling in AutoCad. We learned about extrude, revolve, love, sweep, press pool and various other modifying tools in AutoCad. Now in this tutorial, we'll go through some various and important editing tools that will help us creating a 3D geometry when you are working on an actual project. So to get started, I would draw a box here. I will draw a box of 10 by 10 units. Now we'll give it a height of 10 units equally. So this is a cube of ten Bye, land on each side. Right? Now, what we'll do is we'll start by using the editing tools authors. 13 tools we have already seen not graceful union, subtract and intersect. More editing tools available in Edit, drop-down button. The first line here we see out all the editing tools. The second line here is hoarse or phrase 2s. And the third line here is for mesh tools. We already learned about surface and mesh over here. But you can see that these all dues are similar and have similar approach to the 3D modelling. So we only go through the primitive tools that are used for this box and other objects. So let's start with this editing tools. The first tool here you have is called phyllite. Now we let edge option is available in this edit panel in Home tab magnesium on this drop-down button, everybody can just fill that edge option. Now, when I move my cursor on this box, must know part is highlighted. But you will notice that when I move my cursor on this edge, the edge is highlighted by with a white line like this. I hope this is visible to you. And when I move cursor on this edge, it will be highlighted. So I can say I want to fill out why I wanted to create a code blend surface on this side of the box. What I will do is I will click on this edge, like this. Now you can see that the auto-grader is displaying me. What will the fill it look like after the command is activated? Now, if I'm satisfied with this, I can press Enter or if I want, I contend the radius of this Villette thrown this command line. Command line says select an edge or define a radius loop what chain? So we will call click on this radius Putin. Current radius is set to three. I will change it to 2.5 and press Enter. You can see that the size of this cullet has been reduced. If I click on file, the length of the radius would increase, sorry, every conscious radius and make it 50 and press Enter. This is how it will look off to the villages. Don't on this box. So this is quite a bit. So I will make it three again and press Enter. Once I'm satisfied, I'll press Enter. Now, this will showcase me, you how it would look after the final application of roulette on this box. So if I'm satisfied, I can press Enter or I can revert back to the other options that will be used the available. You can also read command line says that press enter to accept affiliate origins radius. So either we can change the radius again or we can press enter to have this elected or health is our final option. So I'll press Enter. Now, the fill light is made on this box or in this geometry icon with a cold surface. This book's has now fill it. Now next tool we learned about was shameful via already seen fill it and chamfer into the discipline. But in this 3D modelling, it is kind of different approach. You might have noticed this here. Now, let's say I want to create a chamfer on this edge. This is work, this works similar with what we didn't predict except of Villette. We will define a template for these two. So the timber tool is available in the Edit panel with the second icon that is called temporary. It's what we call this team for Edge command line says select an edge or Luke or distance. So first I will define an edge. If I wanted to create a chamfer on this, I remove my color over there and click on this. Now you can see that it is pretty defining the team performing tight. You just physical, but we can also adjust the distance for the same every con distance. And I will make first descends to be 2. Second instance to Week Two. Two. So once turn, I can press Enter and accepted. Now, there's a slight difference between Pilate and tempo. Here you can see when it is showing me this rough diagram or rough approach before to be converted into a final object. It has two arrows over here. I can click on this arrow and I just the height. Or you can say that distance again. And I can click on this arrow and it just second distance like this. If you are not satisfied, you're going to either enter the distance manually, but you can change through this arrows like this. So once done user to press Enter. Now, I've walks will help this temper. And this pellet is defined on it, says how Jim for and fill IT Toolbox in AutoCad. So this was what about template and fill it in autocad. Now let's move on to the next option that is extract edges. So the extract edges is option is only in this independent act. The third icon, you can see that it has a box without any multi-year automation inside it. What does extract edges? Currently, you can see that this box is a hole, or you can say it is a whole geometry. And a deep on this arrows I can move around this books in various plane like this. Okay? Now, you might have noticed that there are so many it is on this box. If I need to create a copy of this edges, I can do that with text extract H2. So what I will do is I will go to the Edit panel, select Extract as Option. Click on it. Once I click on it, command line asking me to select an object, it say select objects. I select this box and press enter. Now, you may notice that there is no difference on the screen or of this box, but a copy of edge is already created at this place. To see that I will click on this box and I'll move it aside like this. Then I do that. You can see that a copy of all the edges of this box have we created it displays, see negatives. But you can see that when I click on this box or a single edge of this box, this is all a single geometry and entity. While in this, all the edges are individual entity means they do not form a single geometric 2D model. So if I click on this line, this line will be a single geometry of this edge section. So this is how you can extract ease of walks without deleting the walks mesh. I will delete this. Next option here we have is slice option. It is very interesting option you've messed. Pay attention to this. Now, if I want to create two slices of this box, I can do that little slice option means in short, we can put this box into any plane and objects we require. So to understand this, I will create another two objects. Say one will be fine. Now let's see first slice tool, I will go to the eric Ban and extract or evoke the place to really call it. Now, I'm on line, says select objects to slice and we select this box, press Enter. Now, it's been command line is saying that specify the start point of sliding. So either I can define a start point or is that I can do it with the three points that we already see how we draw a circle. So it is very similar to creating the three points 123. This was led, this walks into triangular form with a straight edge. We already have another option that we view, option x, y, and y is at index option that will help us analyze these blocks into different sections. So it was, let's check out the normals lasing option that is selecting it first. So I was getting my point with this. Now I was like my second to be this. Now, what is the third option do here is I need to select either this side or this side. We already created from this middle point to this middle point, a slice, but it is not visible yet. So if I want to read it this side, on this side. So other side of this box will be detailed. This is how we can use the slice to, but it is very similar to, you can just extrude or brace pool this box inside, right? Now suppose, say I want this box to be in two pieces, but I want the, both the sides to be at the same time. Means I do not wish to read it. The other part of this lies. So I live in Google slides too. I will select this object, press Enter as it is my final object. I will give my midpoint over here for this lies by its length the second over here. Now, you can see that either if I select this side, the other side will be deleted. If I select this side, it will stain and other side will be deleted. So in this case, I need both the side of the blocks but in a different two shapes. So I will select this clip both sides from the command line option and press on it. Okay? You see that we have an edge between these two box means that this box is now noticing called union or it is not a single object. It is divided into two different objects like this. This is what Slice tool will help us do into parks in the 3D modelling boxes or another, any other 3D modeling object. Next option we have here is called taken, right? So let's say we have a planner object. We have already studied about this in previous lectures. Euclidean small blend. Now, as we discussed earlier, this is just a rectangle with a surface. It does not have any thickness. So if I want to have good with this thickness, I can do that with the help of the option. I'll click on this second option. Now, command line says select surfaces to Tikkun. I will click on this surface and press Enter. Now we have to define the thickness for this plane that by default value set to one. So I will set it to three and press Enter. Now this blend surface hair, hair thickness and it is converted into object, means that there is no copy that is above the planet's surface, this whole planet's surface. Suppose country into a box with a height of three. This is our, we used a deacon octet rule in AutoCad. Next option we have here is called taper to do demonstrate debt. I was just extrude or say press pause this slide to be around this. Okay, we have a perfect box here. Now, let's understand to taper to move this aside. Now, I believe on this table tool option from this editing panel. Once you do that, the command line says it's electrophoresis. Soy is the ok. Now pay attention here. When I move my cursor in this deeper to the whole opposite is highlighted, means that we are not sure which side of the object will be selected. So if I want to create a taper on this side, I will make sure that my cursor is slightly outside the entity. Miss it in this corner of the face, which will avoid by mistake Lee choosing any side of this object that are not currently visible to this view. So Microsoft around this corner and click on it. Once you click on it, it will highlight the side that is choose, but you do have to make sure that no other side of this object is chosen currently, and only one side of the object you're doing wish to create a taper is chosen. Once done with just a little bleak anger. Or if you are not satisfied with this side, you can either remove or undo or you can see that all of the side of this box. So enter. Now command line says that specify the base point. So if I specify this as my base point, this will stay at the same position, but this side of the object will be tabled inside as we define the angle for that. So keep this as my base point. Now, I have to give a second for the tapering. So click on this and the second for the tempering. Now i o do define an angle. So why redefines angle of one? Okay, this 15? That will be fine. I'll press Enter. As soon as I press enter, either you can edit it. So sorry, us are suitably connected button and exit the command. Now you can see that we created a taper on this box at the angle of 15 from this side, towards this side. This is how you can use the temperature on different objects in 3D modelling. The next option here is extra pieces. So we need, we can just extrude a brave face off an object through different paths. So click on this, I will select this object. Once done, I press anger and I was even hide off, say around 10 units. Press Enter. This will extrude the face to the 10 units, but it is asking me for the angle. So let 0 be the angle and press Enter. Once done, you can exit. The command is given by pressing on the Exit button. And I've been pressing this exit button. So this command, you can extrude two pieces of any object in multivariate. The next option we have is offset faces. So tools option you can create offset of in-phase. So if equity fund this offset option, and I will select this top of this box, I'll press Enter. Now we have to specify the offset distance, so I will just move to the front view. So this will be visible and see you distance of 50 units and brace, and then they exit it, and they will exit the command again. So this one do anything for you. This is not much different than extruding phases. This discrete, it's an offset of this phase Towards the defined height. So we just created these two boxes and we agitate them with us edit tools in AutoCad. So we already gone through this interface option. Now this is all about and you think Benadryl photo. Okay, moving on to the next modifying penalty. This is quite similar to what we did is not quite sin. We want to this multifunctional. This is totally similar to what we studied earlier, n2, n3 disability. So we do not need to go through that again. So this is how you can use the editing tools and modifying tools in autocad, in 3D modelling. Thank you. 96. 3D Align: Welcome back. Previously, we learned about radius mortifying energy inducing Motorhead. In this tutorial vehicles, What are the three options that I used for modification in AutoCad? The first one is 3D 2D, a line in 2D a. Well, this concept similar to what we studied in 2D, but as this is in TDD siblings, we will go through them was okay. So I will create a box here of the site. I will give you different shape on the top of it. That will give me the coin. I will give another shape. I'm just creating a random shape here. So it is not necessary to do that. Well, you are practicing, you're going to do whatever you are wishing to draw, but then it dissolve and create a union of this means now this is a single entity and click on union, select objects and press Enter. Now this box is a single entity, right? So what I will do is I'll create a mirror of this object. So when I click on this 3D meter, it will activate the 3-meter command dataset wherever in modifying banner. And if you do not see that, you're going to click on this drop-down icon includes elected 3D minute option. Now, I will click on this optic is the command line states that select optics and you select this object, press Enter. Now we have various options here. Either we can create a meter on this last exist. We can create a point, wine to light. We can create his line between this and create a minute on this site. We can again do it again. Zed x is view, we can lose it may view wise. So if I click on Save, Okay, let me set the UCS is properly, okay. Now the UCS icon is easily visible. This is my y-axis, this is my x axis. So if I click on x y axis, this will create a meter of this object in x, y axis. So if I click on this, we'll specify the first. So I would just press Enter and that should be default. It selects noise as a source object. So you can see that this created a meter of this object in x-y axes. So this delete it and it'll be gone. This again, we would have inactivate the 3D meter pool. Now similarly, this all x's books the same. Now let's see the 3D points that is activated always by default. So click over here, we're done and also to draw a straight line. And I will draw a line or define a distance for, for this mirror plane, the leaky it. Now, once turn, it is asking me to define a third. So just click over here to say, now this is asking me if I want to need to source object or not. I already know. So you see that your enucleated meter of this 3D model in this plane. Now, if I need to select this object and create a mirror on this side, and you can do that in a different direction. To understand it. We would again go to the 3D mirror option. This time I will turn off also. I will select this object, press Enter or Spacebar. I get this point. That I always get this point, and I will select this point. Now, you'll see that only at what we did was I selected this baseline. I selected this horizontal line that, and then this time I will select this vertical line is my x's. So this will be an L shape here, and the box will be mirrored on this side. And click nano. So this is how you can know the object in order to get the next tool here is 3D line. So if I draw a box here, next is right, I need to align this box with this three corners to this smokes at exit corners as this corner of the box and the second corner of this box matches at the same geometry. It isn't really hard and difficult to set the box x propyl origination with this moving tool. To understand that, we will just use the 3D align tool that is available in modifying Pinot. Make it equal does drop-down button. I will select this 3D line option. Once activated, it will ask me to object to be aligned. So I need to align this opposite. They press on this. I'll press Enter. Now I have to specify a base point. So this will be my base point. Now say can specify that, specify the secondaries point like this. Now I always wear the third base pointer to review this point. And I have to specify the second base point to this point. Now we just need to specify the base point for this box. Select this as my third base point. Now once don't use a pseudo press Enter. This is how you can align this box to this x is now you can see that I align this box at a slant, or you can say at any angle of this. So let's say we will assign another, or you can say. So let's say we align another walks on this phrase. I will draw a box here and click on this box. Now, select this align option. Select this object. Click on this line option specified this as my base point. This is my second and this is my third. Now, you can see that a copy of this object is created by select this as my fourth. I will select this as my second or base point, and I will select this as my third over here. So we align this box exactly to that box over to this point. And it is all living on this box. To dissolve. You can use the align tool in AutoCad. We can have align which is geometries over each other and you can also overlap like this. We will see another example over here. Create a box. We will create another box here. Right? Now we will align this box and this box to each other. Do that. So click on Align Tool, select this object, press Enter, select this as my base point. Select this as my second best point, and select this as my turn-based point. Now, acidic the first destination point, that will be this. This will be my second destination point. And here, or you can say this x is will be my fourth destination point. I was historic added this as my third destination point O here. So this box is exactly aligned on the same exist as we desired in this. X is like this. So do this how you can use the, the line tooling AutoCad. Now, let's move on to the edit tool. This is very easy. If you have understood the previous edit we discussed in 2D formats. I would create a box off one by one. And the same one. Press Enter, sorry. I'll create a box of length one by 11 comma one. Press enter and give it a height of one. Now we have this small box of one unit on. Excellent. I will select this box and you visit it. It's equal to the front view. This is exactly aligned with the x-axis and y-axis will go to the 3D view. Okay? Now we have this, another option that is called 3D. It is surely modify panel that we call the 3D at option. Now, it is asking me to select objects that I want to create an arrow. Click on this box and press Enter. As soon as I do this, this will ask me to create. If I want to create a rectangular area was pull added. We already have studied rectangular and polar area in detail in previous lectures. So this time I will just copy the rectangular array. Now, we need to enter the number of rows we need for this box. So if I want three rows are oppressed three. Now, we need to define the number of columns we require for this box. So I will see three columns right? Now. If you remember, we discussed that the levels are used in to discipline in arrays. So this is why we can use the levels in 2D disciplining at eight. So now we have to define eddies levels for this box. So I keep the distance between each. They will do also B3 and press Enter. Now, what should be the distance between rows have elected be three, and distance between columns will be the same, right? You're going to eat everything on this command line and I press Enter. Once done, this is asking me the difference between the levels. So type three and press Enter. You see that euclidean area of this box with 3D as a distance in column levels and row wise. So this all works have equal distance from each other. If we go to the door for you, you can understand what we are created. And if we went with a front view, we can also see the same option is created. This is like creating a Rubik's cube, but with a distance, Q distance between each group to week 3. This is how you can use the 2D align tool to Demeter goo and to DNA to introduce discipline of autocad. Thank you for watching. 97. Page Setups in AutoCAD: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about page setups in auto head. So allele or we learned about that. This is called a modal space. And when you go here, this is called a layout. So this layout contains a page if you didn't notice this and there is a specific group pore size for the page. Okay, so if I need to print a whole plan on a page, I need some parameters to make it comfortable or you can say make it scaled to the page size. Okay, so there are a few sheets available in Indian standard that is ISO three isoforms type. Okay, So when you want to plot a specific diagram, you will require something that is called Page Setup. You need to set up our size of equal amount, that it will be scaled properly on the page means that it may not be oversized of the page or under size for the page. So to do that, we use paid setups in order. Okay, so to do that, we need to first upload the bland on a page, or you can say page manager. So first of all, I will just draw some random drawings on this screen. Circle. All right, so you can see that we are drawing on our screen. Now, I will go to Layout 1. And when you go to Layout 1, you can see that W quote is not currently covering all the drawing. So we learned that we can change this metal clicking on this, and then go to the Zoom. And I will select the zoom extents. So this will create coveralls entities from a specific corner or within the starting point before I start. To zoom out a little bit. Okay, this looks fine. Now this is viewport and that is a page setup towards is this meter. What do we usually do is when you go to the Output tab, we will just plot option or blood panel. Here. In this plot, we have different types of options. So we labor, we obeyed setup manager. You can see that the currently what we are going to cover in this section, we will cover this plot options in the next section that is specifically dedicated to plotting and converting them into PDF. So let's understand Page Setup. Before opening the page setup manager first I will do is plot this total layout. To do that, you can either click on this plot option and open the blood manager, or you can type the shortcut key that is PLO t, plot and press Enter. Also there is a shortcut key for that, that is Control plus b. When I press Control plus p, two broad measure will meet popped up on the screen. Now, starting first, we'll just go through the basics on this section because the next section is totally above this plotting layouts. So I will just select the printer plotter to me, AutoCad to PDF. Or you can sort of get pdf fy Quality Print and select the paper size to be ISO. Iso A3 will be fine and wrote area to be, as you said, 10 to the extent souls of pirates still recording. Okay, now it is currently set to landscape or portrait IL, two options here. We can see that growing orientation and this will show me a basic preview for the same. Now you can see that currently is compared to our drawing. The view port is not allowed to or even say the view port is not scaled appropriately to this. To do that, you can either, either have a proper scale or you can just click on this Fit to paper. This will automatically scale it around the paper. So when I click on Fit to paper, this will automatically scaled w port around this total size page. Currently you may not see the changes until you press. Okay. Now, next option is center the plot. So when I click on the center of the plot, it, this will automatically center it from all corners and leave a perfect Martin or the site. From this right side, you can select the style table. We will come to this on coming section. Now, next option here is shaded viewport options. So I can either select a draft quality, premium quantity, normal presentation, maximum, what custom. So I will set it to be, say, presentation quality. And I can have different options on this. We will see them into coming in inches. Again, if this width to portrait and landscape, you can see this in this preview. I will skip this transcript. I'll press OK. Once I do that, this will ask me to save the file. So this sale one saving, so this will automatically open it in the Chrome or your default PDF opener. Now, you can see that the pages zoomed or pencil the PDF is converted to be told that extends as we set up the parameters in A3 size. Now, to, if I want to hell this layout to have the same size, I can do that with the page setup manager. When I click on this page setup manager, you can see that it will show that current page setup is none because we operated no pacer copy it. To do. So what we're doing is here, and we're gonna call this new option and create a new page setup for this layout. I will name it is layout. They'd set of one. I'll press Okay. This is not allowable characters. So I press Okay. Now, as I said, the default sizes now, so I will just select the same. I will select the pizza is to be a two. I will select layout to be extensity, fit to the paper, centered the blower, and quality to be maximum display plot size. And I will give it a slice of the grayscale. Now, I will select this 1004 trait and press okay. When I click on this click Set current and close, you see that the current layout page sad, tends to the one we created. So if I want to have the same layout style over here, I can do the same with this page setup manager. So once they do, click on this page setup manager, this will again open the page setup manager for us. Now you can see that we do not have to create again, or you can say you can do more how to create this whole proteins? Tell again, what I have to do is it is still to click on this layout page setup and we can set current option. This will change the current layout option to be the same what we created previously. So this lesson India. So if I want to handle this page set up in a new drawing that I use are open. I can do the same. What I will do is I just double-click on surveys and save this document in my directory. So I will say it is Page Setup example. We can say. Now I will open a new drawing. This tablet squared term on other objects on the screen does not mean to be in specific size as we did earlier. So you can do it in not to scale options, whatever convenient to you, right? Create some random smallest side and mix as objects. Now, in this strength enabled with the layout option, you can see that they're currently outside is different from what we've created a layer. Now, if I wish to have this same size in a portrait manner which viewports that is, centered four moles of Mao points n with the core margins on all sides or both the sides. And this ISO standard page saves. So all I have to do is I'm just going to go to the output tab. Click on bed setup manager as soon as I do. So you'll see that we're option here called import. So when I click on this Import option, this will open my directory. I o do select this drawing that we saved earlier, this one bed set of example. I'll click Open. When I do it, this will show me that that is how many stars are available in this page setup. So in previously we created this layout page setup. So this is currently available in this drawing to be imported. I'll click on this Layout Page Setup and press okay, then I do that. The Layout Page Setup style will be available in this drawing to be used. So when a system layout be setup and click on Save Current. As soon as I do that. The current stand-off, this layout where we change to what we create in this drawing. This is how we're going to create a different page setups, okay? And you can have multiple pest set up. It does not mean that in a single drawing you can only create a one-page setup. Suppose if I want a different page setup for this layout to, I can go to the page setup manager, create a new option, and repeat the same procedure as we did earlier. Layout, Page Setup or whatever do is create this new high-quality. This time I will keep the size to be a three. Sorry. This demo says will be A3 and it will be two extents. Soon be virtual. Hands makes normal quality food to paper. Centered the block. I will just press. Okay. When doing so, new PayTech, we recreated bit set of ITNs. The spelling of this page too. I type this page is a PG, is intentionally to listen out to, override this page setup style told to confuses you then just renamed by being on this, I will click on this and quicker set current. And I do so you can see that there is a difference between what would we added earlier and autograder test. Now, when I click on layout one, layered one, we're going to be so different page setup style. And L21 is a different page setup step. So this is how you can create a different page setups in order of it, you can import them into different drawings and you can switch 10 with layout options and you can create more layouts and how different page setup for each one. Or you can just copy from the other one by clicking on page setup manager and leading any page layout that you wish and clicking on it as set current. So this is all about page setup manager. Thank you for watching. 98. Plotting AutoCAD: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will learn about plotting and project manager in AutoCad. So currently I have this drawing on my screen. If I need to print this on a page, or I would need to convert this on a PDF. I have to do this with the product manager tool in AutoCad that we saw in earlier page setup manager. We want to upload a manager. We learned that the shortcut key for that to be Control plus p. And this will ask me if I have a multiple layouts open. So suppose i o different page setup style for this layout and different Page Setup cell for this layout. Well, multiple sheets opening both layouts. So either I can try to publish ports tells in one, or I can create another one or I can just go with the current E1, E2. So I will click on this. Do not show me again, I'll click on this. Continue to upload single-stage. So there's would you want to plot model or a program manager for the same? So we here we have a page setup option. We'll come back to this. So next option here we are, that is printed in plotter. So if you can attend a printer to your computer or device, it will show up here. You can either directly printed in our printer or you can just convert it into a PDF to further processed into printing. So currently I will choose, okay, This is, this is a quotation that whenever you do not want to directly print it or you just want to convert it to PDF. Always choose this be AutoCad PDF, high-quality print. This will convert your plot two into a PDF first and then you can further process it. Now next option here, V0, that is pay precise. You can select different types of paper size available on this whole list. There is a weekly store, a label of different types of paper, a different type of standard. Suppose IHL, architectural standards and standards, and all of them you can select as per units. Now this is cool with ISO A3. Now, other options here we are, we're just plot area. So what to plot? The first option that is displayed when I click on display, this will blow drying port. Currently the display sectors. If I zoom in and zoom out, this will be my current display. This whole corners will be currently zoomed in or that are currently on the display will be plotted. So this one contains a high-quality print. So I do not suggest to go with the display option anyway. The next option here we have extents Anglican extends. This will automatically zoom out to the extents of destroying from this to this text border, as we learned in Zoom extends to earlier. We'll do it is the extensive boundary. The next token year we have is limits. So if you remember, we learned to set limits, intertwine this. We plotted according to the set limit intertwined. If there is no limit, sectors will automatically submit order to automatically promoted to the extents of the drawing. The next option here, VL and I suggest you use that is window option. And you click on the swing option. We will find another window option here. When you click on this food late, you selected specific window to clip Lord. So suppose I just need to plot currently this part, first floor plan of this layout. So I will just create a window here. Normally this area, tendrils core under the window will be plotted on the screen. So we have currently selected the window. So once done, you can see that the wind option here will be highlighted in blue. This means that you have already selected the window that we just now did. Next option is sent to the plot. We can give up toward offset or you just, I would say it is that users always click on the center of the plot. This will make it more organized on your sheet. Next option here is to scale. So if I, Several is plot Fit to paper, I can give it a custom scale ratio, one ratio, 40, or one raise to 16. You can see that there is a default preview or basic rough review of what the object will be appearing on a sheet will be shown here. So the conflict to paper, so it will be automatically labeled margin on this both side, equal and equal on this port site to. The next option here we have is prose style table. We'll come to this in next lecture. Currently for now, if four basics, if you want to load the whole growing into agree, you can go with gray scale. If you want to play. Note it in black and white, you can go with monochrome. And these are the screening basic scale screen, you tend to fade fitness of a 100 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, or 75 percent, and let it be two before that is none. Next option here is said plot. So we learned that there are various type of visual styles in AutoCad. So you can choose any one of this, or even just as this big because in 2D, we already set up the layers, some drawings, and we're already given the different colors to this drawing so you can let it to be as displayed. Next to punish quality, I would suggest always go with the maximum or presentation quality by printing a plan. Or you can, or if you are converting it into a PDF. So we can this maximum. Next we have this basic plot options that you went over between this tick mark boxes. You can either plot in background means destroying in a bag around means while you are working on it. The next option is low toxic line weights. So what we told here from this slope thick line weight option you can do with similarly with this option next two years for transparency. So if I have set up some, given some transparency to this object till this will. Let me toggle between if I want to show that transparency in the final plot or not. Similarly, we have this different basic option. You can go through them. Now to preview what are we gonna do? You're going to select this preview option before that, you can change the layout for this portrait and landscape. So I will click on this preview option and this will display me how the Lord will be looked like the shape. So once you create a PDF, this is how the PDF is gonna look like. You can zoom in with the zoom tool. And once I click on this and outside it to zoom out one's head triggered inside it was all mean. You can also find out on with the middle mouse button like this. So this is how it's going to loop to go back, just press the Escape key, and this will take you better, this plot manager and do not worry, all your settings will be saved, which is preserved what you are going to print out. Next option here is Okay. Once you click Okay, it will finally converted into a PDF. And then you click on this apply to lay out this will apply to our first layout. Does Page Setup means this will be my new page setup for the first layout. So you do that men very carefully because if you set up order, DO already set up a page manager for the layout, this will remove that one and select this is a new one for that. So just click on a page to convert this into PDF. I would say treat it the same way it is here. Now this actually to be a PDF and I'll click Save. Once done, this will automatically open it into a default PDF viewer. I always say my PDF viewer to be Chrome for this will be opened into column. Now you can see the file is opened in the Chrome and I zoom in. All the objects holds is trying out currently visible. Again, go too in depth for the train. Then see that I can zoom in into very tiny details as we always had to quality to maximum. This is how you can grow different plans and drawings in order value and convert them into PDF. So coming back to the PDF, autocad, if I want to create another plan containing all this A3 sheet, I can do with it, same with the same option. So I'll press Control P again. And this time I do not want to change any other option rather than this page setup. So what I will do is first create a window and this time select this all plan. Once done, what I'll do is I'll select this page and this time let's go with this. I had a full bleed C, and I will click to portrait and landscape option. I will go with the landscape option. And you can see that this time we have this rectangular shape area or window code for the plotting. So, and here we have this in landscape form means this triangle is converted into, or this, or rotated into this 1980 to be split up in our paper size. So one minute click. Okay. I'll save. This file is his second one. Press cell. So when we do that, let's check out how it is going to look like this. It will take a bit time because it contains more components. Once done, it should look like this. You can see that the whole plan is currently converted into a PDF. Okay? So this is converting to a PDF in a horizontal way, means don't change the orientation of the train. It automatically will change it to this. Now, when I'm hoping to drawing and suppose if I need to probe this again. So what I'm doing is I will press Control P. But when you see that, when you try to blow this lambda again to disable the settings that you said earlier, how we disappear to bring big toe previous sitting, all you have to do is and from none user to click on previous block. This will bring because the settings and modifications that you made earlier for the same protein. So this does not create any difference in that one. And when this rough figure shows the orientation to be off of the window, to be in this side, you don't have to worry, this will automatically convert anyone go what is been drawing in AutoCad? It's, this won't change any, wouldn't teach in all growing in any direction. This will be same as it is appeared on our current board. So this was what about protein or drawing in PDF or printing them. Okay, In addition to this, we will go to this plot style meant table in coming lectures. And meanwhile, once you're done, you say that is a popup option available on the right-hand side of the screen that said that bloat and we publish choke complete. No errors or warnings. Column means Doug's job post grayed out smoothly. So when you click on this load and publish details, this will show you the details of this drawing. So it means that you can copy this down, This options and then close. So this was all about promoting the drawing into PDF photo printing machine. Thank you for watching. 99. Plot Styles: Welcome back. In previous lecture we saw how to bring it out or how to convert a growing into a PDF for printing. So VCE keep two parallel float status in that bar lecture. So currently we will focus on what is broad stairs in AutoCad. This is very important. Okay? So pay attention. How will you walk though, plot manager? Once you do that with a control P shortcut that we learned earlier, we have this plot style table option, which is set to none currently. Now you can create a new plots, tell that this option, what is upload style? So suppose that we will draw a circle. You suppose citizens circle. Now, on printing this on a play out, supposedly press Control P, set the settings to some default. For the quick setup, I will just go to high-quality to let the page set of B, whatever it is. Select window. This will be fine. Click on port 80 and skip anything. It is fine center of the plot and quality to be maximum. And this I will just preview. Then I preview this. You can see that this circle is containing some color that is currently admins. We do not assign or we did not assign any color to this yet. So for this instance, I would just select the plot style to be a kid. Once you do that, as I in the plot style table to lay out switches for two years. And you just want to preview this. And it looks the same as it is being living right now. Now, I would assign a color to this. You can do that with the properties panel available in this arm tape. I will just go to color my layer and click on read one. Doing so, this will appear red on our drawing board. And when I tried to print this or convert this into PDF for the quick instance we are here we created a plotting style which is from the name I was like this previous plot and preview. Now when I do that, you can see that that circle is currently invisible. We'll verify that I will create a window here. I'll preview. Now we can see that the circle is appearing read on this PDF. Now we're plotting studies. Sport is floating sterile. So plotting standard will convert this red sort of guide to something is if we provide a specific value for that. In AutoCad, coatings tell contains 255 colors. Setup means you can have control over or you can set parameters for the 255 colors. They will appear different into plotting or when you plot them. If I want all the radical little diagrams are also objects that are currently in radical in my drawing to be bloated into a different color, print it into a layout or shaped or PDF. I can do that with the prose style options. I will go to this plot style table. Click on New. Now, in this option, you select the start from scratch option. Click Next. Now I will provide a filename. So let it be plots style meal for the day. Okay, now I'll click on Next. Now we have two options on the screen. The first one is use this table for the current growing and other one is used this plot style table for new and grieve AutoCad 2021 English drawings. If I take books this, this will automatically apply this to all the clients that I create further into software means make sure you do not do that because each drawing as a different layout or different requirements, one stone I would be confident. Now we have this custom option. So you just created approach tenement. We did not employ any parameters for the same to do that. Once you create this plot style polio. To do this, click on this load Style Manager eric option available on the exit to the right-hand side of this dropdown with an input style table. And I click on this, this will let me edit. Now we will see that there are so many colors here. As I told you earlier, that I totally 255 colors of RTP value available to be edited. Suppose currently we have saturated red color. To verify that at all I will do is to close this. When I hover my mouse over this, this will show me the current off this circle that is currently set to red. So I'm going go to the Control P option, open the Product Manager. It's like the previous block. And from this, and you see that this bloodstain new for red, I would like us to apply to all the layers and I will respond this edit option for the color red, that is one. I'll specify some, certain parameters instead line Landry to week two. Mm. Click the panel culture for the diamonds and several of you lined type of wrong nation. When I do that, I will save and close it. The Press Preview option. Okay, First we need to define a window for the same. So it will become window. Select this circle. I will preview it. So you can see that we gave it a specific line weights and different type of mandate. When I zoom in, it'll automatically change it. Line dishes is peer review. So this is how you can create a different blues style in AutoCad. But if you do not require any specific books, ten, I suggest you to grow and change anything or make any alterations to them because this can result in specific areas in your folder, plotting drawings and etc. So this is what a pope, low style in plotting in AutoCad. Thank you for watching. 100. Title Block in AutoCAD: Welcome back. Previously we saw about page manager and 2D modeling and other tools. In this tutorial, we will learn about some main features of finishing a drawing. As an architect or a civil engineer, you might be familiar with the DOM, that is, title block. Each sheet or drawing contains a specific title block that holds. Those are legal information about the drawing. So in this tutorial, we will learn about creating a title block with help of attributes. So you will also be introduced to the air cube roots feature of Porto. Bad. For the beginning, what we were doing is first period decide the size of our sheet. And according to that, we can decide the size of our title block. What we'll be doing is we will go to the layout one, and we do not know the existing sheet size for the drawing. So as we learned earlier, we will go to the output tab. Click on Page Setup manager. In this layout one, we will go to the modify option and modify the size of this current drawing. So I will set it as in its icy size, that is 17 byte 22 inches. I'll press Okay, I will close this. Now. The new size of our shoot is set to the 17 by 22 inches. We will go back to the model space. Now, before we start with the drawing, what we were doing is we will change the units that is by UN shortcut key. I will change the current units of this joint to the architectural unit and precision scale to be 0. Now press OK. And we'll change the units of our screen and we'll change the size of the sheet. It is available in day out one. Now. So you might have noticed that all the suit contains a specific border and title block, so forced to be in with creating a border for the drawing. To do that, I would click on this rectangle tool, select a starting point and give it Dilantin breadth of the sheet of research threat. It is 22 inches coma and 17 inch. Press Enter. Now we have this onscreen, which size of our current layout that is extra changed this year. What are we doing this we will create offset. This is the actual site of the size of our sheet. Now we need to create offset for that. So I will click on offset. And we read Freud it offset of say, 0.25% of danger. So what I'll do is I'll click on this point. And I was specify the 0.258 as a distance and press Enter. Click on this rectangle and create a border. Now this looks fine. Now, the next thing we can do is we create a data block on this below edge means all are drawing in. Contents will be placed on the stock side and our title block will be in this bottom part of this drawing sheet. So create a line from here up to lend three inches. And I will create a straight line with the oxymoron of this. Now I can delete this extra line. Okay, this looks fine. Now we will again give it an offset for the same. Okay, So view this line offset of 125 percent. Now, I will trim the extra parts over here, but before there, we will decide some music space layout of this title block. So for the instance, we will have a company name and logo on the left-hand side. After right up to date on this portion, we can write about the client name and the address of the site. On the right-hand side, we will have a tree with the technical details of the drawing that is scale named drawn by tech to buy dates and etc. So firstly, I rewrite this into two bytes for this midpoint over you're good. Now, I will draw another two to get the middle point of this linear is just draw another line over here on the top. Intro MOOC nine here. Okay? I will just consider this line on the other side. So I don't want to talk a little bit. The stapes. Cool. Now, I will draw a line passing through this point here. Delete this extra line, create another line over here. And I will draw one more line over here. And I remember this lane again at the bottom. And we delete this extra length. Now here we're basically out of the title block. You might be getting the things right now. So I will draw one more section around India. Well the same. Okay. Now, this is the basic layout for our title block. The company name and logo should be attributed over here. The name of client should we turn around here? This short contain the edges of the site. We can write your name and we can write here specific attribute or the title for the contents. Dislocation shall contain the sheet number and scale and other details. So now comes the main drug it is, we'll go to the annotate. Right now there are few things that are going to be same for all the sheet. Supposedly, I can say that the company name should be same. So what I will do is I will click on this multi-line text. I will draw double box here. And doing so, we will have this layout paper on us going a certain size of the text to be 10 inches. And let's try how big it is. I will type the company name and various anywhere outside. This looks pretty small compared to the drawing. So just double-click on it. Select all the drawing, give it a length of one inch. Press Enter. Okay, now this may look pretty way. So I'll just select all of this again and make it 0.5 inch. Now this looks fine. Now I can do is to swap with us on this site. But before doing that, what I'm doing is I will just arrange this in the proper scale and move it around here in the middle of this box. Now this looks perfect and more organized. I'll copy this text from this corner over here. I'll turn off the automaton of Here. We'll have incorporated right below the points over here. Now. I can also hope it is drawing over here. Okay, so you might be getting the idea what I'm doing now is just rename this to see my name. I'll move this and the center. And right here address. Over here. On this part. I will try to shape number two. We are at this corner. And I'm loving copy this and this bottom part. And I would write this kidding, fourth-quarter the same. Now, on this side, I'll just I'll be in cooperatives, stakes and best suited over here. Now. I will rename it to 0.5 inches. I'll say one. And I will rename this to say date. I'll move this here. I'll copy this down and we were ready to take studying. Now I will write here is drawn by orange this. And then WE DO part right here. That should be checked by the shock form that is generally used on the sheets. And I can write here the drawing number. Okay, Now this looks fine. Now we need to feed in the species around your. So what were we doing is we will be providing it an attribute text. Suppose the client ID name and this address that shoot number and scale should handle this numbers and contains some details that can be editable in all the blocks. So let's start by doing that. And before that, it was a dream world is by trim command this extra lines on our drawing. So let's first select this. And I really want the trim command by pressing the shortcut key that is D. Press Enter. Needed this extra lines on our drawing. Okay, Now data block looks more perfectly defined on the sheet. So I will click on this client name, go to the new tape, sorry, insert table. And I would click on this attribute option. So we have this two options over a billion block that is edited tree root n define a tree root. So first, when you are trying to create a tribute for a drawing or blog, we'll just have to click on this defining attribute option. As soon as you do that, we will have this optional as green. Now, pay attention here on this tab option. Hello, This option that you hope to mention a DAG for the specific HE route. And you cannot have a spacing them means I can not drink the end space in something else. What I will do is able to write client names straight away like this. What should it dropped on the screen? So specify lightning. And specific shouldn't be also the specific details or default option or really we shouldn't be blamed name itself. And I'll press okay on doing so. You might not see and genders or your relatives clique here. And this was created. Now I can do to disable one more weight around here and the middle part. Now this may seem a little bit small, but before denting the site of size of whatever we are doing is they will just cooperate around on this part so we don't want her to change the size of that attribute. When we blasted. I'll click on Copy to select this plane name option. Copy it here. Now, I will do the same by clicking on this multiple option selected from this box and cooperate in all the boxes. Okay? So let's continue now with averages. Dilute this. Now we're going to add this text into a tribute again. Now to do that, I will have one attribute option from defining attribute. Now, last time we forward to change the height of this. So this time we will specify it in first link to that will be this funny inch. Now the take four, this should be the site address. Remember that you cannot leave space in this text from should we specify the site address? Now, the default takes should be or that would be site address itself. Once done. And we will take the size of this text. I'll just keep, okay. Now we again how this site address option, but it is doulas. So I will go to grade you. So I will click on this address again now, but we'll define attributes. Now. We should assign a tape for this, so sure debt shouldn't be site address. Next options you'll be prompt or what should the task force would be this site address itself. And default again, we deter saturates. Now already find the height that should be half off the edge. So I will remove this for n-type door here and press okay, I'm doing so, this will pop up this side Editors option. I would give this over here because this address opsin and delete it. I will copy this site address text on this sheet number and scale option itself. Just drag it and cooperate around here. We know the Ink, select this and incorporate below the skin or below the sheet number over here. Now, let's say this attribute I would love in forced off or cooperatives for the client name option itself. And that should be done. Now, do an editor at Tribute, what I would do is I can go to the Insert tab, click on this edit entry but option. When I do that and I click my or I rename all my cursor over this text. This will be highlighted a bit in bluish shade. So I just have to click on this. Select a blob. It says, but we do not have a block here and currently, so I can double-click on this text and this will pop up it as a entity attribute option. One thing, convert this text into a blog. I can do that by that should attribute option. Now I was entered, take to the blank name, changed, the prompt I traced to be client name itself or the default should be declined name. I press Okay. The next option is date here I would click on this text again and change the date. And next option should be prompt. So I will write something earlier, date itself and the default should be the date, so that should be say, month, date, month we're in. And I believe okay. So this will change to the date drawn by option should be name of the client. Or I could take sorry, I eat cake. Name. Again, auto space here i for what I'll call for this, I'll paste it here. I'll paste it in here. And do it a little space. The Cauchy. So you may know that this all should be the same. So I will just did it. This will move this aside. Cooperatives that she read text below that, right below here. Now, I'll change the date for this so it doesn't call line with Deadline has take two poses stream with SDN type to press. Okay. Now next option is drawing number. I'll click on this and double-click on this DWG number and select the prompt to be the growing number. And default to either say something and press Okay. So it does not contain space and I will be talking spine now. Again, select this sheet number and it shouldn't be a number. One and press Okay. We'll click on this site address and changes to something else. Let's see scale, scale ratio. And this took me one ratio and pray. Press Okay. Now we'll set entry routes for older maintains. Instead we need when we create horribly and replace a title block in a specific drawing. Now, whatever we are doing is every tissue sheet or this format of the title block sheet into a block. So I will select all these components. Now after selecting all of this, I will click Block option, press Enter. Now this will open the block data. Now this will open the low creation. So we already seen all these options over here. So I will just name it as a seven, sorry, 22 inches by 17 inches shaped with title block. So this is now going are we convert it into a block. I will specify a base point on screen, big point. And all of these tools either factor right corner so to the left corn for this time. Now select optics. Select all of these objects, press Enter. And this might take few seconds. Okay, Now it's done. I'll click Okay, you can draw a description if you wish to. Let us click. Okay. Remove the sign of this inches. And I'll press Okay. Now you see that Nazis showing real database screen for the same man named Louis Cauchy. All of this information will be changed to this. You might, may human or notice any difference right now. But now our part with this title block is done. I will delete this. So you might be wondering why did they delete that. Good. All right, away. Now got until it a title block is converted into a block, specific block that we learned in AutoCad. So enabled this into Insert option. Click on this blocks, sorry, you click on the Insert option from this block. So we held this sheet title block here. When I click on this and place it on my screen, again, a lotus option. So let's say architect named should be Jane Doe. I'll click on Next client named should retain dough itself to, let's try something random. Scale. Should we wonder Sean sheet numbers would presume double 08 address would be oppose IT. Market. And NYC time just putting any random addresses all here. During number should be c 0, 2, 0, 0 file can take name popped up again. So we might have missed somewhere that taking issue. That should be my second nim to should be the name OP. So type jane Doe three here. And I will mention the date in month for the same. So I'll take just a little 101 for the month and for the year. Let's COVID 2020. And I press Okay, now, when say place this, you can see that all the information on how to start a blog is changed. You might notice some more here and there off this organization, but you ingest so you can just add them by making changes with the text placement and day sizes. So to say, it's amazing how you can create a title block and rapidly change the values in 10. Now, you are done with this model space by creation of tighter blow. When we go to the layout space, you might notice that those green is not covered in this title globe. To do that, how did it this current view, as we learned in the earlier lectures, we can evoke the layout viewport option or 12 curations may MB, MB View Options. So I would type MV and press Enter. Now I will select this as free. So this will create a complete free option for those. What I will do is eventually that I cannot select this or double-click on this. Now I can place my cursor and human RPE is that I do not have this proper scale for placing this setup login screen. So what I'll be doing is I'll click on this, click zoom and zoom extents. So once I click outside this debt of local recombinantly fixed on my screen, it takes it off that ratio and sizes for the creator. So this is all about title block creation in AutoCad. Thank you for watching. 101. Sheet Set Manager: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we learned about title blocks, layout, sheet management, viewports management, etc. In this tutorial, we will study amount sheet manager that is something similar to that. Now, to make it easy to understand, I will tell you is that if you are working on a large project, there are various sets of tech, simple plan. Suppose for a simple line plan, there will be a whole plan, there will be a schedule of opening, there will be a foundation plan, there will be structural plans, that will be site layouts. So if I'm drawing everything in this one file, it can create some errors or may generate some mistakes that r is not easy to figure out. Suppose if I draw a plan here, I will draw another plan. This will contain my line plan. This may contain my structural plants, this may contain my foundation plan, this may contain other side layouts and stuff. So when I go to the layout option I have to create are so many levels for simple drawing. So for that, I will need to create a different layouts for different specific plan, different size, different sizes. And when I how to create so many of page layouts, I need to edit everything from this output tab. And it will set up page manager for its sheet. I need to create a different title block for each site and for bloating IO to plot each shape separately. So this will create so much. We're working on a simple plan. Now to make that easy, we have an option or feature in order, right? That is good sheet manager. So before we get started with that treatment Azure, I will demonstrate a small diagram that will help you understand what is shipped manager properly. So I will open the Image. Now. I have this image on screen. So as you can see on the screen, we have these layouts, okay? And we'll the shift manager. This all layouts are saved in different files. Suppose this file is just blank, blank file me is just to say that structure, land, oil plans and schedules, side plants. So if I save each file separately, again, this is going to create some maze. I have to go to every file to create two different or modify or create bloats layouts for the same. Now, Schekman is, it allows us to compound combine all these files into one and save it as a sheet file. And to demonstrate that better, let's go back to the AutoCad. Now. We'll get it all this for now. The shoe manager can be walked with the shortcut key that is SS, m, w, m. And when I press Enter, this will open the shoot, manage it for me. Now, currently there is a default shoot that I did is open demand may have used in previous project or something. So this Create, click on this and I'll just close this shape forth. Now. This is shift manager toolbar. You can have sheet list over here. You can just said differentiate sheet views. That will be your layouts. Suppose money, drag my mouse over here. It displays a layout of the current day to lay out so you can create this view category. Should we use? Now? Next option is modal views. So if you are creating a 3D model of trauma sheet, you can assign a 3D model view to this, similar to the shift views. Now, I will close this dialogue box. You can again open this shape manager from the View tab. And on the right-hand side we have this shift manager pellet. So when I click on this planet and open the sheet manager, this will open the shoot segment Azure. Now, create your own sheet. All you have to do is click on this open button and you can select this new sheet set. If you've already saved a sheet set, you can open with this option. So click on this new sheet set. This will open up dialog box in front of the screen. That is create a shoot sec. Now we have two options. If we have an existing drawing, suppose if architectural form is creating their specific shoot set, means that their work should work in that workflow. So they might have a file that is previously saved. So they don't need to create a new sheet set every time so they can do with this existing drawings. Suppose you have an old file server with this same. So for now we do not have any files. So we will begin with the freshman that is example she checked and click on Next. Now this will ask us if you're a need to select a specific measure for the shoot said Suppose I need to work in architects that are MPLS you'd set I go to select that. So let's go with architectural metric. Shoot said, I will click Next. Now we have to rename the sheet side here. So rename it as my new sheet set. And I can provide a description for the same. And I can also have a location where the details of the shift click Next. And doing so, you will have a reference copy or reference of the available plants for the shape. Now, as we finished our job, I would click on Finish. This will open up, should set on our screen. So these are all the screens to help just refresh this Refresh option. Unable to get views. We do not have any views here currently. My new sheet set, that is, when I click on this menu, I can create a new view category for the same. And in modal views as we do not have any views currently, we do not have modal use eater. Now I would click on the sheet list. And suppose you might be understanding that this contains all the general plans with other residents or structure. This will contain architectural plans, elevations, etc. This will contain structural details. Electrical plants make any coal plants plumbing, fire predictions see will end landscaping. So you can either add your own shoots and use upsets to this supposed to engender plan, I need to add a subset that contains the basic layout of the land plan to enable 30th, I will click on this new subset. When I do that, this will let me create a new subset for the same. So I just have to give a name to the new subset. So I will give it as nine plan in general. So next option is create a folder hierarchy. If I need to create a separate folder for that, I can click on the CS option, so we do not need that currently. Now we can have a different suit quotation template. I can assign a specific template for the same that we chose for model year that were available in first type of lesion of this shoot sec, every Cauchy. And this will create a line plan for them. So here subset is created containing the heading line plan. Now this does not continuous sheet currently, right? So what I have to do is click on this line plan. And as I do that, I have to right-click on this land. And remember that now I can either assign a new sheet to it, import this specific shoot at a specific layout or drawing. I can rename this upset. I can remove this upset on, I can publish it directly, but I contend the properties as we did earlier. So what I will do is I will assign a new shape to this when I click on this new shoot option, this will have been putting up a new shoot popup options or dialogue box on the screen. Now, you have to assign the number. So this will be my, say shoot one. So I will type S N1. And on the sheet title, let's say this contains a different line, normal land plants, I will just strike you to land law. And if I click on SOPA in drawing editor of this will open it in a new file and let me draw into it. So we do not need that for the moment. So I'll just click on, Okay. As soon as I do that, this will Container Option Year 2 drop-down option or we can expand and close this with this option. This will contain my S1 land plan. Similarly, I can add subheads or I can declare new ship to this. So in architecture I will add a new sheet and I will name it as alleviation or E1 for the elevation 1. And we give the sheet title to be elevation from West or say in this direction, and I'll click Okay, a new shape will be created right below that I can again, a subhead as we did here, is aligned plan option. Now, when I click on this S1, forced, okay, Let me add one other sheet. Warrior or just, I don't know the new shape to this land, land. I will name it as S2 this time. And I will give you the heading as a cisgender pi will give it a Walkman and press Okay, now we have to shut down our liberty or S1, S2, S1 contains Lang plan is to contains the whole plan. So this is just a sheet manager. What we saw in this image is that it should contains it different file from four files. We're combining it into a single sheet to comprises of a single project. Now let's get the load, okay? And when I want to draw in this L1 line plan, so you might be wondering that where this file is saved, this file existing autocrat or not. So I just have to double-click on this L1, this one as I do that, this will open a new drawing. Means currently we were on this drawing one, but this will open, this is a new drawing and it will continue default title block and set up our layout. In this one. This will also contain a default date, project name, and address. In this section, you can edit attributes as we studied in title block section that how we can add data attribute in an existing drawing. Now, there are few values here. When I go to this site plan, you might be seeing the lock icon here. So I just have to right-click on it and click on this Properties option. So in this movie, we'll dissolve this assigned 2s and numbers on this sheet properties. I can edit the sheet name that we provided here that is lamp black again at the sheet number. So you notice that as I assigned to S1 as a sheet number, it will automatically assign the sheet number as S1. So if I attend just 1000 to say a2 and press Okay. This one change the sheet number of directly, I need to reload or regenerate this. Do that. I will just type II. Once I do that, I have open here at EGN that is region I click on this region. As soon as I click on this region option, this will regenerate or reload the sheet on this drawing. So currently, this is what it looks like right? Now. We'll just easier. See, as I click that, I'm able to edit this attribute values on the screen. So we have already gone through that in the title block, so I'm not going to repeat that. Now. Next option is publishing the sheets. So currently this drawing or this should set contains a 3D drawings that is A2 as to anyone that is for elevation. Now when I go up the option here that is export the selection tool W files. So when a predict some part of this drawing of selector specific shade from this, from this box, I can export it as a drying. Now, here are Publius options. We will come back to that right side. We'll shoot selection options so I can create a new selection. What is selection? I can create another shoots. Electrons have any Greek on this, on really specific shoot from this list will be selected. As weird as we saw that in the layer manager that we can print it out specific layers with the specific values. So that is nothing but the sheep selection was saying. Now, I'll just click on this a2 option, okay, and I can publish this into directly PDF. This will only publish, tie it to five. So to do sheet. So it will publish all of these three sheets. We currently only have a saying she should store this penalty, so it will only publish this reshoots. If I want more, I have two more and I have a grid row things in this model penalty that would appear in this shoot. So let's go with the blank one for the moment because it is easy to understand. And now we have this T-Shirts and there are three separate files for the same. I can close this and save it as a file in a separate folder, and this will still be contained in this set. So what I will do is I'll click on this probably sorption drop-down option. I can publish it to WWF format, wx format. I can publish it to Florida. Again, setup a page override or obtains this page setup. I getting a little bit published, yes or no. So if I click on this new option, this one being tutored when I publish all this shaped sets. Next option, it edits upset that we already saw that had it published in reverse order means to accept off this a2, the publishing will start from even as two, and then it comes back to a two. Now in-group load stem, I can assign upload stem if I'm if I have a form, I have to assign approached him that the dead will be automatically imprinted on the shapes when I print them. So their data for printing options. Now I can again tends to page setup for the different layouts from this option. I can say she'd said dividends with publication options. So this will bring up the options for the printer. Next one is the same, and these are the publishing dialogue box that will pop up after publishing. So I will currently, as we do not have anybody interconnected through our system, I will currently publish it as a PDF. So I will click on this Publish to PDF option. When I do that, this would ask me to seal of the border location closely. So select this and it will be published to a PDF. So let's go and open it. So you can see on the screen that my printing and publishing is currently posted it in the background and the right-hand side, you can see that that is a printing logo that is popping up inside and out of paper. So that denotes that currently this process is going on. As soon as the job is completed, it will show me on screen that bloat and published job completed. No warnings on I had a phone. So it means that the job was carried out smoothly without any errors. So it says go to the location and open the new shape. So this is my location for the new sheet and we double-click on and off on it. Now, let it load. So this, you can see that are currently three ships and this and when I move down, this will be my shoot one that is a2. This is supposed to be my sheet to that is as two and this will be my E1 that reassigned as elevation 1. So this is all about it. This is how you can manage a blueprint projects or meet projects in comprise them into a sheet set in a single form with a shoot certain Manager tool in AutoCad. So this is how you can comprise different files for, for similar project into one with the sheet set manager, without combining all of those projects or plans and drawings into single one, creating a big mess. And this will definitely save a lot of time and error your project. So this is the main use of the ChIP-Seq manager. This is mostly used an occupied by an Android project means we do not need to assign everything layout and in from the meaning of the project, you can just work on different files and save them in different folders. But when it comes to shoot sat monitor, you can assign them to form any drawing. And you can still have your shoot set Manager tool that will help you assign different files into single form and bring them into a single PDF for single layouts. So this is all about shoot secondary node or good. Thank you for watching. 102. Referencing External files (Xref) : Welcome back. In this tutorial, we went to the shoot managing autocad. In this tutorial, we will learn about another tool that is called referencing files to. So to better understand that, I will put an example that suppose this is a weak form. There are so many people working on different files or different parts of the same project. Somebody is assigned to create some referencing plants. Someone is assigned to create some growing for the same plan, and somebody else is assigned for the creating different set of land transfer plans for the same project. In weak forms and offices, they all have the comparators and CPUs and systems linked to each other through a common drug. So currently we do not have any common dividends to my laptop, one of the laptop, but we can do that or we can attach different files for the reference on our drawing. So for this, for the example, I will draw a rectangle here, right? Exactly like this. Now, what I have to do is suppose I am person one. This is my prototype. And this is person to worrying on something's other part or some other part of the same project. So it rose rectangle of this shape and there is this person third. Now, what is doing is he's working on a circle for the same project. I'm just putting this shapes as an example. This could be land plant growing plants, fruits that are planned, but any other type of layout of a project. Now, what we're really doing is we will save all these three files as a person, 1, 2, and 3. So what I'll do is I'll click on Save As option. And I will go to the documents for the defaults. And I was able to person one. So in case of form or office, this will be saved on a common drive, which is accessible by all the computers in that office or form. And I will save it as person two. And I will save this as a person 3, etc. Now, we are done with this. So now a person who needs the reference of the, this person once file for twain were for further drawing this drawing. So what are we doing is, I will go to the person to suppose this person who is currently working on this project and he needs to take reference from the person one's drawing that is done until now. So we have the option for that. We just took the world of you type and we'll this on parrot painter option here called referencing files. So this is called external references pen the palette. When I click on this, I will have external reference pellet we worked on the screen. Right, Chris. So you can see that it shows me the person to mince means that current file that is activities present 25. So now I would attach person once files to this blue that whatever do is I will click on Attach DWT option here. When I click on that, this will open the location before location where we say we fire so forth. Okay? Then I will click on this person won and I click on Open. I'm doing so you will have this basic screen. We already know all these values and parameters that we have studied throughout this course. Now, still we have two different options in this crying that is attachment and overlay. We will go through this both. So in reference type, I will keep it as attachment and press. Okay. Now, this will ask me to a point where I can taste this reference point to. So currently, when we do, We did not grow it in a similar scale or inches or we didn't draw them in similar parameter. So they might be over shamed for the current crying services. Put it over here. Now, you can see that there is some shade difference means I cannot select this lazy, meet whatever I am tangy say how to make to this triangle to go to that previous drawing and make the changes. So when I select this, this won't have any editing option. This will only show me the external references Option Backspace from this. And you can see that this is kindly fed it compared to this train, means visibility of this string is faded compared to this main drawing. That is person who's five. Close this dialogue box. Now, the person 3 needs to take the reference from the person 1 and 2 file to, to complete his project it is working on that is circled. So what we are doing is I will go to this person three's project and then open the external references pellet. Now, person two will be having the DWG option from this option. And we can also attach image file DWG to PDF, EEG and point cloud files. We already district is in importing and exporting PDFs and images options. So this is nothing but similar to that. I will click on this attach DWG. And I will select the person whose file, and then click on Open. So when I do so, you can see that on screen they're showing me something like this, but this does not contain the person wants file. Remember that? So what I'll do is I'll double-click on this, cancel. Close the state of MOOKS for now and they will sell, resale this person's file. So just click Control S, and this will save the file of this person to wit the external reference that is taken from the person 1's project. We will go back to this person 3 is pose. It will again go to the extended references options important EWG. And I will select the previously selected person who's project. Now, this time you can see that the Poisson ones, the extended reference is still attached with this drawing. So I'll click on Okay. And this will again show me the options where I want to bless this. So this is around somewhere here. Now again, the visibility of this to protect fires have been faded compared to those from. Now. What we'll be doing is we will take out the overlay option. But before that, if you see that there is this person to right now, then have some major changes in the project plan or workout done by the person 1 or you may mail made a mistake. So what we're doing is resend the shape of this current drawing or LAN. So these are just shapes for the example, in actual nor in existing projects, there could be some major tendons and the plants layout and other things. So there was a change in the shape of this project. Right? Now, version two has already explained the old file. So you need to reload this. So the person one will have to do is able to sail. This was a new file. Means here to overwrite the file, you just have to save it in the same location. Now, what's going to help with the notification that an x ref was modified? So complete the changes. And I click on this option, you'll see that that is a green logo wherever here that shows that there are two arrows circling each other means that the person one has made tenses to his file that is currently reference to this person who's project. So what do we were doing this? You can go to this option and click on Refresh when he does that terminology and dismayed to this. So to do that, what this person has to do is he just have to click on this person one's Project and click on Reload option when you do that. But when he does that, you will see that his hair is a reference x and F compared to low variable on screen, distributional changes made to the drawing. This blue is displayed in red and blue, right grams. The red diagram shows that the previously drawing, how did it look and what I've read where with the location of the lines and bring one shows the new changes or new form of debt growing. So we'll just click on this trade off button. So we just clicked on that button. And now this shows that this is loaded. So these things are now loaded. And this project, that person once modification, who've been actively or a win successfully loaded in person who's projects. So now person who can, again start working on the same project. Now coming to the person three will have the same notification, right? So what we're doing now is we will select the overlay option fray referencing. I will make this both. Now Person 3 needs some new changes, right? So we'll go to the View tab again. We will open the Preferences palette. And this both are on depressed or deleted as just did it with this both detach. Now, we'll retest to external reference that we took from person 1 and 2. Now wasn't really only needs person two's five, but person two is already project linked from the person one, right? So personally only requires the firework or person two means the person 3 only needs this part of the drain, right? Person two has already saved this part of the drawing with the references from the person 1. So what can this person number three new here is he can see similarly can distribute the procedure that we did earlier, attached DWG option. And he will click on this person whose file click on Open. And now except of attachment, they will become overly right when he does that and it looks okay. So he would option. Now you can see that again, this both files will be available on the screen to maintain this too, that he would have to go to the person to and ask him to it as different this reference drawing as an overlay Norton attachment. So this person two will again open this pellet, retains the drawing that was previously a test, and he will attach new file from personal one as an overlay. So we'll click on this personal one option. And except of selecting this attachment, he was elected as an overlay. And we will click OK and place it around you. I will close this data box. Now this is contained in this training is an orbital. When we go back to the person three, you see there are no chances solids as resale this as make tooting Control-S. And it will go to the control. And we will go to the person 3. Now again, we will have this notification option. I will click on this reload. And now when I reload it, this person who's project in this person three, with the option that we selected that was over letter, there's an attachment. Attachment. We're getting further older external references that were previously our debt to the drawing will only carry the current to project that is being worked on. So this was the difference between attachment in overlap in external references. So this is a collaborative tooling out of area. This is the school had been working in with forms or big projects where while some, so many of people are working on the same project, this is where taking, take references from each of this drawing for the music to be successfully completed without any errors. So this was all about external references and advocate. Thank you for watching. 103. Collaboration tools in AutoCAD: Welcome back. In this tutorial, we will go through some collaborative tools in AutoCad. Earlier we have straight above referencing, but that is not a collaborative to collaborative tool means that you can define differences. You can share files without periwinkle connection between two comparators. So supposedly for the status, if I'm drawing a circle here, right now, I need to open this circle in my mobile phone, okay, For your information, auto-fill API is also available in mobile phone, which will let you just reveal files and make basic tenders and measurements of the file. So this is made for the purpose that if you are away from your PC and you need to access some files. So to showcase a client, or you could just need to just go through some files. You can do it through your mobile friendly. So for those standards, I just need to save this file on my Cloud so I can access it to my drone mobile form to do that. Whatever do is a held to click on this, Save to Mumbai CO2 web and mobile option or wherever you are. And make sure you need to be locked in, in AutoCad, which your student account or your professional account in order it's 360. To do that. If you do not have learned that when you click on this icon to say return web and mobile, it will first ask you to login and then it will ask you to install a small blowing. It is hardly two to three megabytes in size. So you just have to click on yes on the prompt screen and login with your account. Now, if you do not have this option, you can analyze it from this drop-down button. It's a symptom web and mobile entities jagged. So it is available in my shortcut. But now if you do not have, you can also do go to this AutoGrader. I can click on this. Go to Save As. And we're auctioneer drawing to motivate away when mobile. So I can sail this Meditech on this nitrogen. When I do that, you'd asked me an update is available for seven more. Well, so I will just continue without updating for the moment for that plugin. Now this will open this dialog box. It will showcase my existing auto-grade files on my Cloud and also the current files that I need to save. I have to give it a name. I can save it on my drawing. I can also override other drawings from this option. So currently this is not a worthy to be saved, so I will not be same the two on my mobile phone or Cloud. Every digit this. Now let's go to the next tool. Now Ned, see the next option that is comparing two. When I go to the Collaborate tab, we have this DWG compared tool. So for the starters, I will draw a rectangle here. And I will draw one fuel model texts just randomly to demonstrate this tool. Okay, now this could be my file one. So I will save this file on my location and I would say we test compared to one. Now this file is cell. Suppose I make some changes to this file and move this rectangle at displace, right? And I will again save it as a new file now. So I'll click on the save as a new option. Now rather than one else's name it is two and save it. So the existing file is now saved as compared to two. So when I click on this dividend, you compare it to, this will open a browser window in front of me. So I will select the previous version of this file that was compared to one angle econ open. As soon as I do that, this will display me the changes that I've made previously to this file. So we knew that the red, this red rectangle demonstrate the previous location of this green rectangle or the same. They both are the same. But firstly, this green rectangle, most situated at this place, and currently it is moved to death play. So it will demonstrate, or it will show you the previous position of any movements, all changes made in the five. So this is how the DWG compared to who works in auto grade. Now, next option here, VA is compared to write. So suppose, sorry. I will create few layers here. And what are the home type or do they appropriate properties? Now I'll create a new layer. Okay, I will name it assertive you example, I will give you two colors of red option. That will be fine. Okay, I'll close this. I'll select the current layer to be shared views an example, and I will draw an ellipse here like this. Now, this is just assume that this is a plan and it contains different layers for a source, for the example, we're going to put it in a single layer. I'll save this file by clicking on controllers. Now, this file is saved at that basic location directory. The next option we had in Collaborate tool, this collaborate panel that was shared abuse. So when I click on this shared views, this will open a manager of the shared views of trade between the middle and let it load. This may take a few seconds. So yeah, we have this currently created as assertive you option. We need to be logged in. To make sure that this works for you. And either you need to have a premium subscription or the auto-grader program or unit to have a student account to work with this. And make sure you are also going to take to Internet while you were sharing of you. This is nothing but it will let you a shadow of a specific view of the drawing where the user that you've shared with also be able to toggle between the different layers on and off. So to have a basic idea of the grain, now I will click on this new shade of you. As soon as I do that, this will show me the options. So if I operated music other views from this, as we learned earlier, I can select them by sharing model you can auto-layout use. So frankly, we don't really share the current view. Ga today use only and I just click on Share. This will be processing in the background of this may take few seconds and I will click on process. You can see that there is a logo that is highlighting the current publishing shared views of In Progress. Once done, it'll show me a popup there. So let's wait for a few seconds for that. Now, as you can see on screen, sharing you upload is completed. So what I will do is let's double-click on this view in rows and Option, and then click on this dissolute. Take me to the my default browser, and it will open the Share Review Technique previously creating. This meant a few seconds to load the drawing as it does contain some many objects and properties. So imagine if this would be a big drawing, this will take several minutes to catch it around the corner. Now, you can see that the currently the drawing is now visible to the user that I have shared this specific link with. So this is how you can share different views of your drawing with this man, I click on this Layers option. I will be able to go, we'll move into layers mints. I can see that we created this rate colored layer. I can toggle on and off through this Layers option, I can show different properties of drawings. I can also have a views of different drawings. And I can also free to society's pan around and zoom, measure and go to the home. Now, if I wish to share it further with another user's, what I would do is I will click on this Share option. Now this will ask me to sign in to S1 of the signing with my Autodesk account. This will give me another specific link that will be small compared to the size of this currently, I would like you to do is I just have to share this previously as we did with users, then I need to share my current views with this could be client or any colleague that I am working with. So this is how the shared view walks in AutoCad. So solos all about saving the files to web, comparing drawings to collaboration tools and shared view that we used to share file views with different users in AutoCad. Thank you for watching. 104. Advance tools in AutoCAD: Welcome back. Finally retired now lats last section of this complete course of AutoCad. So having to learn some advanced tools that are available in AutoCad, you notice that we have option to create 3D models. Two means if you have a 3D model printer, you can print your model files in 2D format. And Firstly, before moving to that exciting part of the course, I will just show you another tool that is called action recorder to microbes too. So every time I start a new drawing, first steps I will be performing. There will be setting units, setting some parameters for drawing, setting limits. If I need to enter, there'll be some common step that I do every time before starting a drawing. Or you can also record your command line through this too. So we'll this action recording option here, right? This will show me the Action Tree Minster perform directions I will be performing. So before doing that, what I will do is I'll click on select that option. As soon as I do there, Texan tree will popup and there will be a red mark right next to my cursor. You, I hope it is visible to you one screen. So suppose I would say unit force, I would type UN and press Enter. Now the tens them to architecture. And you can see that inaction tree, this data is recorded recon, okay? I will draw a rectangle. And this see all this command that I'm using or with coordinates, angles are recorded on this dictionary quarter. Once done, I just have to click on stop. So this will be helpful when there's some kind of error. Or you need to record the command line or what commands are used to create a specific drawing. You can do this with the action macro tool. And I can save this file to destination, and I can add in play this that option. So once I save this file, it will be saved to a location. And I can relate this with display option. This will show me what are the changes have been made. So is this all there? As soon as I clicked on this Play button is open to doing units bar. So first action we perform in this drawing was that we mostly work with the drawing Units option. So this perform the same action again on blaming the Play button. Now, if there was some error that I created during this step, I can go back to the top of this action recorded. So currently the external recorder is all right to consider. I'll just close it on peanut, and I will close it. Now, this command line only records that last two commands. So first table instead, select. And it is given this lens on Philip. And you can see that the command line only shows the last two that are being used. So click on polls, press Enter, and I don't need to pause. Just the commercial world instead was the denser flows. I will use it as tool or whatever. So first for the example, you can see that only last two commands, it will be recorded in the command line. But with this micro too, you have turned on the recording. This will record all your command line from starting to the ending of the project or until you turn off the recording option of from the year. So this was all about macro tool or action recolor tool in AutoCad I, we did it this. Now. Next exciting tool that is available denoted by statistics 3D printing tool. So I will switch to the 3D view first of all, and I will draw first. Before doing that, I'll just turn this to the conceptual and display performance is on now. So what I will do is I will draw a rectangle. Once done, I will select this and click on explode, sorry, extrude option not to explode with Titov around any randomized. So this really just trying to show you that how you can change it to a printer. So once this model is ready, I have to say take this model 3D P, that is a short critical for the 3D printer and press Enter. Before we move ahead, I would like to remind you that this option is available in the latest version of Porto had only unit to update your photo editing if you do not have this 3D printing option in your Motorhead. So this requires careful abbreviation for successful output. So I'll just click on continue. Okay, This is very simple. You don't have to do anything. Once you start a slave the objects, I'll select this, press Enter. This will display me how this whole tissue lobe after 30 painting. I just have to click and drag it around to just see from different views. Once done, I can determine the different light of this. I can change the scale to be printed in 3D format. For this, once done, I just have to click on OK. The extension for the 3D printing file statistics as that is lethal Gadhafi. So currently this drawing format will be saved. Intel took it off the format. I just took to load that file in 3D printer and print it with the options data will go wherever on the 3D print and further, Hey, here comes the end of this course. And I hope you have the complete skill set that we went through as auto-grade and must you must go through the examples that are available where we will try to draw bland and convert the same plan into 3D rendering debt it. So thank you for watching. 105. Plan Drafting example (part 1): Welcome back. So far we have gone through all the tools that are used in, out of it. So in this example, we will demonstrate to draw typical residential two-story plan of a building. For the starters, as we have learned earlier, we should first start with by setting up two units in AutoCad. So we have learned that the unit can be toggled from this bottom status bar. Or you can also use the UN command, that is, units have pursuing and press Enter. Okay, So we are going to work in architectural units, sorry, switch that one, takes it away. I will set precision 200 inch and 0.5 inch. That'd be perfect. A quick Okay. I cannot showcase the line plan I'm referencing from the truck repair WAS but I will put it on screen for a few seconds so you can take a screenshot or you can just put it aside. Before we get started, I would like to give you some tips for the starters. So whenever you are starting to draw a plan of a building, Always remember there to start with a corner. Should never start drawing from the center or center part of the building because it may create data when you are spreading around the periphery. Later means that you are growing other parts of the plan. So when you start from the corner of a building, it will make it easy for you to reference the straight lines of the borders and you can easily put to other parts of the building without any errors. So in this, we will start with the left part. And that is a drawing room situated on the left part of our plan. So the size of this room should be 12 foot by 12 foot, 11 inches. Either I can draw a rectangle and either I can draw line. So as it is not symmetrical, I would prefer drawing from line so we can take it offset from other two sides to drawing the boundary wall of the house. So I will click down here and I will turn on the Ortho Mode, so we do not exist. Now it looks profit. Zoom out a little and we will draw, well foot line for the room border 12-foot and enter. Okay. I will move it up. And somewhere around here. Now we will get started by triangular parts of the drawing. So I will click and enter the line command. And now we will draw other side of this drawing that should be 12 foot and 11 inches. You might not be able to see the plan because it is drawn on a paper with pencils by me for those AS for the reference, but I will put it on screen or in the beginning part of this video. So you can go back and take references when you write, or you can just click a picture of that and put it aside while watching this tutorial. So the next thing here we should do is there should be a border here, right? But I assign does take is for this area. So before we do that, I will take offset of this two lines and create the boundary wall of the house. To do offset, the command should be or Ff and press Enter. I will click on say around here. And I will give you the distance to be nine inches and press Enter. Now I will give you this line and 90s of upset and you this line, the 1980s help offset. Now, as we know that we, as we started from the corner, we know that the older references of this part of the house plan should be taken from this two lines means dish two lines will be the boundary lines for the same. Sorry, if I started from the middle part, I may foster Australia case then bed from then theta should be, or there could be John, the software. And it could take long time to just focus on everything in, assign everything at it. Original glaze. So starting from a corner is always a good idea and it would also save your time. So the next part of this drawing should be on the right-hand side that is barking. So I will just close this part. First of all, I will copy this line. Rather than doing the new line, I will copy this line. And let's say around your survey, this should be the border for the same. And I will give it offset of nine inches as well. Right? So you may be noticing that these two line does not meet each other, that we will do that as we move further. Now, there is a region situated over this area. The size of the teaching should be eight foot, 0.5 inches by seven foot, 4.5 inches. So the reference of starting point of the kitchen is situated at the inner part of this wall. So I can either bring this up first or I can just throw it around here. So first of all, what I do is I will keep my arrow here and drag it a little bit up first, you see that there is a Light green dotted line visible to you like this. So if I door to draw the chin trauma your leg directly. I did not leave any space for the inner wall means that there is inner wall between the room and the kitchen. Kitchen cannot start directly from here. So if I need to take reference forced to why we're able to draw a line of four-inch easier. And then I can draw. Teaching from this Thursday shouldn't do the signer inner wall. But rather than doing this for easy method for that should be keeping your mouse on the corner, hold on a second or two, then slightly drag it upwards, make sure the green dotted line is visible, as you can see on screen. And I will type four inches and press Enter. When I do that, it will automatically D with a distance of four inches from that point and start my new point from that area. So now let's draw the length of the teaching. That is eight foot five inches, sorry, eight foot, 0.5 inches, eight food and 0.5 inches, that is half-inch and press Enter. And the others say, length of the kitchen is seven foot, 4.5 inches. Perfect. Once done, you can exit the command. And I will again give this offset of 4.5 to this both lines. I will click on them. Take the offset and I will say point here, 4.5 inches. Press Enter and I review the offset of 4.50 this side and all of this, right? Okay, so we have drawn the boundary lines for the kitchen area. Now let's draw the inner wall that will be situated around here and a boundary will, that will come along a year. So we as we left a space of around four inches for the other side, small-sized whole folder plan. We will take offset from this inner side of the wall and throw the outermost area. To do there, I will interrupt offset command. Press Enter we to point and you the distance of four inches and press Enter. Now we've offset to this point and this point from this lines. I mean, they will trim this and we will extend this N once we are done with the small part of this drawing. Now, let's try the other side of the string. Currently. Essence we have drawn this two sides, this show also comply or also be existing on this site too. So let's draw that. In the end. Drawing it again, I will just copy this. So let's move on to the next part. That should be the dining room above the kitchen area. The kitchen area should have open door. So we will put open door over here on the coming portion. For now. Let's do the dining room. Okay. So size of the dining room, she's 12. Where food 58. Before that, I will just connect this two points and give it to offset. Press Enter as we need to this clique 24 inches and press Enter again. Now we're, we want the border for this. The dining room is extending from this point towards this area at the length of 12 foot, five inches. To do that or draw it, I will draw a line just for the reference over here. Now, we know that we need to draw length of 12 square foot five inches from this point. So we can get exit location of the point from exit this point. Alright? So let's draw that or inter, we can do one thing is we will just draw lines from here that shouldn't be 12 foot, five inches and press Enter. On doing so, we will get our location for a point. Now again, I will join this line and throw it away rather than measuring it, we can just do one thing is take the reference of this point from this distances, like this turn. Okay, so we're done that part two. Now, we will draw the, another length of this dining room that is 20-foot. From this point, I will extend the line and draw the 20 foot for the another length of this dining room. So to close this, I can do is I will just leak around here and I will take a reference point and press Enter. Now, it is not exactly touching that this line, but it may comprise over here. So it is fine for the moment. Now there is a store rooms iterate write about the dining room because I saw store room is five foot by ten foot, one inch. So before that, I will give another portal, or you can say the outer area for this. And I will go to Offset and I will do the opposite of 90 to set is the boundary voids press Enter and you would offset. So this will be my boundary wall for the statistics part. Now this may extend elbow as per the length of the length required for our store room. Now to draw the store room, I will put my line. I will click on Line command, put my arrow over here. And I will take reference affordances for the inner wall, type four inches and press enter. So this will activate the line commanded the distance of four inches from this point. Now, the length of this. Store room is five foot on this side. So RIS file and food and enter. And on the other length of this store room should be 10 foot, one inch. And press Enter. Now I will just join this with the reference lines, and I will click on here. Okay, this looks fine now. And rather than extending area which is for the moment, click offset. Press Enter and to offset of this line. It 1980s press Enter and do it here also. And we'll do the same for this, this time. This shall be of 4.5 inches or four inches. So I would record offset you length of four inches. Press Enter and you this line. Four inches of hops head for the boundary. We're now there is a toilet situated on this part, right? So to do draw there before I start with this, this time, you can see that we do offsets means that we need to start exactly yet foreignness from this line and a little bit four inches from this line. Now, you may notice that we have to take the offset of both the points. Means there is offset that we need to take it 4.5 inches from this line as debts would be innervated within the toilet and the storeroom. And this will be another offset from this land that should comprise of another inner wall between dining area and the toilet or common toilet. We can say that. So for that we will again use the same method. We will click on Line Tool and we will take the offset from this point as we have already held offset from this line at this point or on this x-axis. I will keep my most over year and rugged little bit on the left side and press four inches and press Enter. Now again, we have offset from this point at four inches and also from this point at four inches. As you, we know that the side of this lens should be six foot. So press six and press boot, sign and press Enter. Now, the size of this should be seven foot, five inches. So seven foot, sorry, that should be 7.5 inches, that is half-inch. And press Enter. And I will join this, the reference off this point around here. And so in the saline over here. Now we have again drawn the inner wall of this common toilet. I will use this and I will give it to offset of four inches or lean and write this. Or rather than no, that should go at the point nineties because that would be my exterior wall and that should be a bedroom that is also going to be off ballpoint five inches or nine inches around year. So executing the offset of 90, just go to offset for us enter knew the distance of nine inches. And somewhere around here. I will extend this line with the reference, this point. So later we can extended throughout, right? Now we have the bedroom ready, we have the kitchen ready, we'll dining area already, and we also have the when drawing room ready. So only left part over here is the bedroom. So as we discussed earlier, when we start from a coordinator for joining, it is, it becomes easy. It means that things start falling into its own pattern. Like that. We just have to start drawing the lines that connect each other rather than v. If we would have started from the middle part, it wouldn't be that easy to connect each part or to go and each area. When you are starting from the corner, it is easy to move around the border and complete the inner part later. So this will give you a lot of flexibility while drawing your drawing and also you can avoid that. Now let's continue. And I will again give a interval between the bathroom and bedroom. So that should have been go for port 15 inches. I really would offset and I will do distance of 4.5 inches and right over there and drag it over this side. Now, the event of the bedroom, so length of the weight room from this point shall be 12 foot, and from this point should also be the 12-foot. So I will click on Line. We'll drag it over here and draw 20 foot line over this side and where faultline over this state of being. Now, we will cross check our drawing so we can see that there should be some chances of error, right? As we taught out of the year. And let's see, we have every year when it read it in extend this line. This line is not exactly meeting up to this point. Mr. be aware of some length between this all parts. So let's try to figure it out first. Now, I will cue to distance that we have used already edit distance command to measure the distance between two points. And we'll click on Distance. Leaf over here and leaf over here. We have a pair of four inches. So what we will be doing is we will just take this lines, this part of the drawing slightly inwards. This, this is a roughly prevent land, land, this may not be accurate measurements. So I will just read it. At this point. Now we'll encountered an error and we household theater on this drawing. So I'll make some connection with growing. Now it looks perfect. I will critique on this line and extending to it this point only. Exactly. So let's give it the offset to this both lines or three lines. I will join this two line, right? The join command. And press Enter. Now let's give offset to this both lines we can offset kill distance of nine inches. And I'll do this line offset of my inches and use Len offset of nine inches 2. Now, let's draw the another boundary line of the room. So the boundary of this room, or another length of these Romans 1200, draw this very flute from here. And I will be around here. Now, this line should be decreased to x at this point around here. And I will increase this length of line around here. Now we're drawn to another side of this med room. And I will give you the offset or this port line as a inner world. So go to Offset, you distance of four inches. Press Enter on this new four-inch and I really condescending even to orange. So we have most of all the parts of our plan ready to go, but there are only two parts remaining now. That should be the passage over here, a toilet over here, anesthetic is over here. So before we move on to that, my will let you know that this drawing is now almost ready. If you would have started from this drawing here either. First, I have to complete this. Both parties should be challenges of arrowed over here. There should be tons of water edit over here. By starting from a corner point a, you always and always avoid your error chances to minimum MSE. You can have only list number of errors in 2D plan. So always try to start from the left corner or right corner and rubber plants. So let's get started. The toilet size for this pottage path from to this bedroom is around 706 foot. So forth. Lens would be the seven foot and other length is six foot. So to do that, what I will do is I will click on this. Then I will, rather than drawing whole line, I was a sticker affluence of say, seven foot. Press Enter. So you can see that this went very farther away. Means we need data around, somewhere around here. But this to get to the next level means that decided on what the other point, this is not acceptable to sold it at. And what I will do is I will, rather than Zooming it out or zoom in more glucose, whatever then plugging, sorry. So I will put my cursor over here. On the right side, include the lens seven foot and press Enter. This time. You can see that it takes Italy to the reference as we wanted. So if you are taking a distance of more than two to three fates, always remember that you just zoom in. So this won't take it automatically snap from nearest point. There could be some bug or error in auto grade that is taking or giving the reference off snip point from this land. So earlier it took that transplant around year. So always keep your mouth Zoom when we're taking a reference that is more inland from total three-fifths. Now, I will give it to another lens that is six feet six and hit Enter, Enter. Now I will join the other side of this length, and it would be seven exactly. Now we've offset of 1.5 or four inches for inner world. And this both side again. You can offset and press enter you 40 inches and four inches around here. Now, again, this is ready. Now we only need to draw the length of this another lent and close it from this side. So we will have this space left out for the state, or we can just take the reference from this point in complete this. So the drawing area size, she's 12 foot 11 disease as we discussed earlier. So what I will do is I'll take a reference point and say I will pose it from this point. And to verify that I will just draw another line for the reference. Yes. It says that it is 12 foot, 11, sorry, 11 inches. So it is correct. Now, I will give offset of, say, four inches for the inner side of this state case. Pretty cone OF press Enter as the previously introduced on this boring is our press Enter again and we would offset. Now it looks fine. So let's, before moving onto the next part, Let's just define all these cuts and leaped out places. First of all, I will just close all these lines like this. And I will just move it around here. This line can be extended when we need a line for this. And we joined with this both lines. And whichever line that cannot be extended uses TO two. If I select the spotlight and tried to extend them, you can see that we cannot do that. The path does not intersect with boundary edges, means that there are no bounding edges around this part that can be intersected. Means if I draw a line, say write this and try to extend this both. This will definitely let me extend it. The problem is that it cannot join the two existing line ditto some gap in-between. We need to do that manually, like this. And if I extend this line to this point now near and try to extend this, definitely extended it to the next point. So whenever possible, make sure you hit Enter, you do this and follow that method. But Ted method will require you to move to step is posterior to see like this line proposes, like this. Take a reference point in extend. And then you're going to learn how to enter the command that is extended and extended another line. So rather than doing that, this will save you time. And we'll do the same over here. Credit from the vertex, then take the reference from other line, enjoying it. Check it, that happens and joined us. So currently we will only be joining the lines, are developing apps that are visible layers. I will do the same year. I going to actually extend this. So I will try to extend. It. Still has some errors, so I'll just go down here. Okay. We answered that in the slightest. And I will just join this last part of the train. Now our simple well-planned for the house is ready. Now, we need to trim out some of these middle parts on the walls. And we need to also create open spaces for the entrances and doors. Before that, let's create a layer for the walls. And before we create the layers, we will just remove first multipaths. They'll join this as we I guess before that. So let's delete it. I will click on, select the whole drawing or gland. Click on trim command and press enter. And remove this four lines too. Okay, it looks much better now is is really verify it if they reveal missed any part. We are not. So what we'll be doing is we will create a layer for the voice. I will go to layer properties, and we will have the layout or what is the dialog box pop up on screen. Now I will click on this new layer button, do it. Named voiced. And I was elected the color to be white. So I worked creation or a water layer collision is now done. So we will move this entire drawing to the moon of the sodium, to the voice layer. So select this whole drawing and go to the properties by pressing the control one butter. This shows that the lines, so from the layer it is current decision on this. And as you get towards now this whole lines are moved to the walls layer. Click Close, less. One of the great press the Escape key to current layer is switch back to 0. But when I select this line, this will show the layer of this line that is false. So now we've drawn the basic goal plan off her growing and it is already. Now we will draw those little before drawing steps, I would create a layer here, give it the name stairs. And it started in, double-click on it. And I will lock. The layer was further white. I'm working on it. So I will not held to or I, it won't drag and select any lines from this when I tried to draw the stairs. So let's take on what space we are left with here I will go to the distance command again. Press Enter plus point, and this will be my second. So the distance is around 710.54 inch. So what we will do is I will give it a step off 3.5 foot from here and 3.5 foot formula. And we will deal with the steps. So the basic height of a building is around 10 feet or 2.5 meter. In general, residential building are pointing to the Indian standards. So if you divide the height of a building by the number of states you can provide, that should be around 14 to 15. So accordingly, minute to provide the riser and Twitter as well. So if I draw, let's measure that force length available. I will select this point and dragging my mouse here. So we have one other. Seven, to say seven foot, four inch of length available here. So what I will do is I will draw each step of 1920s. But before that, I will click on the line. Or let's start with this rectangle. First 48 sono step. I'll give you this my first, and I will review the length for both sides. So first should be my nine by type at threat. Now I review the horizontal length of the step that is 1980s, as for the trader. And the next should be comma and another height is 3.5 foot. And I will press Enter. Now this we're asking me to whether I can just drag it. I'm going to do this would be my corner points services. Move it from this point, resit around here. Now my step is ready. I will just copy this tip down across, say I will create more four steps of this similar. And we can multiple option from this status bar and select this. This will be my first, second, third, fourth. Now we have five steps around here. Now what I'm doing is I will just drag this line and joined this around here. Now we'll find steps on the side that is 1, 2, 3, 4 file. And we can create another three steps over it. It will be 678. This one should be nine. So 8 plus 8 is equals to 16. And we will able to another step that is Hillary or wherever here that we may 17th step. So expert norms of Indian Standard, this theory of my perfect setup for the stairs case. So I will create another three steps at this part. So before doing so, we need to draw a slant lines this time. So the automotive will not let us do that. So I will turn off the ortho and I will draw it this midpoint. Third line. So we need to limit point. So I will create two lines on this, ranging and drenching around here. So we have two lines creating a border for the other side of the steps are pretty con, this middle point create a step that is mixed terminal point of this line. Never create another line from this center point, emitting a middle point on this part. So this is my step, three steps, 30 year. So my other steps are ready, that will be 7, 8, and 9 step. Now, what I can do is rather than drawing the same steps or lean here, I will just metre this. So before mirroring this, I will select all these steps. And don't worry, as we accidentally selected the voice also, but we are locked to a false layer, so it won't be selected. Tet was a specific reason I loved the worst layers. So make sure if you are working on some complicated part that is aligning with other lines, suppose you are the lengths of this pole ends chairs should be aligning each other. So if necessary or if it is possible, lock the other layer for the time you are just working with the stairs. So what I'll do is mirror this with the mirror to the shortcut key for that is a Mai. And press Enter. Read my mouse and select all draw a line. To give this a straight A's. I was just turn on the auto mode and press Enter. Sorry I missed it. Selected a my shortcut key and also what is already own, and I will draw it and I click on noise. We need both the sides. Now I will just select this and place it at the right position. Click on More. So 10 percent corner point of this and put it in the corner point of this. Now we have the stairs ready over here. Or we can do is we can just still it does both lines and join it and give it a center point of middle step. Now this looks fine now. So my stage cases ready for the drawing. What I will do is I'll select all this and click on Join command. So this will join the major lines of this drawing. You can see that. So measure lines over here I joined another oral deaf days, rectangles like this. So my stairs are ready. We will change the color for the stairs. So I will go to the Layer Properties, click on white for the stairs and I will give it stares a lot of say, gray tree cookie. It may not be propyl divisible. But that's okay for the moment. And I will run up the stairs. Layer recon was layer to unlock it. Now we've drawn the stairs. Now time comes for the openings. So main interests, old drum roll or house for the living room should be around here. They should be open area. They should also be an open entrust. Put it on trend should be from this inside this room. There should be one dude over here and two doors over here. So currently we will have saved 123 in three sets of doors in this house. Means that you might be observing that implants there is a stable drone did safe. The schedule of opening means that Mencius, all the length of those in windows into house. So for this drawing or this plan, we will create the same. Before that is towards layer is active, oblique one line and I will draw entrance over here. So I just close this part. Now what I will do is I will copy, click on Copy, select this, and give it a distance of 3.5 volts. That is the main door entrance length or broad or with 3.5 foot and press Enter. Now, I will select this three and click on dream and delete this part. So over here, we can create a daughter of 3.5 foot. Now, let's do the same with the other parts. So as mentioned, this should be the open area or open to move passage. Close this quote, the sides. Go to the kitchen and I will do the same over here as the kitchen does not have adoring gender. So what I'm doing is I will just select this line, copy it, and I review the entrance as same as the main door that is 3.5 foot. Press Enter. Okay. We will trim it on later on. And I will give this around here to where the entrance of this storeroom. And this time the length should be approximately say 2.5 would be 0.2.5 and press Enter. Now, I do not have to do this again and again, so I will copy this as this quote, The rooms or areas should have the same size of the door. So I will do is click here and paste it around here. Perfect. Now I will just move it around 40 inches from this point. Okay, fine now, and move this to around four inches. This looks fine. And at the end create a door or around this room. And the door for should be say, three-foot. So I will do is except of course. So I will again copy this around three-foot. Press Enter. So it partakes bathroom. When do the same procedure, draw a line here, select it, copy it, and copy it around. It will point 54 and enter. And I will move this both the lines four inches outside of the inner wall. Press Enter. And now we have drawn the opening, so I will select all that was required by trim command and press enter and delete the openings. You can see that this deleted the entire line because that was attached to the same opening. We'll fix that later. I will delete the rest for the moment, right? So these are the common types of problems that you will be facing when you withdraw from the line. So what I'll do is I'll just select. You can see that this lines are not currently touching this. So let's detect what is there at here. When I select this line, this line shows that it is a connected line means we can easily trim among the parts of this triangle, but it is not letting us do that because let's figure out what is the issue here. When a zoom-in, okay, see here there were missed to join this port the parts currently correctly because of maybe there should be a snappy shoe. So what I will do is I'll select all this four lines and these two lines we connect stained and I will extend this lines. The shoulder. Yes, this is extended and I will click on this board and extend this both to. Now, let's try the trim command or the known this lines. So the ellipse this part, click on TR, press Enter. And yes, now we are able to dream again. We may have made some errors, so it's just randomly joined this. That should be good to go. Right? Now. We have drawn a plan and we upgraded the openings two intervals. So next portion should be creating doors or windows. So let's start with the windows. So there should be one window around here, there should be one window around deer, Ponyo here, catch and shoot heroine. So wanting window over here. And one should go over here. There is ventilation in this bathroom, ventilation in this cottage bathroom. Two windows for the bedroom and storeroom can also have a ventilation on this end area. And dining room can always play with the one window over here. To create a window, select the midpoint of the line, like this, but add it to the next part and copy this line on the word three-sided around three-foot. So that will create a window of 614 total. I will move this center line around 34. Press enter. Now, we notice that we have only unvoiced layer. So before one did just, let's create a Windows layer and press Enter. Probably count is creativity and I will tend to color too when you press OK. Close it. And I will know this both lines into the windows layer on by doing, by Quick Properties control one, select walls and tends to Windows and close it. Now everything we draw will be drawn into Windows layer as we have selected the windows, do we currently active? And I will lock the layer. So I'll draw a line. Around here. And I will just meter. It is showing the universal type of the scale we drove for the scale. So I will just draw a random line here. I will just select it, and I will draw meter or meter it on the other side to show that a reversal line that we draw for the window domain, okay, This shows that there is a window over here. This is a general practice. You might have observed that in glanced. So rather than making it everywhere, what I can do is I can select this and copy it. Or I can just group this makes addicting and right-clicking and against his group, it has to be congruent. So I updated a group of this window for the 1980s or full. So wherever there is a nine inch thickness or full, I can test the window or I can change the size if I wish to. So I was select this. Click on Copy by C, press Enter. Select it from the midpoint. Turn off the ortho, and I will put it around somewhere. Opioid, the midpoint of this line, so they shouldn't be found here. And again, select this copy, select multiple option. And again, drag it from the center point. That should be around here. And I will take it around here as the center point for the same. Again, do one line window here. One window here, and one window shall go over here into dining area. So these are all for the nine inches hold. So what we'll do is next digital predators like this. Click on rotate tool and order it takes from its middle point. And I will turn on our total protein into specific detection like this. Select this, click on rotate tool, select the center point and rotate it. I will do the same with this. Both window selected. Click on rotate tool from the center point and rotate it. This is the easiest way I'm trying to show you to draw bland quickly without making any errors. This should be very slow or the base of our tutorial should be slow for you to easily understand. Once you start practicing this, you can get a good speed and grip over the method and try to rotate it. Now let's place it at the correct location. So click on it, click on More, and I will just place it by reference point. I'll do the same year m, enter and place it around here. Follow the same method over here, selected Kress Tim, and drag it around here. Well, the same goes over here, and same goes over here. Now we're done our major thing in the plan. So again, we need to create a window for the 425 inches worth 30 and 12 should go around here. And we need control, ventilation for urban fantasy total or year, and ventilation for the bathroom here and the bathroom year. So let's get done with that first. So we'll even go to the light, select a middle point TO line here. Selected cooperate around 2.5 foot this time because it's okay to have a small windows in the kitchen. Well, so the result should be that we do not have much length or area wherever in the kitchen was. So 2.5 fresh food and Enter. Now this will be same for this part also, the Como and 2.5, it is a foot and reenter. And everybody into the two lines for the demonstrating the window glass. This and I will just meet at this dish should be any length or size. You don't know not how to make it exactly symmetrical on both the parts, because any two-by-two lines shall demonstrate to a window in any plant that is a universal method used. Select this. And I would have been a little bit by right-clicking on it and grew, and grew. So we have another group of window for the principal. I was elected from the midpoint and cooperate and grass it around here by turning off the ortho and I will just press it around here. So we have this ready for the placement, have oblique on this, rotate, turn on auto, regulate for middle point and rotate it. Now I will just move it at the correct distance of point. Now we architected the window. So time for the ventilation. That will do is I'll select this. And I have oblique around here. No ventilation could be of 2.5 feet in width or 20 feet. So I'll just do is click on copy and copy this line around to fit. Mentor will draw two lines over here. And I will emitter this first line from the middle point of this two lines and click on No. So ventilation is ready, I will just move it four inches outside of this interval. Now we're drawn the ventilation to come back to this area and have good ventilation for this totem as well. Select this both lines, copy and tofu it on the next site. And I will draw two lines over there so as to demonstrate the glass that is available in between this ventilation. Select this part and I will just meet at it. Click on No. Now, what we did who we are is located to two ventilation but UNC that there is 14 inch wall and there is another photo, 106. Plan Drafting example (part 2): So what we need to do here, Morris, need to provide a parapet and oh, wow, boundary for the open interest. So what I'm doing here is I will select these points. I will draw a line from this point, keeping this as a inner world. So drag it and take a snap and reference from this point. Reference of this line around here is my boundary. And tissue will be extended around here. It is point. Now, this is the boundary wall for the open terrorist. So click on this and grieve it offset of 3.5 inches for the topic. Select this and I use the trim command to delete the extra parts that we do not require. Now, the plan is almost done with. But before that, I will also like to tell you one more thing that we can put other text and M text for the measurements. And we also use we can put them to explore the dimensions of renewed rooms and extra trap. And I will teach you another method for the dimensions. So let's start by putting them text for the same. So what I'm doing here is click on tab and I will go to the multi-line text to create a box. And I will give it the name living room. And I will select this hole and give it, say one inch of size, press enter and exit the command. This is too small for them joining. So whatever we are doing is I will double-click on it. Select this whole align it first, hit the center point. Select this again, go to the properties and we can now change the text height is per our requirements, so 10 try six inches and press enter. This looks readable, but I would have been width to eight inches and press Enter. So this looks fine now. So what I'm doing is I move this term, although so first and I remove it at a proper location. I will select this n, go to the copy, click on Multiple syllabus from a corner point, and I will open it at all the areas in this plan. You might be guessing that if I am putting their living room area or living room around all the parts because we do not need to create them text again and again and change the land ten size of the different types of fonts and everything. So I was just to make it easy, I will just copy around all the parts like this. So what I'm doing is I will double-click on this again, select all by pressing on today and give it a name teach-in week on the right side to exit. Or the interest would be my dining room. So cleaning amazes containing room, they should be touched toilets. So u dot w c, that will be for washroom. This, this should we make common and press Enter and you to name WC. Again. This should be the store whom, so store and who? And this should be my bedroom. So type bedroom. One is this How plan contains multiple bedrooms on the second floor. So we are done with naming and taking this M text on this side. I will go to this part. When you this a name that should be the R touch and WC. They should be a window tisch WHO rather than typing it out again here we just click on this edge. I will copy this. At this point. They shouldn't be my bedroom number 2. And okay. It should be the living room too. Okay. And it should be the common WC. Move it at a perfect position. Somewhere around, fine. And this should be the bucchero. They shouldn't be the third bedroom, all this plan. And this is going to be the open terrace. So we are also learn by giving the labels for the specific areas. So we are almost done with the basic so far plan. The next thing that we will move on to is labeling the windows and doors. And another thing that is left for us to label the dimensions. So I will teach you some methods for leveling the dementias. But before that, let's set a with the windows in ventilation indoors labeling. So currently, we have two types of windows. The windows are teaching, teaching in this pooja room out of five hoods and other windows that are attached over, all over the plants that are containing of wheat, that is six bits. And this ventilation out of profits everywhere. So what we'll be doing is we will give it names that D1, D2, D3, that is commonly visible to you or you might have absorbed into general plans. So I will just copy this living room and place it around here. Double-click on this and give it a name as w1. So just select this w1. I decrease the size of this box. It, it does not contain more selections space. So I will just copy this now by giving one multiple and w1 to be around everywhere. So I will just move it. And this is the sixth fit. This is also six feet. And it is a 65. Sorry. I didn't know when to go to tear. This should be a Lean Six fit. And we are done. Now I will rename this to be v. That is supposed to denote the ventilation, the press Control and press stopper key to move it without mouse. So you can do that. If I wanted to move this text slightly on the left or right-hand side, I can press Control key and click the mouse buttons. You might, you can track them. My mouse keys on the left corner of this screen. So this is how you can most likely by clicking one currentRow plus arrow keys. Now I will copy this ventilation and presage around here. Again, every copy this, click on Multiple and place it around here. So this denotes that it is a ventilation. Now I have to place the windows for w and w here. So there will be, I will copy this first and give it a name W o p to win around here. Perfect. Now what we do is an extinct. Thus I will copy this both Windows. This all locations of this other windows, because they are made, they are meant to be same on this side, two of this drawing, rather than everything else. There could be some variations in doors, so we won't be able to copy all the doors labels. Is really bert, we can copy all these windows and ventilation levels. I will click on Copy. I will select this as my reference point. That is the right corner of this living room. And this bedrooms right corner shall be the same place, the living room surplus it around deer. So this is almost our work. Half of the work done with this plan on leveling. Now all is left is to give the names for the dose. So what will be the door for this debt will be D1. So I will copy this for a moment. Is a do not need to create another text books and give it to other properties. So keep it as B that we remainder. And I will copy the serine. And I replace it around this two. So that will remain D2 for the bedroom door. Now, I will select this, copy it around here. And I will label it as d3. That is for the third size that it 2.5 feet off the doors, data store room, common domain, teach bathroom doors. I will select this. Click on Copy, select multiple and corporate around here, and incorporate around here. Now, you can see that we can again place this toes and labels on this plan to services Cuvier. Click on this one over here, D3. And this is also meant to be the T3. Know, I stop this two doors, that is D and d2 are same on this plan to that is bedroom door and bedroom door to. So I'll copy them and bless it around here. So this should be okay now. So there is a slight edit in destroying tissue. This is meant to be the studio room, so I will rename it as freedom. So sorry, that was an error from my end. And I will just created, okay, Now this looks fine. Now moving onto the next thing. First we will do is create the Dimensions of how this join. But before that what we will do is I will select everything except this was. So I will unlock this component world. Now. I will use the quick select tool, so forth, using the quickselect to read, go to the properties, and I will give up the quickselect tool. So I created another area that was on purpose that we did not define another layer for this levels. So if I want to hope you all things and without the labels will be candy, kind of impossible for me. So what I will do is I'll go to the Layer Properties and create a new layer containing the name tags, the areas or labels you can name it both, make it as current active layer. The color to be white BI report, the press Escape key. Now, how we select this whole plan and use the quick select tool that is available in utilities. So this is just to on purpose made mistake. So I can show you that if you are for, if you forget to create a specific layer for some part of the drawing that is supposed to be of different categories. Suppose here that is M text or text tools. So you can define it or filter out the selection by the wig Selection tool that is available on this Utilities panel. Certainly quantised quickselect. And I will select the applied to current selection object type to be the M text. And I will property shouldn't be there, color or layer. And I will select the value to be which value is 0. We placed the oldest name text on the walls layer, so click and click on. Okay. Now this was a pretty define all the M text that is available in destroying that is on W or worse layer. So our task is almost done. I just have to click on inventory one that would open the query properties for this. And I will select this layer and tangent to the name text. Now, all this name text can be locked, right? Correct. This lead writer, right. Now, I'll copy this plan around this corner by autosomal so forth. Now, let's unlock this name to axillary. Now what we have to do is we have to be other dimensions through his drawing support. Doing that, I will start by creating first my specific dimension style. So if you are starting with new standards, always good to have a dimension first coexisting in the drawing. So suppose here if I draw dimension is not visible, sorry, I will start with the standard dimension. First. Dimension, manage dimension styles, create a new image, tenders me. My dimensions, really can continue. As soon as I do this will open the new invention style manager. I click on lines, that should be fine. Everything on this should be fine. I will click on fixed length origin and aggregate length of say, four inches. So remember that targeting that I take are mostly P4 divided creating plants. And we give arrow size to be two inches. And this might not look be just might not be looking okay for the moment, but it will definitely be fine once we select or we will have other properties. Or you take slink to be six inches. And I was afraid, nor we do not need to be afraid. We it will change the primary units could be our detector and give it a length of 0. To install utterances, we do not have to view alternate units for that string. And you also do not require tolerance. It is set to default and it is perfect for the moment. I will increase the arrow size to be three inches. That will be fine. I'll click on Okay, click on Close. Now, we will create another layer for the dimensions. So I click on New Layer and dimensions, press Enter. We double-click on it. And I will change the color of dimension to be blue. The blue color of the dimension will be now peer test. Currently receive shifted two dimensions. So let's try. Let's start baking three-dimensions. Already mentioned that dimension should be from the inner to init or football. So lever dimension over here. And I will use another dimension at this corner. So individuate months, you might be noticing that the length of the area of the room and stuff is also mentioned below this M text. But in the recent plants originally sent trend, the dimensions are mentioned in horizontal and vertical as well as just with the M text means that M M Tech does not contain any information about the dimension. It is only showing the area and the dimensions are internally mentioned it and wall-sized I mentioned or pre-defined on any side of the drawing. That means that the whole plant contains only two to three is typo specific holes that is currently easily visible to ice. As you can see that these are the three coils and the other thin walls. So there's no much difference on that board. Before that, I will just lock the other layers so we do not mess up with anything else. So the slope, all of them except the dimension layer. Now, I would have been starved. The dimension he would imagine is a Keaton on this point. To this point. On this side as well. So here we are almost done with the dimensioning. So first of all, when you are giving a dimension who are open terrace or parapet, or there should be a balcony or teres. We will not have to mention the inner two inner dimension means that I don't want to go to mention the thickness of this parabolic dish would be anything. They can either use a glass bar operator or other material for the parapet means taken either use Grails or anything. So it is not pre-specified to use any one of my German full-time same. So we'll give it to detect measurement of like this. So from the boundary of this line on the both end sites like this. So we are almost done with the measurements here. Now there is one more thing left is to test edges a little bit of space where they are overlapping. As you can see that this overlapping this around this part. So I'll just adjust this a little bit. I'll go to the dimension and I will unlock the name text and other more slightly on the right-hand side. I would just anywhere tech should be aligned properly. This all seems fine on this part. There are no much errors. So I'll just change this totem too little bit output shifted, shifted around here. This looks fine now. And Common Room tool, okay? So we are also done with the dimensions. The blue-colored might not be visible properly currently, but when we're going to rotate, it will be visible to us when we see it in a PDF form. So that's fine. We'll pretend the blue-colored to showcase the different types of elements that are currently in destroying. Now, we are done with this. So what more lepton this string is it. We have created two copies for this. So in this we will place the default blocks of kitchen, bedrooms and WC to showcase the drawing. But before that, we have to define the steps. Means I would unlock all the dimensions first. And this will be fine. I'll select the stairs to be active. And I will select line. And I will draw a line over. This line should pass through all the midpoints on these stairs like this. So this looks fine, but you might be wondering what is this four? So this is nothing but the integration that stage are meant to be gone from this part to this. So what I can do is draw an arrow here. I will turn off the ortho. And there's middle of this line, somewhat around here. Sorry, I missed it. I will join this shape, mighty Andrew. And I will give it to head. So to activate the hedge communities stereotype edge and press Enter. Select the space that is meant to be this. Before that I will select it as solid or from solid. Selected as, sorry, from US current I was elected byte. That is this. But let me teach you on the point here. See if I select this white color. Main star tv radio, quiet, as we all know, is 255, 255, 255. So when we convert it into a PDF, it will be automatically converted into indivisible arrow. So to make it reasonably strong or visible through eyes, I will select this and I will go to the group are available. Now from this true color value, I will switch to RGB from this color mode. And you can see that this is also equal to 55. I can either edit this directly or I can change the from this two arrows. Service electives as 254, 254, that is now point less than the exit white color. So this will be visible when we convert this into a PDF and I will give it to this boundary, press Close the hedge creation. Now, I'll select this line. This all the lines. And I will go to clip properties. And I review the color to them, should mean white. So when we select this quite correlated is available in this properties dropdown, that is men, that shows that theta two, white and black in it means that when we are drawing it will be showcased at white. But when we convert it into PDF, upload it on sheet, just going to be converted into a black color. But it is fine. But when we do it in the hedge, you might meet or you must consider to switch to 254 value for the white color. Now I will join this if press J and enter. So I will join this. I will select this and select this hedge to. And I have a little bit. Now, what I'm doing is I will admit her this so bleak one-meter press around here and I really don't know. Now, I'll select this and move it to another state off the second level. Why did we meet it is that the cells can only go one way. Miss you feel climbing from here. We can also climb down from this area only. So this is the indication for the steps that is ready. I will copy this both a step indication to the other Hopis off the plan to let them both. And I will click on Copy and Paste it around here. With this reference point. This looks fine now. So our work with this plan is almost done. Okay, so moving on ahead, we are done with the labeling, dimensioning, and drawing the plants into regular format. Now coming on to the right-hand side, we will create some internet blogs and destroying means that we will specify that this is a paired, so there will be placing a small bads. This very replacing some seats and few arrangements for the same. So we will create another layer, naming it as furniture. And I'll double-click on it. And I was set when you offered to be white color. And I will close this dialogue box. Now, when each layer is active, right? I, o this library of containing different types of blocks. Suppose if you have the needs for this elevation of beds, there are a few types of pairs, sitting arrangements, dining tables, trees. You name it, you will have it on this one. So this is my personal collection of the blocks. So this will be also provided in the download section of this course. So do not worry. I also help predefined dose and few stairs and elevations. And there are some mixed elevations that I generally use in drawings, equitable year. So we will start by painting a few elements. So let's start by placing it in the living room service. Let this go to this drawing first. Now you can see that we have with this living room here and there is a main entrance here so we can place two so far zones, this corner. So it will do the interior. And I will select this block and incorporate. And then we'll do the drawing one and paste it. Now you might observe that this is not a specifically sized grid we need, but before that we will rotate to our desired location. And this should be fine, sorry, done on the ortho and rotate it as per my requirement. This should be fine. So let this go to scale. And scale, this is for my requirement. And I will move it around this corner. You do not have to worry about placing this eta or scaling this at the exit measurement because this is just the basic layout of data we need to showcase the client to, for him to be able to understand the basic concept of our planning or drafting. So press it around here. And I'll slightly move this with arrows. And now we will place and other elements in this kitchen. So a way inevitable to this into your liability. And I have some collection for the kitchen as well that should be around here somewhere. Okay. Here we are the specific. But as you mentor collection for the kitchen services like this Bayesian plus TOB block. Copy it, go to our drawing one, and I will just paste it bloke over here. Again, we have the side issues. How is like this? And I will scale it first with the scale tool and say this should be fine. So I'll select this and move it at the lock. Again, we need to monitor the exit corners. So select this from this corner and move it around you. Now, let's move onto the next thing that is lining the whole year. So go to this and place a good go to a place of I place a voodoo dining table there. This should look perfect. I'll copy this. Bring it and help best it around here. And I'll rename it to scale this. This should be fine. Now we'll move ahead to proper hinge moment. Like this. Now, there is not much left. We just have to place in the bedroom and bathroom. So first let's sort out with the bedroom. So we'll place some bare room in this yes, this bed should be fine. Cooperate and I'll place it. I have to scale this one too. This should be fine. Again, I'm mentioning that you do not have to worry about this being in a specific T scale unless and until you are working on our entire project. If you are in working on anterior project, you may have to, or you might be needed to create your own specific blocks as per client requirements. So in this case, we do not have to worry about scale of this blocks. So these are fine. And this looks pretty small compared to all the blocks. I'll just kind of increase the scale for this. Somewhere around here, like fine now. And I will copy this bed in this bed trauma as well. But before that, let's sort out this bathroom. And I will go to this side and I will help some of this options that are available to quote in the bathroom. So select this, copy it and paste it in my bathrooms. So we'll place the basic blocks here. And now we can do is I can get some blocks with a local library and I will search for other blocks that we can place around. So we have this bathtub, so let's try this one. I'll copy this and I'll paste it in this drawing. And I'll scale it by the scale command E. This should be fine. Now we'll move it around the corner. And that will copy this. And I'll paste stick around this corner as well. And I will align it to a proper corner from this point away. And we will motors library and search for more blocks that we can place. So for the parking, we can just copy this car, Mercedes fun, cool. Paid by Control C and go to this train and enter this block is here, Control V. I'll scale this. Select this car. Now it's rotated or placement on the ortho to exit the rotator. Desired straight, drop tangled. And I'll press it around here. So this should define that this is the parking and there is a whole contents. Have all that. Now, let's assign some more blocks in this war to the, and we can more here. And that takes some people eco-labeled. We do not have any one from the top view, but I wrote this in the root directory. I owe some more libraries I would attest stem to for your downloads. So you do not have to worry if you cannot find the relevant ones. Let's add some trees around. Sorry, I hope it is trees now best ticked on this gray area. So you can see that there is a open space after that, the chin. And it is also really well below this as we used it as open space in this. So there's some trees or third place. So make it be with somebody against Moses and place it around these corners. I will scale them in little bit small size of in, this should be fine. Okay. Now they should also be visible from the toe for us, does this note continuous lab sorry, again, copy them from this reference point of this bedroom. Sorry, the living room and I'll press, okay, this looks fine. Sorry we extended the mode itself is copied back again. So this tree should also be visible from the tofu soy OP them to this other plant like this. Now, we are left with much of the part. So I will go back here and search long small rocks that we can place. This is just for the example. If you want to go in more detail, you can exit LIGO as per your needs in more detail with this block-based placement in your work on plants. Because this is just for the example. And I will also use this steel unit. Cities was fine. I'll copy this and we'll use it in this corner. Rest we selected and I will scale it to this fine. I will move it to the corner. This looks exactly base fitted for this area. So there is a living room around here. So I will give it another different block that is kind of traditional and used for the space with more open space onto all the corners, have used this block. Best tutor on here. Scale these to our drawing. And I'll place it down. Now. Let's see the paths. That is a bedroom year, so cooperative spirit from right away to let Room that is similar. And I will copy this both to the bedroom basale bathroom around here. And I also hope it is both parts in that bathroom. On the other side. Now we'll mortis and with the arrow keys and inspect it what this side we are not giving more attention to the placement because it could be anything. This is just for the example to how to be returned, be detailed with the plan. So when you perform this action on the plants and you are going to showcase this plan. Because a studio also show them the basic layout of the placement of the dependent, for me, chills and bottom placement and layouts. This will put our extra impression on the client and it may be possible that he may pass your design or glands just by seeing those layouts. So if me more rotate as much as you can be with this layout. So we all have this last item left on this side. We'll come back to this and we will find some furniture for the studio. This desk should be fine with a chair, or we can choose this one should be fine. Let's scale this. And I'll place it in this corner. And I will provide a single bed around year or maybe it's okay if we don't provide. So this is basically out We created by placing the blocks in our drawing. So what I split some plantation in this Open tennis to, to make it look more defined or elegant. So let's select some top few of those plants. Say this should be trying to shoot is this boat should be fine day brutal. They both look like ports. Hello, scale within both. The size and I will place it around here. Select this and place it in this corner. And now let's flip this. So lean and move it a little bit less now. And, and I remove this corporatist and multiple, and I'll copy some over year, over year and one over here and few over here. So this is the placement on the open terraces. Well, so this is how we are done with almost done with this work. Now, let's move on to the next thing that is creating the schedule for opening. So first I remove this both the parts aside. So VP at a scheduler opening in this drawing for that, we need to create a table. So first let's decide the number of columns and rows we will require. In the obvious case, we will require two rows and four columns. We have two types of windows. One type of ventilation entity type of 2. So that equals to 3 plus 2 plus 1, but we require seven columns and kudos. So by clicking on this table, we will have this table option and we'll create a table. So let's say for I will select the space for insertion point, and I will require two columns, right? One for the data in one folder names, Columbia, 10-meter to free. That should be fine. Though I should be one that should have an end date arrows we require is saving. So I'll click on Okay, and I've inserted table. Now you might be guessing that stable is not up to the size required. So what we can do is I will just select and go to Home and skeletally. So scale this table. We visible to our size. This looks are pretty big. So I'll reduce the size of this columns. And I will scale this to be a little bit bigger than this. And I'll remove it at this point on this side. And only now I can just drag this. This will give me to head it off, see scheduler happening and progress right there. So this may creators or problems. So what you have to do is I will just drag this below arrow. Press it here. Now, as I write here is particulars on the item set I will write precise. Now, we shall start by giving you the first 10 should be dv1. We know that should be, sorry, which one should we just need? That shouldn't be D1 and they should be d2 are three types of two types of window again, so W0 and W1, and there is one called the ventilation. So we're done with this. So on this as we took it as a 3.5 foot, so that should be three foot, six inches into the general light of the door. That is always 750. So I will go below. Next one was D1 that was supposed to be high. The bathroom door that goes about 2.513 will be again, two foot six inches into seven inputs. I've got to put the sign here. Okay. Now we'll move on to the next. That is the bedroom door that was around three port into seven groups. Next one is window that is around six foot. And the height of this window should be for food. And that one was that kitchen window, that was it on five widths. And I hope it should be the same as four-fifths. The ventilation will their own two feet and height of it should be one foot five inches, sorry, one foot, six inches. So we also prepare a schedule of opening. Now, next step is to align this top of this. So first. So let's organize this properly. I will select this part and Movietone into upper side around here. Lately like this. And I will drink this one somewhere around this side. What I can do is I can just move this around this side, normally copy these parts. Now, we have seen how we can create a titan locking out of it. So I already prepared a title block for this. So we can just move on the next parts. So I will just copy this title block. And I'll bless this on this shape. Now we will assign all these other categories called the same. So it's like this both. And we can organize this all in this plan. So these are all nonpolar Langton to plan. So this is our title logo is ready. Everyone's block here that defines a direction and random naughts here. We can attach our Like, even attach your forms, logo and information about your form, your technical details and stuff. Here you can enter your site address or the office address, and you can enter here this height h. So this is just amazing title block for your reference. So the next thing we will do is we'll try to plot it and convert it into a PDF. So what we'll be doing is I will press Control P. So that really walk the bloating manager. So global click on display. First click on Window. And I will select the window of this title low exactly are the size of the drawing. So now we're going to go to the name and two-star high-quality PDF print. Now as I scroll my mouse on this, from this middle, I can see that the specific type of Page Setup I require for my title block placement. So this seems fine. Nsa expand me. So what are we doing to paper? Center of the plot? Quality should be the maximum and say approach will be displayed oblique on landscape as it is. And I'll click, Okay. Now I will save it in my document. Save it as a residential land one and press Enter. Now this will load to planning to a PDF and open it into a manager. So it is opened in my PDF PDF viewer. So it should look like this. So here's a zoom-in. You can see that V0, V1, some dimensions that are currently visible on this train. And you may have noticed that the one part of the story is going to denote, put it into a PDF. So here we encounter another error. That is, the boundary will be created is not visible in this protein. So let's fix that. So in this drawing, this boundary wall is not visible in uploading. So what we'll be doing is I will go to the layers properties. I select on this compound wall and sends the value from 250 file. As I mentioned earlier, that you keep it 255, it won't be visible in our drawing. So change this value broker or the RGB, and change the value 25 to 50 fourfold disc three, red, blue, and green colors. Click Okay, and Close. Now, when they tried to load this, not have to repeat all the steps of inner layer to do is just go to click on previous block and click Okay, we overwrite the existing file and we will wait until it is, put it into PDF again. So, so once done, it should look like this. Now everything is perfectly visible in our drawing. We can see that title block is placed well at this position. The drawing sad that it's polish AND, and, OR gate and all the boundaries are also quite visible clearly in this drawing. So we can again toggle between the line weights of this may be looking little bit take, so I chose tell you, all you have to do is just increase the scale a bit. So this should look perfect. So this is how you can create your plants in AutoCad. But first of all, let's fix this before we end this project. So I will change the line rates of his drawings, but it will back to my train. Click on them drove p. And here we option is that long line weights when you turn it off. And I really cookie. Before that, I will just click on previous block and turn off the load line weight Options. Click Okay. And I will save it is modified to and press sale. So let's fake until it same. So when I zoom in this one, you can see that it is not must taken quite visible. And it looks better to see it other than compared to this one. So if possible, always keep the bloating line weights optional until and unless it is required to showcase the thickness of flying. So this is l, who can create your tulip line autocad and put it into a title block and converted it into a PDF with the basic standard of dimensions, naming status, and table creation required. Thank you for watching. 107. Modeling example (part 1): Welcome back guys. In previous tutorial, we learned to create a plan to various tools in AutoCad and we finished it until you're now in this tutorial or example, we want to convert this layout into a 3D model and render it further. So before we get started, I will give you some basics that we require from this plan to create it into 3D. First and foremost, I would like to tell you there will be only require the layout of this bowl plants in order to create it into a 3D, will not require this measurements or this M text and all this text that we gave for the bedroom, toilet, etc. Not require them. We do not require this blocks either. Will only require the location of this Windows, this word plan, and this compound world that is created around this area. So we'd tell pop this three things. We will be converting data into a 3D model. So suppose if I copy this, I will be hoping all this layout means older blocks and all the components that are comprised you need currently. But we only require three of this components, that is Windows world and this compound world. All the openings for the doors are already given so we do not require dose either. So we won't be coping this tote lines either. So remove that. As we learned earlier, we will lock the other layers. What are the layers property? Now, as we know that we only require three layer style. First of all, I will click on one layer and the control a, after pressing Control a to select all the layers. And I will lock a single layer, which will result in locking all these layers. Now, I've only unload the layers that I need to copy. That is voice. So I click on was unlock it, go to walls, and then unlock the window's layer as well. And we require the compound world layer, so I'm going to lock that as well. And we'll close this. And I will copy this layout Control C. I will go to the new drawing from this open tab. Now, before we get started, we will first set up the units by the UN command. Press Enter, go decimal and I will change it to architectural. Or you keep the Christian to be 0.08 or you can give it to half inch. Press. Okay, now I'll press control V and paste my layout here, this corner. So we are now successfully placed our layout in this plan. To begin with. First of all, we will merge all these layers. Means currently we have three layers activity note of it. So we'll merge them all into one so we can easily work on it. Means we do not need this layer to be separated in this case, because this is already one will be converted into a 3D model. And this plan won't be visible once the model is ready. So as we have learned earlier in layers section, we can use the merge tool available in this ray layers panel from this drop-down button. Here, we have this option called merge that matches the layer within. So whatever we're doing is click on this option. Now what is layer is activated, as you can see in command line. So first I will select the components that I wish to more 2000 and third layer, that is this compound wall. At this window on doings, I'll press Enter and I will choose the base layer or the host layer where they all will be moved to. That will be this course. And I will click on yes, it is asking me do I wish to continue. So I will just click on yes. So now all these layers that are currently merge into one. You can see that the windows color also tends to white that was given to the basic hole. When I click on layers again, you can see that only one layer is active. That is, what is n 0 that comes by default. Now, let's move further. Click on this angle un, we read from this side. Now we have learned about basic other things of modelling in previous lectures. Let's switch to the 3D basic modelling space to begin our creating this model. So we might be knowing first of all already that there are three types of windows. One is this firefight window, this one is excrete window. And these are not Windows actually the desire ventilation that are currently three nattering. On this side we have the same layout. So in this case, we do not require, or we do not need to create two layouts in 3D model, what we can do is, I will select this modal, convert this into a 3D model and at a letter openness entire model on this side, teddybear0, my Level 1. As all these layouts are currently similar in shape from all the sites. Earlier, we learned about extra pull and press pull too. So I did mention that the principal tool is modified version of extra tool and it works better to demonstrate that again, when I tried to click on an extra tool and try to extract this L shaped wall. I'm not able to. They're 25, zoom in and keep my mouth in settlers in the center of this war. I am not able to do it. I can only extrude a line by pressing it and clicking on, Okay, Currently the visual style is set to wireframe, so it is showing up like this in the wire mesh. Change it to say, Oh, shredded. We will find and click on Extrude. And I will try to execute this. So you can see that this is only extruding eat in a single plane north of oil. Now, if I, if I use the principal command for the same and I keep my mouse on this, you can see that blue highlight is visible on the screen that is showing me that disagree with the boundary of your whole. So I will click once we break it up thoughts and you the size of a wall that should be the 10 feet high, that is generally accepted or generally used in Indian standard, sort of rest ten feet and press Enter. Now, you see that the wall is ready. It is not currently in single penny, it is a complete box that is closed from all the sides like this. So similarly, I'll be dragging all this was a living. I will be leaving this empty parts of windows and doors to them later and I will just drag it up. I am doing similarly in all the sides. So as you can see that we are now almost done with. This was the area that we are done with creating the walls. Now you might be noticing what wondering that does Windows and regulation areas. I left them on them. Now to do that, whatever we're doing this, I would first did it this both extra lines, they're used to demonstrate the glass. On doing so, we will have this empty box again. Now, as the height of this wall is set to 10 feet, right? The seal height of this window who will be a density peak levels, then the height of this window will be at what free terrain and the LinkedIn level where we sit, rotate it the seven feet statistics in the light of a door in India. Let's start by using the press pool jewelry. Is it rotate it. And I will click on this box and create a box off three feet height. Now this hole is currently defining the sea level of this window. Now if I copy this upwards from this point to this point, this will create a hollow box between this are open opening of window for this. So on coping this one, this will be left with the for-free talk. You can tell that it will be left with the forfeit of ICT indifferent in middle for this window. So before we do that, we need to make sure that all those 3D snaps are E2F. Click on this tick mark all of these options that we require currently. So make sure you also have this option checked in your autograder. P450s work in 3D space. So if you have not, you can screenshot this or you can just note it down. So I will get started. Now, what I've written this, I will select one, this whole part. And we have this option here and modify penalty. It says Kopi Arctic on Copy. I'll pick this up from this center point or basale corner point. I will drag it up first and best it with the help of the snip it exactly at this corner point. When doing so, this will define my window over here. You can see that currently this defines an opening for the window on this part of the plan. So similarly, we have to do that everywhere, right? So to make it easy, I will give you another tip that you, except a liberating all this line everywhere, creating a box and then hoping it again it top level. What you can do is you can just copy this both parts and paste it everywhere. You can paste it everywhere where the wall height is 10 feet, exit like this. And there is just six feet width of a window except of this kitchen area. It will be treated everywhere, right? So I will select this path again. And I will create a copy of them with type of capital invested around here. Now, you can see that first of all, we can best to directly on this part as well, because it is. Symmetric anger. It is parallel to each other. So I can copy this wall exactly around this area post. Then I will rotate it to populate on this side as well as this side. So let's do that. I will select this book, click on copy, and I will pick it up from a corner point. That will be this. I hope it is visible to you. And I replaced it with thereof of the same coordinate point on this corner of the box. So once done, it sure looks the same as we as it looked here. And select this box again. And I will click on rotate to rotate tool is not already available in this Modify panel, but we can use the shortcut key that is R0 and press Enter or Spacebar. Now, before writing every turn on auto to rotate it exactly in a log Texas. And her doing her turning on this ortho, I'll click on this corner point and or tragic Italian angle of 90 degrees to paste it on this side and select this both again. Click on Copy, pick it up from a corner point with Teladoc snap. And I will paste it around here with type ofs and F S. So this is a redundant. Now only domains is this side. That is this single opening year. So, and we also need to pass it around here, sorry. So we will copy them both on this side as well. Now in this last command except of moving again, cooperate because we will be using it again and again. So select this both and accept of moving. I will be helping them, like we will get it right after this. We'll click on this corner point and press. Okay. So windows are fixated on this. All the parts where there is poor fit and six-bit width. So all we need to copy it here, sorry. So this copy it is from this part. Turn off this coordinate point and best it around here in this corner point as well. So we are done with this top layer. Now. Next, dreaming is to store windows. To again do that. What we can do this, I will just rotate it or refer a rating. I will teach you another method so you can copy. Select this miasma corner point. And I will select this part of this kitchen as another point. So you can see that this will be all is currently getting out. So earlier we show that with the principal tool, we were able to create this 3D geometry, sorry, 2D geometry into a 3D. Similarly we can again, is the name defines we can press or pull any object inside or out that is currently in a 3D state. So currently this war, the war boxes are in 3D state. So what we'll be doing is I will use the respire to loving. Keep my mouse on this side of this wall. That is it. As soon as it is highlighted, I click and drag it inside with the reference point of this voice. So that will be this, exactly like this. I will do the same over a year. Exactly. We are done with this. I would again select this port, create a copy. And now I'll be rotating this quote with terrible offloaded to turn on Auto. Now I will select this both again, and I will move it at this kitchen part. Now you can see that we are almost done with this base placing of was only part left ear is 30's ventilation. We are not working on the interior of this house and related will be elevation model. So while working in 3D, interior or exterior, it is completely Same with the reference of the tools. And I will delete this part of the scores that we do not require currently. Now, another thing you might be noticing that when I click on this full h, all this world parts that are currently separated admins, they are not a union or one ball model. If I select this whole, there's only this part will be selected. So we can do is we will create a union once we are done with the ventilation. Ventilation or we can start with this here. So let's get started with the ventilation creation. And before we get started, I would like to tell you that this is a very important party or so, pay attention, I will teach you a shortcut method to create this right over here, so forth. We will delete this extra instead, we do not require right. Now, you can see that this is a box of two feet of width and we require the lintel level of ventilation to be the same or do those seven feet. And it will have a cylinder height of that will be around five would find from the bottom of this line, applicant pool. And I will create a vote of seven 51st. Now after doing so, I will just move this outputs. Once you do that, I'll click on this. And I will go to the bottom part, right? And I'm going to click on press pool. And I will press pull this area of the wall that should be three feet serving and it will be another four for it to reach the seven-fifths sea level, lintel level. Now we created opening right here. The next thing we need to do is we just need to create a bottom wall that will be around five bits are the same. So here and press five foot, six inches and press Enter. So our ventilation wall is also NAD as you like this bowl towards, and I will copy them for resting it on this side of the coin here. And I'll paste it around here. I've written out the author first, and I'll paste it around here. So you can see that we are then held slight difference on this thickness of this wall. This is to post to 190 lens it is supposed to meet a four inches would select this post, turn on ortho and rotate it with Telco part or Command, and click to this corner point and rotate with angular 90 degree. Once done this both and hope it first at this area where it says 1912, say around here with the help of the snap exactly at this point. So this seems fine now. Now I'm hoping this both, or you can say that I will be moving towards it. This is our last resort. I'll paste it around here with the help of this reference points. Again, we need to use the rest portal to press this whole thickness inside decompress pool. I will keep my mouse until it is highlighted. Click, and everybody put it inside of a precedence every tarragon solve this point. Similarly, I will do the same over here. Once done, it should look like this. Now we'll just verify that we have lost all the openings. Now only part that should be left here is a boat load into level of this loan debt should be my a, my entrance. So I will be doing the same on this place as well. Louis Kahn walks. I will click this corner point, and I will pick this corner point. And for the height, I will give you the height of three-fifths and press Enter. Now I will be moving this box to create a volleyball. They're linkage level for this dough. So this is expert, absolutely done with this part. Now, as I mentioned earlier, that we might be having problems because as there are so many components currently active as a part of this diagram that is creating or a combining all of them into one end, creating a world diagram. To make all this all in one, you can use the union command that we learned in previous lectures. So before that I will locking this was later or we don't require to lock this layer because they are apparently in truly steps. So they want we attached with this plan as well. So what we're doing is I'll click on this icon. Now command line says select the objects. So most I will stop all I was like all these objects and press Enter. So now this wall is converted into a single compound or events. A single object that defines it is reading wall. So our wall is ready. So firstly, we will be creating a Windows, ventilation and the door. So let's get done with the door first. What are we doing this we don't need to provide in a specific thickness on frame for the door because it is instead is only going to be the elevation of that plan. So what can, what I can do here is I can just leave a box here and extremely tight of this 750 to create a door. So I click on this box, I will select this side. And from the center point somewhere to somewhere around here, I will draw single plane that will be defining my thickness of the door. That should be 2.5 inch as it is. You can see it on the screen. So I agree, over year. Now extrude this exactly and tie it off seven feet, that is might link to light. So I adore is ready. It is currently not as specific PVC well, because when we apply the material, we can see that. Now next thing is creating a knob for the door. So crew that we'll be doing zirconia small. And we will define a no but taste. So type C will grow these broad the circle. You can see that I am able to draw the circle on the store itself means it is not currently on the x axis. I am drawing circle that is vertical to the x-axis. In your auto grade, you might know terrible option because I've done it on there. Dynamic UCS. Ucs is available on this customization in this status bar. When I click on this dynamic input, you can see that dynamic input that we use to define the coordinate systems view. Another option that is called dynamic UC is you can be turned on with this election, could be telling gizmo pennant. In this set, we will have an option called Dynamic Input or dynamic UCS. I would click on this, enable it. So, but only dynamic UCS was only in my drawing. So that's why I was able to draw a circle right on this side of this low, effectively call this denim UCS odd and turn it off. And I tried to draw the circuits, that is CIR command. I'll see, you can see that I'm not able to draw a circle exactly on the phase, denote the ortho. You can see that we're not able to draw a circle on the face of this door no matter how much I tried it one, let me draw a circle on this face. Could draw a circle on different theories or different phases of model. You can use the dynamic UCS option. As soon as I've done this dynamic use this option turned on. You can draw a circle on a specific face or her object. So I will type ca again, and I will draw a circle to define a knob around here of say, two inches or 2.5 inch. And press Enter. Now I will press post, rest, pull this outside. Say somewhere around 1.5 inches. Press Enter. So I'll do I'm always ready as well. So this is how I drew my door knob here. And I drew a laureate. Now let's worn by creating a window. So we already know that the week hope those windows is 6-bit. Rethought this windows at five feet. And we thought this ventilation should be two feet. And height of this week. I taught this ventilation is 1.5 feet on all these windows out off your feet in height. So when you create a profile for them, first of all, pretty correct angle. Press Enter, I will give a point and I will grow the window profiles and ventilation profiles. So we were correct, type forfeit coma 66 and press enter or they never draw another rectangle layer. Ipad threat. Do the height to be forfeit, coma and week to week five feet. And press Enter. Now I will draw the ventilation. So I fool should be again. That should be 1.5 feet. So 1.5 feet. Oh, sorry. I forgot to type it. I would have a correct 1.5 feet and two feet. Comma Gu fit. Press enter. So I went deletion profile is ready as well. And Windows Autopilot areas where now we will be creating this three into objects that will be window and ventilation for the starting resist chloride or film frame and the offset for that soil police type offset command press Enter, and it will then press Enter and defined should be, you can say that define the rent for this. So for the window, I will be providing to endow three inches of offset and press enter to it earlier we do the same with this one. Do an acid. So the inches and press Enter. And same goes for this one is. So now we avoided the profiles for the same. Now next step is very simple and easy. What I will do is it is neutral. Press pull this and create a frame. So click Korea and create a frame of three inches. Pauses. And I will do the same on this side as well. And it'll create a frame of three inches. Sorry. Select this cream and a brief ephemeral three inches and press Enter for the ventilation is either creating a frame of three inches and press Enter. So iframes are ready. Now next step is creating the glass. So it is not as complicated as you are thinking. I just, all I have to do is I just have to press pool the middle part of this box. I will be keeping my mouse warrior click and view the thickness of glass to be 0.025 inches. Similarly, I will draw another glass here. It will point to Pi inches for a center. As bleak in between. And I redefined the thickness to be 0.25 inches. So we have this glass on a scale. Select this three glass of this. And I will be going to the front view of this drawing. So you can see that they are currently attached to the bottom of this. What I will do need a leak on this blue at risk to move them up. What's, and I'll turn on the ortho do moon rocket into x's. Now remove them up outside around say, two inches. Press Enter and they are perfectly out. And I want two inches on the center of this frame. So they are current denoted as ender, as we generally do not tell the windows are dead to the exact center of the frames. So to make it more, you can see that the standard way of the currently preferred methods. Now, the next thing is you can delete the bottom lines of this. So we have these lines that we do not require anymore, right? But if I tried to select this, it will select this box and objects rather than selecting those lines. So to do that, as we did earlier, we can use the Selection Cycling, ugly called the Selection Cycling and turn it on. And I will select this lines that will be polylines for the sake, this polyline and deleted. Select this polygon here. And mediated. Similarly as like this polyline year rooted tree like this polyaniline and deleted in the same way. Only then will it this polyline and delete. So now we're done with this as well. We need to provide a material first because if I copy paste all this window on all these openings. So next time when we, I will be giving material to my drawing or model for rendering purposes, I need to You material to each copy of the window to avoid that and to save time, what we can do is we can already provide material to this Windows and bless them later and create copies. So that will save our time in placing material, incoming lecture or coming portion. So first of all, the material browser, that is a material rosary in AutoCad, contains some basic materials that are preventable with total better. We will also learn how to weight our own material in order again to incoming portion. But for now, you just need to know that the material Roza can be open from this visualized step that is next to the Home tab. In this visualized step, we'll some other panels as well did we already studied? There are only four new penalty that is lights, sign-in, location, material, and render. So there is nothing new in this, as we already know this new view, you manage your name views. We will some other coordinate systems that we learned earlier that is worked oh, proton, right, left. We also know the visuals status that we're currently using AutoCad. Without a visual style, you can tens them from this dropdown buttons. You can see like this, conceptual shadow craze KG whilst him. And next one is the mobile view ports that we already own that we can restore order, we can create parts of this view ports. So just for this portion, we do not need to go in detail. I will explain you everything about materials in just a few minutes. So for now, it won't go material browser from this option, by clicking on this material, is going to click on this material browser. It will open the material posted on our screen. So this is the material rho that is available in AutoCad. So you can see that there are so many types of materials that are preloaded in or dropping. And we'll just two options here. This was the current liek to materials in our model that is genetic means it does not contain any data. That is a basic, more honor, default model that is attached to one model that as we already have a 0 layer weight when we create a drawing, we already have a predefined 0 layer that comes by default and we cannot delete this. Similarly, we have this genetic material that is print default attest to our model and we cannot wait. Now, we will option here that is called adress clarity. When I click on this drop-down button, I have different categories of material. You can send meter, metallic, metal, recreated glass, readily iconoclast. I will have all the glass, the data available in auto-grade. So these are all preloaded material in AutoCad. I would say like this mirrored glass or we can use the normal one as well. Now before we learned the material application, you can see that wheel, so many types of glass. I can either drag and give it a material or for Steichen Laurie kingdom growing and then drag it and put it. So what is the difference between direct putting it in the material or a mortar and a post-closing it into the model and putting it. So if I use this blue glass and put it directly, this will contain or this will be applied, right? That's fine. There is no different in the application or procedure. But if I load it from this up arrow, you can see that there is a small upper option, everybody on that edge material to the document. So if I do it, load it once here and then I give it over here. And if I eat, repeat the same procedure, performed the support, and drop it over here. This would enlarge the file of this treaty document means fiscal savings on space. So if I keep directly applying material, this group dating material as a new material, like suppose it will give you automatic 12 numbers at the end of this particular name. And it will be creating so many same material with different names in a file. So that could be considered debt rule. Occupy more space, will feel file and make create some errors by saving and opening files stool so that it can overall, you can say that the, it will slow down your procedures of working on a model. So to avoid that, you can do is you first load the material into your document and then you can apply it. So let's see how to do that. Now I need this dark, or let's say I would use this clear blue glass to use that. What I need to do is post I were to click on this add material to this document. And you can see that it is loaded in a material panel currently active in this drawing. Now I will select this and drop it over this glass. Same way, detect this, can drop it over this glass. Drag and drop it over this class. So he Wednesday that it is transparent from both the sides. And you apply this to spend. Now let's apply the wood material for the frame. To do that, what I can do is I can drag down from this drop-down button and it will go to the wood option. So we have some option for the creation or you can say application of water Materia, these other materials available as wood. So select this material. We'll go with this pedaling one as you'd like this and drop it. Now you can see that as soon as I did a glue droplets, Oh, here it is loaded in my drawing. So too, demonstrate the Evo explanation I gave you. If I drop it again, you can see that this is creating another Medea doctor just giving it a name that is break-it one coma. So this will only create more and more materials in your document. It will Lord the same materials reputationally end. This will contain all occupy more space than it should and it will slow down your welding procedure as it will have so many, many years exiting in a single document board that you can do is to select this form, this document option and loaded on this object. So this was what about, you can say this was the glands have our dome material grocer. We will get back to it within few minutes. So let's close it for now. Now our windows are ready. So what can we can do is, I was like this both. Select this both and select this as well. Now, we will be needing to place them. And lately at this point, sorry. And or here, or here at all the spaces for when you took the, less the screen dose. So starting on the coast, most selecting all of this. And I will go to the front view. Now firstly, we need to rotate them so we can visit on this grain relu that. I will go to the Home tab and we'll fuel gizmos over here. Svo learned in previous lectures will cause a stroke downward. And now it's like this rotate gizmo. When I click this, we know this rotation rings that are available in this as V0 selected, this little gizmos that are available for rotation as take this green penalty and worker DEM on this electron off ortho so we can see it properly rotation. That would read Tim say 180 degrees, nor that should be 90 degrees, and I'll press Enter. So now windows are rotating at the angle of 90 degrees means they are ready to be replaced. So before we do that, you can see that there is a one-inch get from this side and going skip from this set as 0 placed it earlier. So this side should be facing outward. Though we'll be placing them accordingly. Mostly I will select this mode. Click on Copy option, and copy them from this corner point and press it around over here on this center point of this window, exactly like this. So we're replacing the windows as well as so we'll be placing into one small way as it exits, seek scenes window. Recon copy from this corner point was snap it and place it around here. The center point of this. Now we will be rotating this and dual site. So let's get done with it. First of all, select this specific window and you ended in an inverted rotated with the row detail of this Rotate Gizmo in different exits. So I need to read this timing wx is so that should be 180 degrees, primarily type 1, a 2 degree, and press Enter. So again, this side is flipped to another side. So select this window, use the copy to as best tip on this corner point. They teleport this corner points net. At this point x city. Now again place it on this other point. Gravity from this corner point, and place it around the ear at this corner point as well. Now we are done with placing these windows. Now only left window for this size will be over here. So again, select this both with the water, I mean the remnant of glass. So in our really located on this blue X's, select this blue Xist and nucleotides angle of 90 degree and press Enter. Now I remove this because we do not need anymore corpus of this. So you select this corner point and every moving it at this point as well. So AlphaGo is done over here. Now we just need to place this ventilation at this three points and this window that is for kitchen at this two parts. So we saw TV or knee forward to blend it earlier. So I was just doing this. How to select this both. Create a copy and it'll take it on this blue X's angle of 90 and bless it on that front corner. You can see that highlighted. I made some Meta point for me with that, both the snap so I am able to place it into resized location without retake your AC, click on it and press it. So let's place this doing those earlier first. I'll select this as a corporate from this center point. So what did the corner point, and I'll place it over here at this point. So next thing is many to rotate window to place it over here. And select this one window and a frame. Click on blue X's and not every 10th angle of 90 degree. And I will move it as VM already operate the last part and only require this as the last placement. Placing it over here. So this is ready. Now let's place the ventilation for the same. I o created some basic Windows, but you can use the one-tailed and 3D modeling tools and create any design or Windows you require. So this is for that we truly are. But suppose if I do it, it will be a four to five hour long video for the modelling. So to avoid that, I'm just using some basic types of status and Windows. You can modify as much as you would require and you can do as muss ich muss Dann you require for this modelling. So now let's start by placing this ventilation on the sites. So whatever we're doing is select this ventilation and rotated a tangle of say, 180 mother's side. Exactly like this. Select this, now will cooperate at this volt. See around here. Now we will be doing same for the other sites as well. I'll select this was to rotate it until blue X's no tunnels Ortho 2. And so we can easily see that the rotation is happening. Vinci there's no, you're rotating the angle of 90 and press Enter. Replacing it at this voice. Select it and I'll create a copy first from this center point. And sit around here exactly like this. Now let's put the last copy of it. It take point selected, click on Move. Now, this has my corner point for the reference. Bless it at the center point of this for now. So we are placed all the windows and ventilation, so we just verified it as well. Now, our model is almost ready. Before we get to head. I previously mentioned that the layout of this, both the flows are completely similar, right? So you don't need to create the model again already a week. All we can do is we can just copy it down on this side inside. Before we do that, I'm going to lock this layer. So if when we are trying to cope with this, it won't copy. There was a currently existing in this drawing. So I would type layer shortcut key and press Enter. I will lock this layer. I'll click on Close and select all of these models. For the moment. Averages. More it back to the movies when it was. Ted comes by the court and click on Copy. Select this as my corner point and less my copy somewhere around here because we do not need it for the moment. And now we can unlock or let this layer we locked because it is fine. Now let's see that what we're left with here, so we already created this as well. Now next thing we need to create a slab. So Israel civil engineer or an architect, we already know that this thickness of slab varies from six inches to as per requirement. But it is it has to be minimum sequences in residential works. So we'll be creating this lab of 16 and T's. So first, I will create a border for that. Just use this plan to create a waterfall my slab. I will just join this all the border points we use to define this lab of my drawing. So we are done with that level of this. Click on j that will join this lines. Now. But again, switch back to the 3D view. And I click on press pull, and I will extrude this borders. Sorry that it's not this. Firstly, we need to write this block layer, so I'll click on layer, and I will hide this layer that theropod this on and off button. So that layer is now we didn't click on, press pull and press bolded that I talk say six inches and press enter tournaments edX and cycling. And I, we did it this polyline as we do not need. And really quantitative. Well the internal this. Now I will be placing my this. You can see that this lab director took coreference point of this corner to this corner point. So this will showcase that it is perfectly fixated or it is perfectly placed ET accurate, precision place. A very common copy, or we can just move it. Slip this, select this as my reference point for the moment. And I'll move it at this top point somewhere around here. So this is that it is done and it is ready for that. Now, I'll replacing this whole model at the top of the head. So like this, click on More selected familiar and replace it at 0 of this lab. So a test should be around here. So here is our slab, and he is a second level. So this is how we place the second level on top of it, like this. So now we will be creating compound world. And we wi 108. Modeling example (part 2): So we wouldn't that this does not always equal as we need to again, click off, click on this layers, and I will turn off this layer. So you can see the syllabus make to visibility will join all this. It will join command. And you press pull it in tight off six inches again. Now this time I want be deleting this polyline first because we will be needing it again for creating a parapet wall. Suppose Toko, I will just uses, I will click on More. And from this corner as a reference point, I remove this lab. I take all this first-level at this reference. So again, we'll place to slab on top of this wall. Now let's create a parapet first company to partner up it. We just need the borderline of this lab means we do not have to create a wall again and creates crater wall or something with a name displayed it or they're, all we need is a parapet, very free. So there is a point. So remember that this is my current method that I use personally. The projects. What I will do is I click on offset, press Enter. Right. Now, I'll select this rather than specifying the second. I will give you a thickness of say, 4.5 inches. Press enter. So this will be my parapet thickness. You can press pool or tried to press pull this whole wall at dy dt of three-fifths. That is this regularized while parapet award. Now I will select this bowl. Click on More. And we blessing it into tok point of this, the teleport, this reference point around here and optimize visible to you. This naps greets our green colored visible to you. Now bless it. So we also pleased at a parapet wall over here as well. Now next thing is, we do not require this now, so I will delete it. So now it is done, right? So currently what do we need to do here is we need to create the gate and the book compound wall so we can move ahead with rendering and material replication part. So S1 is we, we didn't, we did, we were done with our modeling as well. Now, let's start by doing that. So what we'll be doing is, was an 80 layer to draw the compound word. You can unhide. And so I will try to extrude it into a report, press pull two, and died off this component y should be five-eighths, risk 5-bit and enter. Similarly, we will be doing Same with this quote as well. So currently this is not letting me doing, letting me do that because it is not currently covering my whole drawing port means it's this wall is coded in my whole drink. What I will be able to do it so we can do is we can break it into small pieces. Say this will be my post piece and I will try to extrude with the press pool. Now let's do the same with this side of the data so I can break it into parts of the park home. This point. From this point, say 58. And I will be doing same with this side of this component will as well say five-eighths and enter. So we are, we're being placed the component will on that drawing, right? So we are done with topmost part of our drawing here. Next thing is material replication, and we will create a small gate for our door as well. Before we move further, now let's create a gate here. So click on this box. Select this as my corner point. And I will draw, say, thickness for the period that should be around. You can see that I can give it around two inches. Now we'll do the height of 4.5 inches or 45 feet, Simon and press Enter. So this should be a little bit lower than a gate, or you can say that distributed router lower than our compound word. So we also created a gate here. Now this doesn't look like a gate pull moment. But when we apply the material or metallic material to this, it should look like, it will look like that. Next thing here we're gonna do is we are corona radiata support for this. Or Tara is 3000. So in practically we should help a coulomb's over here to support this open terrace. So to know that for every click on this line and click on this corner point, and it will take the reference, I will click on author to be on. And you can see that I'm wanna take a reference at this point. Now we know that this study is over here. Next thing we're gonna do is we're going to create a column year. So select this as my first. This technician with the same, and I will give you nine inches for the thickness of the column. Select this. And we'll do this. Now. I've done this as well. So what we wanna do next is I'll select this type of selection cycling. Recon this as a line. Suddenly says aligner, we let this another side of the rectangle and select this as well. And we'll use the join command, return them. Now we created this polyline, right? The next thing we're gonna do is either I can press pull it and use it as a reference and create a Columbia. Or I can use the sleep command that we learned earlier. So click once with command line says select the object to be swapped. So I will select this polyline to be my object to his fifth. Now, I press space-bar or enter. Now each is asking us for the paths, right? Slate with the sweep path. So select this line is my path and it will create a column right over here. So our column is ready. I will just cooperate on the other side with the corner point as the reference node operate around here. So we are done with the column as well, right? Next thing we wanna do here is we want to create a railing over here. To do that. What we can do is we selected lines host never draw a line on this point. And this point at this corner point as well. Which is select the profile you so E to C. What do you all here? So our line is radius, well, right, we call this select proline, it Teleco to lessen cycling, I can select a specific lines as well. Again, every corners and select the line and I will join it. And click on J and enter. Now I will turn my line is we'll select this line, 37, 100, sorry. Select this, and I will get one, this 3D polyline and more. We tie Topsy three-fifths upside. So our line is currently at tide of three fruits from the point opposite or reaching over to front view. So you can see this properly. We oppose the side of you for the same line is currently done and ready to be extruded. Now, either I can create a railing with terrible sleep command or I can just use it and place it around here with typeof this extraordinary create a glass railing. So in modern times we are generally, it is visible that last failings are preferred more compared to the iron railings write in lowercase or I raise building. You may notice that there are so many of the glass railings he was director then using the normal iron or steel trailing. So we will use x2 up to this time, and I will extrude it around here. The reference point of this point. So currently it is extruded. Now UNC that is currently notes, it says what editors proper planar, right? So it's get this, get this 3D solid. Sorry. Click here to get this 3D solid. So the phrase that we excluded and I replace it, it exit corner point. From this point onwards, this point onwards, I will place it around here. And so we will not require this line as well. So we'll click on the 3D polyline in eluted. Now we upgraded our last railing as well, right? So next thing we are going to move on to is material obligation for this. Hi, So we're almost done with this plan and less time. Red side, this layer hosts Koko to the layer, so we don't require it is. So I'm going to hide this layer and lock it, and I did. So our model is here ready. Now, let's move on to the main portion that is material application. As we discussed earlier, that the material replication or material Grover and available in visualization tip that is next to the Home tab. On this, I'll click on this material browser. Now, we already studied about with this materials previously that we have this library. And we can use or you can load the modelling or document rather than using them directly. Next thing here is material textures on and all. This will toggle between the Materials Textures to be on an off-white you render an image. So currently it is set to on or off. We're going to turn it on. Now it is material mapping. What does a particular mapping? So when you place a material, it is placed on the surface of an object. If it is a box, it can place like this. So if it is a cylindrical surface, it will replace like this. And if it is a spiritual surface, it will replace back. This means it, rather than creating a flat space shape or a place, you can set it to really take the form of the object it is, it is being placed on. So we keep it as a planner surface so it will be straight away, let on the objects. Next thing here is we're going to place some materials here, so we're going to use the white color for this was. So I will go to the Autodesk labor in a year. If this and I will go to the pain, muscle pain should be fine. Now I can change the size of this materials as well. By clicking on this dropdown buttons would again use, I can go to the list view, I can see it. Textview. I can add somebody has to. My favorite says, well, you can see, you can edit the materials as well. We will come back to that. Sure. Also, we have the material to be shorted by his PR types. You can sort damage per their material color is per se category and you can sue switch between this thumbnail nights. So if I select the thumbnail view and I said it is 256, but this is how our material will be viewed in a preview. This is just a preview of how the material will be looking. Great. Let's switch back to 64 size the thumbnail and select this white color and load it into our document or material. So it's like this. So I will select this light form here and bless it on this wall. See, you can see that it is only shaded Lee available means it is not visible properly. So go to this use option. And I was selected to be realistic. So this will showcase meter current materials that add up play on it. Whenever, select this white and use it or EPA. Same way I will place the white on this parabola as well. So vertical replication is almost done right? Place this white on this column as well. Right? And for this doors, we are going to use the same model as we used in Windows. This may take a few minutes or few seconds, is that we are working in realistic, more visual style. So whenever possible, do not prefer to use realistic unless and until you want to see the material debt, how they are going to loop, this will slow down your software and this will take a lot of time to load it in a drawing. So we do this wooden paint and you can see that it does almost 10 as well. Next thing we are going to come on to what this one is. This labs. So I can let this lab a little bit off, say I will let this lead means let blue-colored. So Lori TIA, you can know any type of color are you desire? I'm just going randomly with this colors. Rename, review this level. Let blue color over here as well. Right? System. Now, next thing that is left is this gate to be multilayered and this compound was to be material. So I will select, I will close this for now and go to Home tab. Click on union, and I will combine all this. Compound was. Now press Enter. So compound was at radius. Well, now let's give material to compound word. But before that, as I told you earlier, that we are going to work on retail in the material closer as well. So we'll learn how to create our own material in this material tab and then select this material grocer. And I'm pretty open the material browser as well. Now, we saw that we can toggle between different types of views and dominates over here. I can toggle between laced, glossy and met. You can see the paint, how subcategories as well. Or you can go to any material and they might tell the subcategory says where these metals, plastic materials. So whatever already contains a lot SOC matures, they too can use with Supposedly, if you have your specific requirement of a material, suppose I need to place a stone material in this war. I can do that with typeof this material closer. On the left-hand corner you can see there is the icon here that creates opens ED user different type Berry's rate. So if I already downloaded a library from some website over the dead, my own library, I can speak to your path for that. From this point. It's, this will open the windows open or you can say Windows directory and IQ is set the default folder where all my voltages will be. So we do not require it for the moment. We will create an on material first. To do that, all you have to do is we're going to click on this little icon with the plus sign. And there is a small arrow with the drop-down button. Now we're going to create a texture for this one. So click on the ceramic. So we'll be painting a ceramic material right? On this material grocer. We have a few options. When you click on this drop-down button, I can select the scene for this one. So my compound wall is going to be a wall. So click on this walls, so it will showcase me my motifs as a whole. Again, change the height or you can see sizeof this form, this a line. I can just click my mouse here and use it. Now, next thing is we have to define the type. So let it be two core selling. Again, define a special color for that as well. And I can view the face. You can say finish for this setting met or higher closely. Keep it matte. Now you may notice that it is very simple light, there is no design or anything. So let's also said thetas will. Once you do that, I will click on this finished bumps. You can assign a bombs for this one. So, you know, the warmest means the texture. If you touch a concrete, there are bumps on it. You can feel it in your fingers that there is some part that is above the level and there is some little bit below the level so that our bombs or even said that often it's on a concrete tennis court or bumps, right? This sudden if patents is option debt, we, you can say that whatever velocity, sorry, this relief patents means it will deploy it a really form this bumps. If there are two shady or too rough bombs available on screen, this will really fit. That is how real if pointer used it or turn it off. And this is teamed. You already know about 13. I hope that it exists. The color value you can just between for the visualization out with the appearance of their paint or material. So really consider omic again. And you can see that when I click on Color, I have to choose between two colors that I need for this one. I'll just create a little bit bigger window holders. Now, we'll already default ceramics, so I will give it a name. See my come upon worst stone material. Right? Next thing here I will do is we'll give it a texture to view text sedimentary click on this finish bumps option. And we'll give it to be texture, to be custom. Once you do that, I just have to go to my file. So I'll go to my destination folder. And I already downloaded and stones texture from the internet. You can get it from any free website. So it is not a big deal. We double-click on it. Once I do that, this will show me, yeah, you made that way already placed here. Once I click on this small button that is available all year, this will open the image editor, right? So this should be my tires gradient marbles. So I really want this marble option. And this will show me the bombs for the marble. So you can see the darker parts will be the bump Dean parts means the darker parts you see they will be going green, right? They will be inside. And this white parts will be the outside or they will be extruded. So this is the roughness pattern of this material. You can switch them between marvel checker. They shouldn't look like today. So something within you it noise that should be roughness event it is on screen as well. Now we already gave the bumps, right? So I can add just the bumper mound from this point as well. Let it be 0.07. Right. Muslin. All I ever do is lift gradient and teen damages all close all this. Now I've heard when I go to ceramic and I call this drop-down button, and we'll few options that we need to create a color coded by object or image, or we need to use them bumps to it. So we'll click on Image. Now review this tone, texture 0 to be 0 you so does show loop like my stone texture as well. I can adjust the brightness of the stone texture on this editor, that is Material Editor. Again, inverted image from this as well. That will change the image to be upside down. And I can transform it, give it offsets. Like this. You can see that it is those tend to self-made on screen. I can also rotate it in any specific angle with terrible scroll button as well. Like this. And I condense the position as well on this offset option. It looks close this and I'll close the scale and I will, You can see there is a repeat option. So once this style is used, how many it can be repeated like it should be able to in a tile or is it just a regular surface? So if when I make changes, you can see in this preview, if I choose it as a nun visited, there is a non-repetition in the horizontal plane. So we will take it to be too tight. So it is visible and it looks good. Right? I will decrease the brightness somewhere own say 75. Now once done, whatever do is I just have to click on Close button. And this will automatically provide this material colors. Now you can see that there are so many receivable. You guys like it. Uh, so, so many ticks or mocks, you can see they are present on screening means it is not quite regularly by the eyes. To translate, I will just double-click on this image again. Now here we have a scale option. So you can see when there is a linked option or linked highlight option is available, means it will be linked to each other. If I generate the side of this one side, the other side will automatically it just through it. Review it to scale of say, 50 feet. And currently this link. So it is interesting and you can see this embryo, it is looking much better now. So five, it should be fine. I will close it and I will close before closing it and we'll go to they have information option. When you go to this information option, you can see that I've given redeployed the name year and it is already given here. Next thing is you can provide a description for this material and you can also view them or keywords to this material. So I will do those keyword material to week compound Stonewall. So once done, I would go to his opinions again. Close button. This will assume my material in my existing drawing. Now what I have to do is I just go to Zoom me over your resumes, custom material implicit on this compound wall like this. So you can see that this is a custom material that we just created notepad, right? You can see that there is a softness and bumps visible on this one. I hope it is visible to you. If not, it will be visible in trend like this. So this is how you can create your own material in AutoCad. Now next thing is we're going to provide the railing glass for this one. And you're going to blow in metallic material called escaped as well. So click on this, click on glass. And let's say I will be providing last two weeks, reflect to you. I will load it into my drawing, drag it and place it on this one. So this is how I created my tailing glass. Next thing here is gate, so CO2 or risk liquidity and go to the metal options. And I will provide you my teleco, say MEK will be fine. They'll give it to learn metal that is currently met a little bit and I'll place it over here. Now suppose if any tool where it, the properties of this current meter will ever do is I were to click on this Edit. Thai content is available right next to this material option. When I click on this pencil button that is tiny, I hope it is visible to you. We will open the same window as we did earlier while creating our own material. Here I can add to solve the reflectivity of this material. Again, all interest, transparency cutouts, circumnutation, bomb and tint as well. These are all the basic properties we eat and really bifurcate or weekend, really modify in an image or drawing. So you can get just this from here. Now it loads it as we do not need to make changes to this material. Similarly, you can read anybody who has it is evidently not okay. So we already, we are done with lot of things in this one. Now our model is ready for the render. But if I render this, you see this may look a little bit or more often odd because there is no surrounding, Right? So I'll go to the Home tab and select this box. And I will create a big box at the bottom of this one and with the thickness of say, 0.5 inch. So this is going to be my walks. Right. Now. We want to learn some more things in this section as well. So I will give a material off this grass to this box. I would have been go to the Visualize tab. Click on material browser and solipsism would ask or landscape. So I'll go to this site work material and give it to multi-locus, Hey, class grass soil first load it into drawing document, let's say around here. So we already know the material of glass, grass as well. Now next thing is, we'll be placing some trees over here, so you will not have to worry. Downloadable divinity is also available in the download section of this course. So I will just move through there and open it and play some crazy around here. So I opened my liabilities here. That is a car and some trace to be placed around here, right? So let's begin with placing the trace. I will select this tree. Control C to cooperate. And I'll go to my drawing or motor press Control V to paste it. Cellectis the realistic to be shattered because it is currently all loading on my laptop. So I press Control V and paste my trees. And I will move it across else, turn off this election cycle for stockholder and I remove it. What I will decide system is promenades. Look on mom. Just 10 as well. And select this one and place it somewhere around here. So you get this small tree. Nevertheless it round here as well. We'll just said just then respire. Any you can go with any requirements or any type of style you wish for this. There is no specific requirement 2 we used while placing all of this. And I will bless some trace of a noisier for a good camera view. What are the three trees again, and this 300 sorted away in the downloadable library. Control. We go to my drawing one. Now, there's 22 over here. So go to the front view. And this is how it should be looking. Just Stovall it. And this is how it should be looking when we render it, right. Currently, it may not be a little bit of eye pleasing, but it will look great once we render it local to this card option, I always hold our attentional. This car and everything in the download section. C, cooperate. And piston are going to press control V and paste my car on this one. Place it here and I'll just slowly move it inside. Parking. Currently, this may be looking a little bit bigger to compare it to a parking size. So select this car. Okay, next thing we're going to learn here is Object Isolation, Right? If I click on this guy, you can see that all optics of this car, right? If I tried to fix it, see if I am whatever to select this profile that because of this land with the hatred. So I will click on this land. Right-click. And there is an option here that is called isolate, isolation. Real three options in ice water. If I click on isolate optics, this is related to all the objects or the dentist land. If I click on Hide octet, this relate the current selected object. And if I click on the last option that is Uno and optic isolation, it will bring back old data and objects. In current case, I will select this hide objects, so this will be eaten. Now what I can do here is again select hold the parcel discard with the selection tool. Right? And I will click on this and then create a group. So we do not have to mess it around year while moving in, placing and select this car and go to the Scale Gizmo. And then as it is, tried to scale it like this. So I scared my car to be a little bit smaller in size. Now replacing it inside with the help of his movies more. Let's say don't read exist somewhere around here. And there's more detail bit further because it is currently intersecting inside the walls. So, so far we learned about the creation of this material, blessing of objects and other few techniques for creating and placing of materials. So right-click and then to obtain isolation. And I will set up the camera. Now, I've closed this as we do not require no close this level area as well. So now next thing here remaining is creating a camera or a rendering points. Before we do that, we'll go back to the visualized step. I will foster polite this land for time being So decolonized alt text. And I had this trees as well because this is creating a lot of slow all slowing down the procedure of working on it. So plead and I had them for a temporary time and I discard as well. Select this car and isolate unhide objects. So I hate this. Got Israel. Now let's learn about lights in AutoCad, right? And drag it down and you can see there is a ceiling your year. So we have four types of lights in OCO hit one is point light means that this will create a point lights in order way. You'll be able to point and all the surrounding area off it will be lighten up, means in a remediated radius. Next is spotlight. We already know about spotlight. I hope you do. So from a point when a ray of light is currently targeted on a specific object, it is called spotlight. Spotlight, and there is a distant light. Tet is the updated version. I'll spotlight means if I give it a lighted point, I can navigate data to distant point, specifically for that. And there is a wave, light means febrile Edwin me. We're going to be like, you can say that if the party that is a circular viscose pair lights in parties, so it will it will be glowing on all the areas around it. Just I will use the point light over here at the bottom part. And we can provide intensive defector status off the lights photo in our tree shadow at your nation and Peter color. So I will just name it first due to point like one is to rename and everybody can exit. We can see that there is a point lead currently. However they are growing, right? So do it just this light ever dropdown button, I'll click on this light button and drop down button. I can click on the Portal 19. So this will turn on the deport lightning. You see if I don't date so again, not see any lighting or prepare differently when I turn this on, this will create a deported lightning. I'm going to tilt the exposure of this current. Again, it is the white balance of this current view. And when I use this international and American light units, you can see between them through this option. And I can click on this light display. If I turn this off, this one, we split the location of the light, but apparently it is visible to us. So I will just let it with a first light. Now v option here there is no shadows, cool shadows and ground shadows. So if I click on ground shadows, only the meeting shadow will be visible on the ground. And when they click on Full shadows, though, internal shadows between readings will also meet visible. So before we get to that, we'll create our own specific view. We'll click on this and I realize ordered and Greek on an object isolation. This will a nice what I call the object seen screen. Now we own that I can say it sounds treatise option. When I click on this, this will ask me for you to carry out my current exposure settings or I need to modify them. So we'll just go with the upkeep Expo settings to be default and click on this son status option on this will create a realistic sun in our drawing miss, there will be a time set, or you can set a specific time in debt or location for the growing wind sees this area is supposed to be in a specific time and render should be taken out for a specific period of time. Supposedly, for example, if I need to take a render of this place or this building, it this place from July month or you can set the time of day as well from this option over here. So through this, you can just toggle between dates and times of the year. All right, next thing is set location. When I click on this set location, you can either loader XML file that is mapped file or map format file that contains the location area or location area information of a sudden steady, right? And you can also look at it from the map. So we do not need to do that for this moment. So I will just let people because it is simple as we do it, you just so convenient to your location on a map and it will automatically define the sun in other ratios or this lightening. Next thing is Maria, we already saw it. So now let's come to the final part of our example that is rendering this one would enter this one. I will go to the top view first. Now you can see that this is my current drawing. So I will need to take a view from this point towards this side. Could do that. I will leak the command that is called camera. So I will type camera here, right, visited. The first option available here it is camera, so I click on it and this will activate a camera. You can see that as soon as I rotate it around my screen to the centering point of this x and y axis means this current x's of 0, that is x, y zed is currently the center point or focus point for this camera. As him, I rotate, my cursor is automatically facing towards them. So I will put my game it around here. Greg, it my view to be around somewhere around this. I will click here and click on Exit. Now, there is currently a k-mer activity in my screen, but you may notice that I'm not able to see that. So when I click on this camera, a small view over here will be visible to me. I were to click on this and to, let's say shaded. So this is our, currently it is visible on this, say it saved, you can realistic. So this is my view is currently visible to me. So whatever we're doing is this green arrow and move my camera and it just made view as well. You can see that this is constantly updated on the screen as well. On this camera view. 3d view it like this camera. Again, this trait it and puts. It says how it will be visible. Now to further adjust this camera view, I can go to viscous term u and we have this option that is called as Tom you model. So click on this camera one option and this will show me the current view of this drawing. So I can add just my view from the center point. And here's how we're rendering this. Correct, just seeing our current view. What I can do is I'll just drag it around. Now I turn on all the shadows and where we'll turn on the sky as well. So if I click on sky background, this will only create a background on this guy and I click on this guy we don't. And elimination. This will give you a little bit of shadow each line at this as the ground and sky image. So click on this guy vagrant elimination. Now our images or our model isn't ready to be rendered. You can see that the elimination and sky is now visible. There is some pseudo each line or you can save fitted line through it. This guy in that arm touches. Right? Now, I will click on this current view to be the realistic. For this, it will display how the Render should look like. Now, next thing is rendering it. Before we move to the rendering, we have this render panel on this right hands. When implicant this random rendered, I can select the quality of this. If I click on low-quality, this will only apply single rendering level. There are fewer and letting levels means enforced gender endeavor. It will create a specific stereo for gender in secondary, science and other qualities, bombs, tanks, and etc. So similarly, there are few qualities of rendering or Tibet. Now they did a coffee break that approximately texts 10 minutes. That is a lunch quality that takes 60 Minutes ended overnight quality tech takes 20 minute, sorry, 12 hours. So this is the types of quality of render we can render it. Now, we'll this rendering viewport rendering region and enduring window. So we will currently render the window or even the custom view that is we openly said. So right-click to render window. Next option here we have is rendered economic exposure. And this will automatically under the environment talks exposure. But you don't need to change this. And this is our render window. This will be available once I render is done, so I will close it for now. Get another option that is rendering gallery and inequality. So it ended in Cloud. Rendering cloud is used. You have a specific subscription plan of what okayed that lets you rendering Cloud amidst all this modal files or your product to your Autodesk account and it will be rendered in order less clutter was you might have to pay a lot more for that. So I prefer you do not choose that. And it is also not available for the student account as well. And this end regularity is nothing but though you are previously rendered. Rendered images that are in debt were rendered in Cloud by you. So if your subscription to official auto grade, you will use this both tools. The last option for this tutorial is render size. So currently you can't just move into pixel size of your render image. And do remember that as much as larger the size you keep up your render image, it will take more time to be rendered. So potentially we will be going with this, this 720 P, that is HDTV. And I will keep the quality to be low light, or let's say with COVID the medium one. Now, to render it, you just click on this render to size option. When I click on this for ended up window will be popped up on screen and it will start rendering my drawing. You can notice them to levels are shown here. Currently you to the level one and slowly it will be rendering. Currently it is initializing the drawing for me and it will start rendering egg will go full screen for this. And let's wait until it is rendered. Again. Preview or you can say new guy can see the timing and the procedure of rendering though this bill option. So currently our images started to render. I'll close this level one. And let's wait a few minutes until it is rendered. So I will just little bit fast-forward it because this may take five to ten minutes for this one. So as you can see that our rendering is now completed. You can see that it took nearly five minutes and 25 seconds. I can zoom and show it to you. So you can see that this is the medium quality of kingdom. If you render it in a high-quality display, look much better. And you can see that this textures and bombs I was so visible, this crosswise bumps and textures. So this is the quantity of render or our auto bed can provide you, right? So auto very generally use for this showcasing our basic modelling. So it may not poor to exactly high-quality render, but, but it can give idea to clean a house should look to say with his image, you can click on the save option. You can zoom in and zoom out with this option either. And you can also print it directly if your printer connected to your computer. So I've just save it, let's say nim to mimic Toby and render. And I can toggle between different types of image formats as well. I would let it be Chet PT or a PNG. Png. And I will click on Save. Now. Now PNG image options below some saving option that you can set it there is a RGB values, right? So if my, this photo is viewed in another type of screen, it will hold its whole color, or you can say it will change the colors a little bit so that it be 32-bits. So it will be accepted in most of older type of screens and apply Cauchy. Our images saved as well. Well, we can close this rendered video.